You are on page 1of 324

DESIGNER'S REFERENCE HANDBOOK

Advanced Genset Controller, AGC 200

Functional description
Display menu structure
PID controller
Procedure for parameter setup

DEIF A/S Frisenborgvej 33 DK-7800 Skive Tel.: +45 9614 9614 Fax: +45 9614 9615 info@deif.com www.deif.com

isenborgvej 33 DK-7800 Skive Tel.: +45 9614 9614 Fax: +45 9614 9615 info@deif.com www.deif.com
14 9614 Fax: +45 9614 9615 info@deif.com www.deif.com

Document no.: 4189340609K


SW version: 4.52.x or later

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

1. General information
1.1. Warnings, legal information and safety..................................................................................................8
1.1.1. Warnings and notes ......................................................................................................................8
1.1.2. Legal information and disclaimer ..................................................................................................8
1.1.3. Safety issues ................................................................................................................................8
1.1.4. Electrostatic discharge awareness ...............................................................................................8
1.1.5. Factory settings ............................................................................................................................8
1.2. About the Designer's Reference Handbook...........................................................................................9
1.2.1. General purpose ...........................................................................................................................9
1.2.2. Intended users ..............................................................................................................................9
1.2.3. Contents and overall structure ......................................................................................................9

2. General product information


2.1. Introduction...........................................................................................................................................10
2.2. Type of product....................................................................................................................................10
2.3. Options.................................................................................................................................................10
2.4. PC utility software warning...................................................................................................................10

3. Functional descriptions
3.1. Standard functions and application types.............................................................................................11
3.1.1. Standard functions and application types....................................................................................11
3.2. Standard functions...............................................................................................................................11
3.2.1. Operation modes ........................................................................................................................11
3.2.2. Engine control and protection......................................................................................................11
3.2.3. Generator protections (ANSI)......................................................................................................11
3.2.4. Busbar/mains protections (ANSI) ...............................................................................................11
3.2.5. Display and unit front...................................................................................................................11
3.2.6. M-Logic........................................................................................................................................12
3.3. Standard protections............................................................................................................................12
3.3.1. Loss of excitation.........................................................................................................................12
3.3.2. Voltage-dependent over-current..................................................................................................13
3.3.3. Unbalanced current.....................................................................................................................14
3.3.4. Unbalanced voltage.....................................................................................................................14
3.3.5. Over-excitation.............................................................................................................................15
3.3.6. Decision of measurements..........................................................................................................16
3.4. Terminal strip overview........................................................................................................................17
3.4.1. Terminals.....................................................................................................................................17
3.4.2. Available CAN ports.....................................................................................................................20
3.5. Measurement systems.........................................................................................................................20
3.5.1. Three-phase system....................................................................................................................20
3.5.2. Single phase system....................................................................................................................21
3.5.3. Split phase system.......................................................................................................................21
3.6. Nominal settings...................................................................................................................................22
3.6.1. Nominal settings..........................................................................................................................22
3.6.2. Switch between the nominal settings...........................................................................................22
3.6.3. Scaling.........................................................................................................................................24
3.7. Applications..........................................................................................................................................25
3.7.1. About applications.......................................................................................................................25
3.7.2. AMF (no back synchronisation)...................................................................................................26
3.7.3. AMF (with back synchronisation).................................................................................................26
3.7.4. Island operation...........................................................................................................................27
3.7.5. Fixed power/base load.................................................................................................................27
3.7.6. Peak shaving...............................................................................................................................29
3.7.7. Load takeover..............................................................................................................................31
3.7.8. Mains power export (fixed power to mains).................................................................................32
3.8. Running mode description....................................................................................................................33
3.8.1. Semi-auto mode..........................................................................................................................33
3.8.2. Test mode....................................................................................................................................34

DEIF A/S

Page 2 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

3.8.3. Manual mode...............................................................................................................................35


3.8.4. OFF mode....................................................................................................................................36
3.9. Single-line diagrams.............................................................................................................................36
3.9.1. Island operation...........................................................................................................................36
3.9.2. Automatic mains failure/fixed power/base load...........................................................................37
3.9.3. Peak shaving/load takeover/mains power export........................................................................37
3.9.4. Multiple gensets, load sharing ....................................................................................................38
3.10. Flowcharts..........................................................................................................................................38
3.10.1. Flowcharts.................................................................................................................................38
3.11. Sequences.........................................................................................................................................52
3.11.1. About sequences.......................................................................................................................52

4. Display and menu structure


4.1. Display and menu stucture...................................................................................................................63
4.1.1. Display unit..................................................................................................................................63
4.1.2. Push-button functions..................................................................................................................63
4.1.3. LED functions..............................................................................................................................64
4.1.4. Menu structure ............................................................................................................................64
4.1.5. Entry window...............................................................................................................................65
4.1.6. View menu...................................................................................................................................65
4.1.7. View menu navigation..................................................................................................................66
4.1.8. Display contrast ..........................................................................................................................66
4.1.9. Status line texts...........................................................................................................................67
4.1.10. Texts only related to power management (AGC 24x only)........................................................70
4.1.11. Available display views .............................................................................................................72
4.1.12. Mode overview ..........................................................................................................................74
4.1.13. Password...................................................................................................................................76
4.1.14. Parameter access......................................................................................................................77

5. PID controller
5.1. PID controller........................................................................................................................................78
5.1.1. PID controller...............................................................................................................................78
5.1.2. Controllers...................................................................................................................................78
5.1.3. Principle drawing ........................................................................................................................80
5.1.4. Proportional regulator .................................................................................................................81
5.1.5. Load share controller/var share controller...................................................................................85
5.1.6. Synchronising controller .............................................................................................................86
5.1.7. Relay control................................................................................................................................86

6. Synchronisation
6.1. Synchronisation....................................................................................................................................90
6.2. Dynamic synchronisation.....................................................................................................................90
6.2.1. Close signal.................................................................................................................................91
6.2.2. Load picture after synchronising..................................................................................................91
6.2.3. Adjustments.................................................................................................................................92
6.3. Static synchronisation..........................................................................................................................93
6.3.1. Phase controller...........................................................................................................................94
6.3.2. Close signal.................................................................................................................................94
6.3.3. Load picture after synchronisation...............................................................................................94
6.3.4. Adjustments.................................................................................................................................95
6.4. GB closing before excitation.................................................................................................................96
6.4.1. Flowchart 1, GB handling ...........................................................................................................97
6.4.2. Flowchart 2, TB handling (AGC 244 only) ..................................................................................98
6.4.3. Genset start actions.....................................................................................................................99
6.4.4. Breaker sequence........................................................................................................................99
6.4.5. "Close before excitation" failure.................................................................................................100
6.5. Separate synchronising relay.............................................................................................................100
6.5.1. Separate synchronising relay ...................................................................................................100
6.6. Inhibit conditions before synchronising mains breaker.......................................................................102

DEIF A/S

Page 3 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

7. Engine communication
7.1. Engine communication.......................................................................................................................104
7.1.1. Engine communication..............................................................................................................104
7.1.2. Modbus communication.............................................................................................................104
7.1.3. Wiring.........................................................................................................................................104
7.1.4. Principle diagram.......................................................................................................................104
7.1.5. Functional description................................................................................................................104
7.1.6. Show engine values in display unit............................................................................................110
7.1.7. Control commands sent to the engine.......................................................................................114
7.1.8. EIC 50 Hz to 60 Hz switch.........................................................................................................115
7.1.9. EIC droop...................................................................................................................................115
7.1.10. EIC inhibit................................................................................................................................116
7.1.11. EIC idle....................................................................................................................................116
7.1.12. Specific engine type descriptions............................................................................................116
7.1.13. Caterpillar/Perkins (J1939)......................................................................................................117
7.1.14. Cummins CM850-CM570 (J1939)...........................................................................................118
7.1.15. Detroit Diesel DDEC (J1939)...................................................................................................119
7.1.16. Deutz EMR 2-EMR 3 (J1939)..................................................................................................120
7.1.17. Generic J1939 (J1939)............................................................................................................120
7.1.18. Iveco (J1939)...........................................................................................................................121
7.1.19. John Deere JDEC (J1939).......................................................................................................122
7.1.20. MTU J1939 Smart Connect.....................................................................................................122
7.1.21. MTU ADEC (CANopen) ..........................................................................................................123
7.1.22. MTU ADEC module 501, without SAM module (option H13)..................................................126
7.1.23. MTU MDEC module 302/303 (MTU) ......................................................................................129
7.1.24. Scania EMS (J1939) ...............................................................................................................130
7.1.25. Scania EMS 2 S6 (J1939).......................................................................................................131
7.1.26. Volvo Penta EMS (J1939) ......................................................................................................133
7.1.27. Volvo Penta EMS 2 (J1939) ...................................................................................................134
7.1.28. Parameters .............................................................................................................................134
7.1.29. Modbus communication...........................................................................................................135
7.1.30. Reading of analogue values....................................................................................................135
7.1.31. Reading of diagnostic codes....................................................................................................138
7.1.32. Alarms, Caterpillar/Perkins .....................................................................................................142
7.1.33. Alarms, Cummins ...................................................................................................................143
7.1.34. Alarms, DDEC Detroit engines ............................................................................................145
7.1.35. Alarms, EMR 2 EMR 3 Deutz engines ..............................................................................146
7.1.36. Alarms, Generic J1939 ...........................................................................................................147
7.1.37. Alarms, Iveco ..........................................................................................................................148
7.1.38. Alarms, JDEC John Deere engines .....................................................................................149
7.1.39. Alarms, MTU J1939 Smart Connect .......................................................................................150
7.1.40. Alarms, MTU ADEC ................................................................................................................151
7.1.41. MTU ADEC module 501, without SAM module (H13 option)..................................................154
7.1.42. Alarms, MTU MDEC series 2000/4000 module 302 & 303 ..............................................156
7.1.43. Alarms, Scania ........................................................................................................................157
7.1.44. Alarms, Volvo Penta ...............................................................................................................160

8. Power management
8.1. Power management...........................................................................................................................161
8.1.1. Power management functions ..................................................................................................161
8.1.2. Applications ..............................................................................................................................162
8.1.3. Initial power management setup ...............................................................................................165
8.1.4. Application design......................................................................................................................165
8.1.5. Remove a unit from the power management system................................................................182
8.1.6. Add a unit to the power management system...........................................................................183
8.1.7. CAN failure mode......................................................................................................................184
8.1.8. CAN bus fail classes..................................................................................................................187
8.1.9. CAN bus alarms.........................................................................................................................187

DEIF A/S

Page 4 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

8.1.10. Quick setup .............................................................................................................................188


8.1.11. 9180 Quick setup ....................................................................................................................190
8.1.12. Command unit ........................................................................................................................191
8.1.13. Load-dependent starting and stopping ...................................................................................191
8.1.14. Load management ..................................................................................................................199
8.1.15. Load sharing ...........................................................................................................................202
8.1.16. Island ramp-up with load steps ...............................................................................................203
8.1.17. Fixed power ramp-up with load steps .....................................................................................203
8.1.18. Freeze power ramp .................................................................................................................204
8.1.19. ATS applications .....................................................................................................................204
8.1.20. Fail class .................................................................................................................................205
8.1.21. Local/remote/timer operation ..................................................................................................205
8.1.22. Multi-starting gensets ..............................................................................................................207
8.1.23. Priority selection .....................................................................................................................209
8.1.24. Conditional connection of heavy consumers ..........................................................................213
8.1.25. Ground relay............................................................................................................................215
8.1.26. Stop of non-connected gensets ..............................................................................................216
8.1.27. Secured mode ........................................................................................................................216
8.1.28. Base load ................................................................................................................................217
8.1.29. Asymmetric load sharing (LS) .................................................................................................217
8.1.30. Tie breaker configuration ........................................................................................................218
8.1.31. Island application with TB .......................................................................................................220
8.1.32. Configurable CAN IDs ............................................................................................................220
8.1.33. CAN flags ................................................................................................................................221
8.1.34. Common PF control ................................................................................................................222
8.1.35. Parameter lists, common settings ...........................................................................................223
8.2. Multiple mains....................................................................................................................................223
8.2.1. Definitions..................................................................................................................................225
8.2.2. Plant mode handling..................................................................................................................227

9. Additional functions
9.1. Additional functions............................................................................................................................229
9.1.1. Start functions ...........................................................................................................................229
9.1.2. Breaker types ............................................................................................................................232
9.1.3. Breaker spring load time ...........................................................................................................233
9.1.4. Alarm inhibit ..............................................................................................................................234
9.1.5. Access lock ...............................................................................................................................237
9.1.6. Overlap (short time parallel) .....................................................................................................239
9.1.7. Digital mains breaker control ....................................................................................................240
9.1.8. Command timers (time-dependent start/stop) ..........................................................................240
9.1.9. Start/stop next generator ..........................................................................................................241
9.1.10. Derate genset .........................................................................................................................244
9.1.11. Idle running .............................................................................................................................246
9.1.12. Engine heater .........................................................................................................................252
9.1.13. Master clock ............................................................................................................................252
9.1.14. Battery test ..............................................................................................................................253
9.1.15. Ventilation ...............................................................................................................................255
9.1.16. Summer/winter time ................................................................................................................256
9.1.17. Switchboard error ...................................................................................................................256
9.1.18. Not in Auto ..............................................................................................................................257
9.1.19. Fail class .................................................................................................................................257
9.1.20. 4th current transformer input ..................................................................................................259
9.1.21. Neutral line and ground fault inverse over-current ..................................................................259
9.1.22. Trip of non-essential load (NEL) .............................................................................................263
9.1.23. Service timers .........................................................................................................................264
9.1.24. Wire fail detection ...................................................................................................................264
9.1.25. Digital inputs ...........................................................................................................................265
9.1.26. Multi-inputs .............................................................................................................................270
9.1.27. Input function selection ...........................................................................................................275

DEIF A/S

Page 5 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

9.1.28. Outputs ...................................................................................................................................276


9.1.29. Manual governor and AVR control ..........................................................................................276
9.1.30. External governor and AVR control.........................................................................................277
9.1.31. Language selection .................................................................................................................280
9.1.32. Tools menu .............................................................................................................................280
9.1.33. Event log .................................................................................................................................282
9.1.34. Counters .................................................................................................................................282
9.1.35. M-Logic ...................................................................................................................................283
9.1.36. Configurable alarm LEDs ........................................................................................................283
9.1.37. USW communication ..............................................................................................................284
9.1.38. Differential measurement.........................................................................................................285
9.1.39. Configurable alarms.................................................................................................................286
9.1.40. Oil renewal function.................................................................................................................288
9.1.41. Double starter..........................................................................................................................289
9.2. Mains-dependent droop functions......................................................................................................291
9.2.1. Frequency-dependent droop.....................................................................................................291
9.2.2. Voltage support..........................................................................................................................293
9.2.3. Example of voltage-dependent power factor ............................................................................296
9.2.4. Example of power-dependent power factor control ..................................................................298
9.3. Fuel pump logic..................................................................................................................................300
9.3.1. Fuel fill check.............................................................................................................................301
9.4. Fan logic.............................................................................................................................................302
9.4.1. Fan parameters.........................................................................................................................302
9.4.2. Input for fan control....................................................................................................................303
9.4.3. Fan start/stop.............................................................................................................................304
9.4.4. Fan output..................................................................................................................................304
9.4.5. Fan start delay...........................................................................................................................305
9.4.6. Fan running feedback ...............................................................................................................305
9.4.7. Fan failure..................................................................................................................................306
9.4.8. Fan priority (running hours).......................................................................................................306
9.4.9. Fan priority update.....................................................................................................................308
9.5. CAN share..........................................................................................................................................308
9.5.1. Description of function ..............................................................................................................308
9.5.2. How to set up ............................................................................................................................309
9.5.3. CAN share failure .....................................................................................................................310
9.6. Droop mode........................................................................................................................................311
9.6.1. Principle and setup ...................................................................................................................311
9.6.2. Voltage droop example .............................................................................................................312
9.6.3. High droop setting......................................................................................................................312
9.6.4. Low droop setting......................................................................................................................312
9.6.5. Compensation for isochronous governors.................................................................................313
9.7. Step-up transformer...........................................................................................................................313
9.7.1. Step-up transformer...................................................................................................................313
9.7.2. Vector group for step-up transformer ........................................................................................314
9.8. Demand of peak currents...................................................................................................................320
9.8.1. I max. demand...........................................................................................................................320
9.8.2. I thermal demand.......................................................................................................................320
9.9. Power and cos phi offsets..................................................................................................................321
9.9.1. Power offsets.............................................................................................................................321
9.9.2. Cos phi offsets...........................................................................................................................321

10. Procedure for parameter setup


10.1. Procedure for parameter setup........................................................................................................322
10.1.1. Procedure for parameter setup ...............................................................................................322
10.1.2. Finding the selected parameter ..............................................................................................322
10.1.3. Parameter descriptions............................................................................................................322
10.1.4. Setup ......................................................................................................................................322

11. Parameter list

DEIF A/S

Page 6 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

11.1. Parameter list...................................................................................................................................324


11.1.1. Parameter list ..........................................................................................................................324

DEIF A/S

Page 7 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

General information

1. General information
1.1 Warnings, legal information and safety
1.1.1 Warnings and notes
Throughout this document, a number of warnings and notes with helpful user information will be presented.
To ensure that these are noticed, they will be highlighted as follows in order to separate them from the general text.
Warnings
Warnings indicate a potentially dangerous situation, which could result in death, personal injury or damaged equipment, if certain guidelines are not followed.
Notes
Notes provide general information, which will be helpful for the reader to bear in mind.

1.1.2 Legal information and disclaimer


DEIF takes no responsibility for installation or operation of the generator set. If there is any doubt about how
to install or operate the engine/generator controlled by the Multi-line 2 unit, the company responsible for the
installation or the operation of the set must be contacted.
The Multi-line 2 unit is not to be opened by unauthorised personnel. If opened anyway, the warranty will be lost.
Disclaimer
DEIF A/S reserves the right to change any of the contents of this document without prior notice.

1.1.3 Safety issues


Installing and operating the Multi-line 2 unit may imply work with dangerous currents and voltages. Therefore,
the installation should only be carried out by authorised personnel who understand the risks involved in working with live electrical equipment.
Be aware of the hazardous live currents and voltages. Do not touch any AC measurement inputs as this could lead to injury or death.

1.1.4 Electrostatic discharge awareness


Sufficient care must be taken to protect the terminal against static discharges during the installation. Once the
unit is installed and connected, these precautions are no longer necessary.

1.1.5 Factory settings


The Multi-line 2 unit is delivered from factory with certain factory settings. These are based on average values
and are not necessarily the correct settings for matching the engine/generator set in question. Precautions
must be taken to check the settings before running the engine/generator set.

DEIF A/S

Page 8 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

General information

1.2 About the Designer's Reference Handbook


1.2.1 General purpose
This Designer's Reference Handbook mainly includes functional descriptions, presentation of display unit and
menu structure, information about the PID controller, the procedure for parameter setup and reference to parameter lists.
The general purpose of this document is to provide useful overall information about the functionality of the
unit and its applications. This document also offers the user the information he needs in order to successfully
set up the parameters needed in his specific application.
Please make sure to read this document before starting to work with the Multi-line 2 unit and
the genset to be controlled. Failure to do this could result in human injury or damage to the
equipment.

1.2.2 Intended users


This Designer's Reference Handbook is mainly intended for the panel builder designer in charge. On the basis of this document, the panel builder designer will give the electrician the information he needs in order to
install the Multi-line 2 unit, e.g. detailed electrical drawings. In some cases, the electrician may use these installation instructions himself.

1.2.3 Contents and overall structure


This document is divided into chapters, and in order to make the structure simple and easy to use, each
chapter will begin from the top of a new page.

DEIF A/S

Page 9 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

General product information

2. General product information


2.1 Introduction
The AGC 200 is part of the DEIF Multi-line 2 product family. Multi-line 2 is a complete range of multi-function
generator protection and control products integrating all the functions you need into one compact and attractive solution.The concept of the AGC 200 is to offer a cost-effective solution to genset builders, who need a
flexible generator protection and control unit for medium to large genset applications. Being part of the Multiline product family, the standard functions can be supplemented with a variety of optional functions.

2.2 Type of product


The Advanced Genset Controller is a micro-processor based control unit containing all necessary functions
for protection and control of a genset. It contains all necessary 3-phase measuring circuits, and all values and
alarms are presented on the LCD display

2.3 Options
The Multi-line 2 product range consists of different basic versions which can be supplemented with the flexible options needed to provide the optimum solution. The options cover e.g. various protections for generator,
busbar and mains, voltage/VAr/PF control, various outputs, power management, serial communication, additional operator display, etc.

A full options list is included in the data sheet, document no. 4921240362. Please see www.deif.com

2.4 PC utility software warning


It is possible to remote control the genset from the PC utility software or M-Vision by use of a
modem. To avoid personal injury, make sure that it is safe to remote control the genset.

DEIF A/S

Page 10 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

3. Functional descriptions
3.1 Standard functions and application types
3.1.1 Standard functions and application types
This chapter includes functional descriptions of standard functions as well as illustrations of the relevant application types. Flowcharts and single-line diagrams will be used in order to simplify the information.

3.2 Standard functions


3.2.1 Operation modes

Automatic mains failure


Island operation
Fixed power/base load
Peak shaving
Load takeover
Mains power export

3.2.2 Engine control and protection

Start/stop sequences
Run and stop coil
Relay outputs for governor control
J1939 engine communication and control
Multi-inputs (digital, 4-20 mA, Pt100 or RMI)
Digital inputs

3.2.3 Generator protections (ANSI)

Overcurrent, 6 levels (51)


Reverse power, 2 levels (32)
Voltage-dependent overcurrent (92)
Overvoltage, 2 levels (27)
Undervoltage, 3 levels (59)
Overfrequency, 3 levels (81)
Underfrequency, 3 levels (81)
Overload, 5 levels (32)
Unbalanced current (46)
Unbalanced voltage (60)
Loss of excitation (40)
Overexcitation (40)
Non-essential load/load shedding, 3 levels (I, Hz, P>, P>>)

3.2.4 Busbar/mains protections (ANSI)

Overvoltage, 2 levels (27)


Undervoltage, 2 levels (59)
Overfrequency, 2 levels (81)
Underfrequency, 2 levels (81)

3.2.5 Display and unit front

Push-buttons for start and stop


Push-buttons for breaker operations

DEIF A/S

Page 11 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

Status texts

3.2.6 M-Logic

Simple logic configuration tool


Selectable input events
Selectable output commands

3.3 Standard protections


3.3.1 Loss of excitation
To prevent damage to the generator because of a pole slip, the AGC 200 has a protection that can trip a
breaker for example if loss of excitation occurs. The protection is located in parameters 1521 to 1526.
The percentage set in parameter 1521 is the maximum percentage of imported kvar compared to the nominal
kW of the genset.
Example: The genset has a nominal of 1000 kW. The percentage in parameter 1521 is set to 15 %. This
means that if the genset is 150 kvar capacitive or more, the timer set in parameter 1522 will start. When the
timer has expired, an action will occur. This action/fail class is decided in parameter 1526.
To set the percentage correctly, a calculation must be made. For this purpose, the operating chart for the
generator is needed. An operating chart for a generator is shown below.

The alternator 100 % load is the outer circle, and the engine 100 % load is the blue dotted line. With the operating chart it is possible to see where the alternator-safe line is closest to the 1.0 PF line. This is marked with
a red arrow. In this operating chart each vertical line represents 10 %, and by this, the dot closets to 1.0 PF
has been read to 18 %. With the nominal alternator values and the nominal engine values, the calculations
can be made.
Example: The reading of 18 % is used. The alternator has a nominal power of 2500 kVA, and the engine has
a nominal power of 2000 kW. The distance between the dot and the 1.0 PF line represents a power, and this
is calculated to: 2500 kVA*18 % = 450 kvar
The setting of parameter 1521 can now be calculated: 450 kvar/2000 kW = 22.5 %

DEIF A/S

Page 12 of 324

Functional descriptions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

3.3.2 Voltage-dependent over-current


The voltage-dependent over-current is a protection for generators without permanent magnets. This protection occurs when a short circuit is present and the voltage drops. When a short circuit occurs, the voltage will
make a drop and the current will rise for a very short period and then drop to a lower level afterwards. The
short circuit current level can drop below the rated current of the generator, and thus the short circuit will not
be tripped, which may result in personal injury or damaged equipment. When the short circuit is present, the
voltage will be low. This can be used for tripping at a lower current, when the voltage is low.
The parameters for this are 1101 to 1115. The set points for the different levels are set in parameters 1101 to
1106. The set point refers to six different current levels and voltage levels. All values are in percentage to the
rated values that are set in parameters 6000 to 6030. The six voltage levels are already determined, so only
the current levels must be set. The six set points will create a curve, which will be explained by an example:
The six different set points have been set to the values shown in the table below.
Parameter

1101

1102

1103

1104

1105

1106

Voltage level
(Fixed/not adjustable)

50

60

70

80

90

100

Current level
(Set point/adjustable)

50

55

65

80

100

130

The six values can then be transferred to a curve, which is more readable:

When the actual values represent a point above the curve, the breaker should be tripped. The curve shows
that the generator breaker will trip when two requirements are met: The generator voltage is below 50 % of
rated, and the current is above 50 % of rated.
Timer, outputs, enable and fail class are set in parameters 1111 to 1115. The timer in 1111 decides how long
the fault will exceed the limits, before an action will take place. The action/fail class is decided in parameter
1115 and can be set from a warning to a shutdown. As a default, this will be set to trip the generator breaker.
The outputs can be used to activate a relay. This will make it possible to send a signal to external equipment
regarding this specific alarm. It is possible to configure two relay outputs for the alarm. The protection function
is activated as a default, but can be disabled in parameter 1114.

DEIF A/S

Page 13 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

3.3.3 Unbalanced current


The generator can be in a situation where it is not delivering its rated load, but the current is very high in one
of the phases. This can be caused by an unbalanced load. When a generator load is unbalanced, the stress
on the generator will be higher than normal. The heat in one of the windings can also be very high. Unbalanced load can also develop if a cable has been damaged or dropped off, or if a fuse to a single phase has
blown. To protect the generator from unnecessary stress, the protection against unbalanced load can be
used. It is located in parameters 1501 to 1506. Parameter 1203 is also related to these parameters. Parameter 1203 defines how the calculations should be done, and it can be set to nominal or average.
If parameter 1203 is set to nominal, the AGC uses the maximum and the minimum current and subtracts the
values. Then it will compare this to the nominal current typed in parameter 6003, 6013, 6023 or 6033, depending on which of the nominal settings is activated. The comparison to the nominal current will give a percentage that is related to parameter 1501.
Example: A genset is rated at 400 A and is supplying a load. The currents of the three phases are: 115 A,
110 A and 100 A. The AGC will use the maximum and the minimum current, in this case 115 A and 100 A.
The calculation will now be: ((115 - 100)*100)/400 = 3.75 %. If parameter 1501 is set to 4 %, the genset will
keep running. If parameter 1501 is set to 4 %, and the genset's rated current is 400 A, it can be calculated
how unbalanced the genset is allowed to be: (4*400)/100 = 16 A. When the phases are loaded more than 16
A, the generator breaker will be tripped. This is independent of the size of the load.
Parameter 1203 can also be set to average. The AGC will then calculate an average of the phases and compare how unbalanced the load is between them.
Example: An genset is rated at 400 A and is supplying a load. The currents of the three phases are: 115 A,
110 A and 100 A. The AGC will now calculate an average of these currents, take the one that differs most
from the average and calculate a percentage of deviation: (115 + 110 + 100)/3 = 108.3 A. Then the AGC will
analyse which of the currents that differs most. In this example, it will be the 100 A. The maximum difference
will be compared to the average current: ((108.3 - 100)*100)/108.3 = 7.7 %. If the load had been bigger, this
calculated percentage would have been smaller. If the phase currents were 315 A, 310 A and 300 A, the
average would be: (315 + 310 + 300)/3 = 308.3 A. This would give a deviation of:
((308.3 - 300)*100)/308.3 = 2.7 %.

3.3.4 Unbalanced voltage


As well as having an unbalanced current protection, the AGC 200 also has an unbalanced voltage protection.
The AGC 200 will measure on each of the phase voltages and compare them to each other. If the genset is
mounted in an application with capacitors to compensate and a failure occurs in one of the capacitors, a difference in voltage may appear. The windings for this phase will be overheated and thus exposed to heavy
stress. To prevent this, the unbalanced voltage protection can be set.
The percentage set in parameter 1511 is a percentage of deviation compared to the average voltage in the
three phases. The average comparison is described with an example below.
Example: Phase L1 to L2 is 431 V, phase L2 to L3 is 400 V and phase L3 to L1 is 410 V. The three voltages
must be added up to find an average voltage: (431 + 400 + 410)/3 = 414 V. Now the voltage with the biggest
voltage difference must be subtracted, in this case L1 to L2: 431 - 414 = 17 V. Now the biggest voltage deviation in percent can be calculated: 17/414 = 4.1 %.
This means that if parameter 1511 is set to 4.1 %, it is allowed to have a voltage difference of 31 V in this
application, before the unbalanced voltage protection can be activated.

DEIF A/S

Page 14 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

In the example, phase-phase measurements have been used. Phase-phase is selected as default, but it can
also be phase-neutral measurements, and this can be changed in parameter 1201. (Parameter 1201 will be
described later).
Be aware that when parameter 1201 is changed, it will influence other protections.
In parameter 1512 the timer can be set, and in parameter 1515 this protection is enabled. In parameter 1516
the fail class is decided. It is also possible to enable two relay outputs when the alarm occurs. The two relay
outputs can be set in parameters 1513 and 1514.

3.3.5 Over-excitation
When heavy inductive loads are connected, an over-excitation of the generator can occur. Over-excitation
can overheat windings in the generator and create a failure over time. Over-excitation can also occur if the
load of a generator quickly changes from inductive to capacitive, or in an application with more than one generator in case one of the generators' exciter fails. To set the over-excitation protection correctly, the operating
chart of the genset is requisite.
A random operating chart of a genset is shown below:

An example will be used to describe how the setting is made.


Example: The engine is of 2000 kW, and the alternator is of 2500 kVA. The engine represents the blue dotted
line in the diagram above, and the alternator is the "outer circle". When this protection is set, a specific point
should be pointed out. It is the point where the engine curve and the alternator curve intersect, and it is
marked with a red arrow in the operating chart. It is requisite to calculate how many kvar the genset can export:
The kvar is used to calculate a percentage for
parameter 1531. The percentage is calculated like this: kvar/kw = 1500/2000 = 75 %. When parameter 1531
is set to 75 %, the genset is allowed to export 1500 kvar all the time. The 75 % setting represents the red
dotted line in the operating chart. It will be possible to set an alarm when the load has crossed the red dotted
line for a certain period of time. The timer is set in parameter 1532.

DEIF A/S

Page 15 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

3.3.6 Decision of measurements


The protection for unbalanced voltage, for example, can be set to either a phase-phase or a phase-neutral
measurement. These settings also influence other protections and settings in the AGC. There are three parameters that can change how the measurements are done in the AGC: 1201, 1202 and 1203.
In parameter 1201 it can be set how the voltage measurements should be done for example on generator
voltage protection. It can be set to either phase-phase or phase-neutral; by default it is set to phase-phase.
When this parameter is set, it should be taken into account how the loads in the application are connected. If
many of the loads are connected as phase-neutral, the setting of parameter 1201 should be set to phaseneutral. On a generator unit it will be the voltage measurements on the generator side of a breaker, and on a
mains unit it will be the voltage measurements on the mains feeder side of the mains breaker.
Parameter 1201 influences:
1150, 1160
1170, 1180, 1190
1510
1660, 1700

Generator over-voltage protection 1 and 2


Generator under-voltage protection 1, 2 and 3
Generator unbalanced voltage protection
Mains time-dependent under-voltage 1 and 2
(Measured on mains feeder side of mains breaker. Only in mains units)

Parameter 1202 is similar to 1201. It is also considering how the measurements should be made. But this
parameter refers to the other voltage measurements. On a generator unit it will be the busbar voltage measurements, and on a mains unit it will be the voltage measurements after the mains breaker. This parameter
can also be set to phase-phase measurement or phase-neutral measurement.
Parameter 1202 influences:
1270, 1280, 1290
1300, 1310, 1320, 1330
1620
1660, 1700
7480, 7490

Busbar over-voltage protection 1 and 2


Busbar under-voltage protection 1, 2 and 3
Busbar unbalanced voltage protection
Busbar time-dependent under-voltage 1 & 2
(Measured on busbar side of generator breaker. Only in generator units)
Busbar over-voltage average protection 1 and 2

Parameter 1203 refers to the current measurement as described earlier in this chapter, under "Unbalanced
current".
Parameter 1203 influences:
1500
1710

DEIF A/S

Unbalanced current 1
Unbalanced current 2

Page 16 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

3.4 Terminal strip overview


3.4.1 Terminals
The terminal strip overview shows I/Os for selectable standard and optional hardware.
Please refer to the data sheet for accurate information about possible configurations of the
AGC 200.
Please refer to the input/output lists in the installation instructions for detailed information
about the I/Os.

DEIF A/S

Page 17 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

DEIF A/S

Functional descriptions

Page 18 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

AGC 212/213: Relay outputs terminals 28-35 and CT terminal 59-60 are not available.

DEIF A/S

Page 19 of 324

Functional descriptions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

3.4.2 Available CAN ports


The table below shows available CAN ports and how each can be configured:
CAN A

CAN B

CAN C

AGC 212, 213

Not available

Not available

OFF
External I/O
H5 EIC
AOP2

AGC 222

Not available

OFF
External I/O
PM Secondary
CANshare
AOP2
PM Primary

OFF
External I/O
H5 EIC
CANshare
AOP2

AGC 232, 233

OFF
External I/O
CANshare
AOP2

OFF
External I/O
CANshare
AOP2

OFF
External I/O
H5 EIC
CANshare
AOP2

AGC 242, 243

OFF
External I/O
PM Primary
CANshare
AOP2
PM Secondary

OFF
External I/O
PM Secondary
CANshare
AOP2
PM Primary

OFF
External I/O
H5 EIC
CANshare
AOP2

AGC 245, 246

OFF
External I/O
PM Primary
AOP2
PM Secondary

OFF
External I/O
PM Secondary
AOP2
PM Primary

OFF
External I/O
H5 EIC
AOP2

3.5 Measurement systems


The AGC is designed for measurement of voltages between 100 and 690 V AC on the terminals. If the voltage is higher, voltage transformers are required. For further reference, the AC wiring diagrams are shown in
the Installation Instructions.
In menu 9130, the measurement principle can be changed; the options are three-phase, single phase and
split phase.
Configure the AGC to match the correct measuring system. When in doubt, contact the switchboard manufacturer for information about the required adjustment.

3.5.1 Three-phase system


When the AGC is delivered from the factory, the three-phase system is selected. When this principle is used,
all three phases must be connected to the AGC.

DEIF A/S

Page 20 of 324

Functional descriptions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

The following adjustments must be made to make the system ready for the three-phase measuring (example
400/230 V AC):
Setting

Adjustment

Description

Adjust to
value

6004

G nom. voltage

Phase-phase voltage of the generator

400 V AC

6041

G transformer

Primary voltage of the G voltage transformer (if installed)

UNOM

6042

G transformer

Secondary voltage of the G voltage transformer (if installed)

UNOM

6051

BB transformer set 1

Primary voltage of the BB voltage transformer (if installed)

UNOM

6052

BB transformer set 1

Secondary voltage of the BB voltage transformer (if installed)

UNOM

6053

BB nom. voltage set 1

Phase-phase voltage of the busbar

UNOM

The AGC has two sets of BB transformer settings, which can be enabled individually in this
measurement system.

3.5.2 Single phase system


The single phase system consists of one phase and the neutral.
The following adjustments must be made to make the system ready for the single phase measuring (example
230 V AC):
Setting

Adjustment

Description

Adjust to
value

6004

G nom. voltage

Phase-neutral voltage of the generator

230 V AC

6041

G transformer

Primary voltage of the G voltage transformer (if installed)

UNOM 3

6042

G transformer

Secondary voltage of the G voltage transformer (if installed)

UNOM 3

6051

BB transformer set 1

Primary voltage of the BB voltage transformer (if installed)

UNOM 3

6052

BB transformer set 1

Secondary voltage of the BB voltage transformer (if installed)

UNOM 3

6053

BB nom. voltage set 1

Phase-phase voltage of the busbar

UNOM 3

The voltage alarms refer to UNOM (230 V AC).


The AGC has two sets of BB transformer settings, which can be enabled individually in this
measurement system.

3.5.3 Split phase system


This is a special application where two phases and neutral are connected to the AGC. The AGC shows phases L1 and L3 in the display. The phase angle between L1 and L3 is 180 degrees. Split phase is possible
between L1-L2 or L1-L3.

DEIF A/S

Page 21 of 324

Functional descriptions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

The following adjustments must be made to make the system ready for the split phase measuring (example
240/120 V AC):
Setting

Adjustment

Description

Adjust to
value

6004

G nom. voltage

Phase-phase voltage of the generator

120 V AC

6041

G transformer

Primary voltage of the G voltage transformer (if installed)

UNOM

6042

G transformer

Secondary voltage of the G voltage transformer (if installed)

UNOM

6051

BB transformer set 1

Primary voltage of the BB voltage transformer (if installed)

UNOM

6052

BB transformer set 1

Secondary voltage of the BB voltage transformer (if installed)

UNOM

6053

BB nom. voltage set 1

Phase-phase voltage of the busbar

UNOM

The measurement UL3L1 shows 240 V AC. The voltage alarm set points refer to the nominal
voltage 120 V AC, and UL3L1 does not activate any alarm.
The AGC has two sets of BB transformer settings, which can be enabled individually in this
measurement system.

3.6 Nominal settings


3.6.1 Nominal settings
The AGC holds four sets of nominal settings, configured in channels 6001 to 6036. It is possible to switch
between the nominal settings 1 to 4, to match different voltages and frequencies. Nominal settings 1 (6001 to
6007) are the nominal settings that are used as default. See paragraph "Switch between the nominal settings" for more information about this feature.
The AGC holds two sets of nominal settings for the busbar, configured in channels 6051 to 6063. Each set
consists of a nominal as well as a primary and secondary voltage value. The "U primary" and "U secondary"
are used to define the primary and secondary voltage values, if any measurement transformers are installed.
If no voltage transformer is installed between generator and busbar, select "BB Unom = G Unom" in channel
6054. With this function activated, none of the BB nominal settings will be considered. Instead, the nominal
BB voltage will be considered equal to nominal generator voltage.

3.6.2 Switch between the nominal settings


The four sets of nominal settings can be individually configured. The AGC is able to switch between the different sets of nominal settings, which enables the use of a specific set of nominal settings related to a specific
application or situation.
If no busbar voltage transformer is present, the primary and secondary side values can be set
to generator nominal value, and channel 6054 is set to "BB Unom = G Unom".
Typically, it is the rental industry that makes use of the possibility to switch nominal parameter settings. The
feature is very useful with mobile gensets, where switching in frequency and voltage is required. Stationary
gensets can make use of this feature as well. For example, in the event of an AMF situation, it may be desirable to increase the nominal power and current settings to achieve increased tolerance regarding the protections.

DEIF A/S

Page 22 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

Activation
Manual switching between the nominal set points can be done in three ways: digital input, AOP or menu
6006.
When using M-Logic, any event can be used to activate an automatic switching of nominal parameter sets.
Digital input
M-Logic is used when a digital input is needed to switch between the four sets of nominal settings. Select the
required input among the input events, and select the nominal settings in the outputs.
Example:
Event A

Event B

Event C

Output

Dig. input no. 23

or

Not used

or

Not used

Set nom. parameter settings 1

Not Dig. input no. 23

or

Not used

or

Not used

Set nom. parameter settings 2

See the "Help" file in the PC utility software for details.


AOP
M-Logic is used when the AOP is used to switch between the four sets of nominal settings. Select the required AOP push-button among the input events, and select the nominal settings in the outputs.
Example:
Event A

Event B

Event C

Output

Button07

or

Not used

or

Not used

Set nom. parameter settings 1

Button08

or

Not used

or

Not used

Set nom. parameter settings 2

See the "Help" file in the PC utility software for details.


Menu settings
In menu 6006, the switching between settings 1 to 4 is made simply by choosing the desired nominal setting.
Four nominal settings of GOV/AVR offsets
In menu 6006, the selection of nominal setting is made. The nominal setting of GOV/AVR offset will follow the
setting in 6006, meaning: nominal setting 1 (6001 to 6005) will follow the GOV/AVR offset in 2550.

DEIF A/S

Page 23 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

Switching between the two "BB nominal settings" (6050 and 6060) is done in the same way as
explained above (channel 6054).

3.6.3 Scaling
Default voltage scaling is set to range 100 V to 25000 V (parameter 9030). To be able to handle applications
above 25000 V and below 100 V, it is necessary to adjust the input range so it matches the actual value of
the primary voltage transformer. This makes it possible for the unit to support a wide range of voltage and
power values. Master password level access is required to change this parameter.

Changing the voltage scaling will also influence the nominal power scaling:
Scaling
parameter 9030

Nom. settings 1 to 4
(power) will change according to parameter
9030

Nom. settings 1 to 4
(voltage) will change according to parameter 9030

Transformer ratio settings


parameters 6041, 6051
and 6053

10 V to 2500 V

1.0 to 900.0 kW

10.0 V to 2500.0 V

10.0 V to 2500.0 V

100 V to 25000 V

10 to 20000 kW

100 V to 25000 V

100 V to 25000 V

0.4 kV to 75 kV

0.10 to 90.00 MW

0.4 kV to 75.00 kV

0.4 kV to 75.00 kV

10 kV to 160 kV

1.0 to 900.0 MW

10.0 kV to 160.0 kV

10.0 kV to 160.0 kV

All nominal values and the primary VT settings must be corrected after the scaling has been
changed in parameter 9030.

DEIF A/S

Page 24 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

3.7 Applications
3.7.1 About applications
This section about applications is to be used for reference, using the particular genset mode
as starting point. It is not suitable for reading from beginning to end.
The unit can be used for the applications listed in the table below.
Application (Single Generator)

Comment

Automatic Mains Failure (no back sync.)

Standard

Automatic Mains Failure (with back sync.)

Standard

Island operation

Standard

Fixed power/base load

Standard

Peak shaving

Standard

Load takeover

Standard

Mains power export (fixed power to mains)

Standard

Application (multiple generators)

Comment

CANbus load sharing

AGC 222, 23x and 24x only

Power management

AGC 222 and 24x only

Genset Mode (Single Generator)

Running Mode
Auto

Semi

Test

Manual

Block

Automatic Mains Failure (no back sync.)

Automatic Mains Failure (with back sync.)

Island operation

Fixed power/base load

Peak shaving

Load takeover

Mains power export

Running Mode
Auto

Semi

Load sharing

Power management

Test
X

Man

Block

For a general description of the available running modes, please refer to the chapter Running
mode description.

DEIF A/S

Page 25 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

3.7.2 AMF (no back synchronisation)


Auto mode description
The unit automatically starts the genset and switches to generator supply at a mains failure after an adjustable delay time. It is possible to adjust the unit to change to genset operation in two different ways:
1. The mains breaker will be opened at genset start-up.
2. The mains breaker will remain closed until the genset is running and the genset voltage and frequency is
OK.
In both cases, the generator breaker will be closed when the generator voltage and frequency is OK, and the
mains breaker is open,
when the mains returns, the unit will switch back to mains supply and cool down and stop the genset. The
switching back to mains supply is done without back synchronisation when the adjusted Mains OK delay
has expired.
Semi-auto mode description
When the generator breaker is closed, the unit will use the nominal frequency as the setpoint for the speed
governor and nominal voltage for the AVR
For a general description of the available running modes, please refer to the chapter Running
mode description.

3.7.3 AMF (with back synchronisation)


Auto mode description
The unit automatically starts the genset and switches to generator supply at a mains failure after an adjustable delay time. It is possible to adjust the unit to change to genset operation in two different ways:
1. The mains breaker will be opened at genset start-up.
2. The mains breaker will remain closed until the genset is running and the genset voltage and frequency is
OK.
In both cases, the generator breaker will be closed when the generator voltage and frequency is OK, and the
mains breaker is open.
When the mains returns, the unit will synchronise the mains breaker to the busbar when the Mains OK delay
has expired. Then the genset cools down and stops.
The automatic mains failure mode can be combined with the overlap function. In that case,
the generator breaker and the mains breaker will never be closed at the same time for a longer
period than the adjusted overlap time.

Semi-auto mode description


When the generator breaker is closed and the mains breaker is opened, the unit will use the nominal frequency as the setpoint for the speed governor and the nominal voltage for the AVR.
When the generator is paralleled to the mains, the governor regulation will no longer be active. If AVR control
is selected, then the setpoint will be the adjusted power factor.
For a general description of the available running modes, please refer to the chapter Running
mode description.

DEIF A/S

Page 26 of 324

Functional descriptions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

3.7.4 Island operation


Auto mode description
The unit automatically starts the genset and closes the generator breaker at a digital start command. When
the stop command is given, the generator breaker is tripped and the genset will be stopped after a coolingdown period. The start and stop commands are used by activating and deactivating a digital input. If the timedependent start/stop commands are to be used, then the auto mode must also be used. In this case, the digital input auto start/stop cannot be used.
Semi-auto mode description
When the generator breaker is closed, the unit will use the nominal frequency as setpoint for the speed governor and the nominal voltage for the AVR.
For a general description of the available running modes, please refer to the chapter Running
mode description.

3.7.5 Fixed power/base load


Auto mode description
The unit automatically starts the genset and synchronises to the mains when the digital input auto start/stop
is activated. After the generator breaker closure, the unit ramps up the load to the setpoint level. When the
stop command is given, the genset is deloaded and stopped after the cooling-down period. The start and stop
commands are used by activating and deactivating a digital input. If the time-dependent start/stop commands
are to be used, then the auto mode must also be used. In this case, the digital input auto start/stop cannot
be used.
kW

Stop signal

Start signal

t
tRAMP-UP

Semi-auto mode description


When the generator breaker is closed and the mains breaker is opened, the unit will use the nominal frequency as the setpoint for the speed governor and the nominal voltage for the AVR.When the generator is paralleled to the mains, the generator power will be increased to the fixed power setpoint (menu 7051). If AVR
control is selected, then the setpoint will be the adjusted power factor (7052).

DEIF A/S

Page 27 of 324

Functional descriptions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Setpoints related to fixed power


2610 Power ramp-up

When this delay has expired, the ramp-up is continued from the delay point

Load steps

Enable load ramping in steps

Steps

Defines the number of steps related to the delay point setting

Ramp speed 2

Defines the slope of ramp-up 2

Power [kWh]

Delay, step 5

Delay

Delay, step 4

At this point, the ramp-up is cancelled until the delay has expired

Delay, step 3

Delay point

Delay, step 2

Defines the slope of ramp-up 1

Delay, step 1

Ramp speed 1

Stop signal

Power Set point

Power ramp
[%/s]
GB closed

Time [sec]
Ramp up, read
from load share line

Ramp down

Ramp-up with load steps


When the GB is closed, the power setpoint continues to rise in ramp-up steps, determined by the number of
steps in menu 2615. If the delay point is set to 20% and the number of load steps is set to 3, the genset will
ramp to 20%, wait the configured delay time, ramp to 40%, wait, ramp to 60%, wait and then ramp to the
present power setpoint.
Freeze power ramp
A way to define the ramp-up steps is to use the freeze power ramp command in M-Logic.
Freeze power ramp active:
The power ramp will stop at any point of the power ramp, and this setpoint will be maintained as long as the
function is active.If the function is activated while ramping from one delay point to another, the ramp will be
fixed until the function is deactivated again.
1. The power ramp will stop at any point of the power ramp, and this setpoint will be maintained as long as
the function is active.
2. If the function is activated while ramping from one delay point to another, the ramp will be fixed until the
function is deactivated again.
3. If the function is activated while the delay timer is timing out, the timer will be stopped and will not continue until the function is deactivated again.

DEIF A/S

Page 28 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

Power ramp 1
This is the primarily used power ramp. Power ramp 1 is only ignored during "Frequency dependent power
droop" or if Power ramp 2 is activated with M-logic.
Power ramp 2
Ch 2616 and 2623 defines the slope of the second power ramp. This is a secondary power ramp mostly used
for "frequency dependent power droop", but it can also be activated with any M-logic event. Ch 2624 (Automatic ramp selection) determines if the ramp 2 is activated by droop or M-logic. If Automatic "ramp selection
is activated", then the second ramp is enabled during power droop. If it is disabled, then the second ramp can
only be activated by M-logic.
The delay starts running when the GB has been closed.

2620 Power ramp-down


Ramp speed 1

Defines the slope of ramp-down 1 (used for deload as well)

Breaker open point

The amount of power accepted when opening the breaker

Ramp speed 2

Defines the slope of ramp-down 2 (not used for deload)

Automatic ramp selection

When "auto ramp select" is disabled, Ramp 2 can only be enabled with M-logic

7050 Fixed Power Set


Power set

The amount of power the genset will produce.

For a general description of the available running modes, please refer to the chapter Running
mode description.

3.7.6 Peak shaving


Auto mode description
The genset will start at a predefined mains import level and run at a fixed minimum load, e.g. 10%. When the
mains import increases above the maximum mains import setpoint, the genset will supply the extra load in
order to maintain the mains import at the maximum import level.
When the load drops below the maximum mains import setpoint, the genset will run at min. load again. When
the mains import decreases below the stop setpoint, the genset will cool down and stop.

DEIF A/S

Page 29 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

The CT4 (measuring CT placed in phase L1) input can be used for indication of the power imported from the
mains. Alternatively, a transducer connected to multi-input 46 can be used. This is a better solution if there is
some distance from the measuring point to the AGC 200.
kW
Peak/total
power

Max. mains import level


Mains power
Gen-set start level

Gen-set stop level

Generator power

Gen-set minimum load


t
tSTOP

Semi-auto mode description


When the generator breaker is closed and the mains breaker is opened, the unit will use the nominal frequency as setpoint for the speed governor. If AVR control is selected, the nominal voltage is used as setpoint.
When the generator is paralleled to the mains, the generator will be controlled according to the peak shaving
setpoint. So the maximum mains import will not be exceeded in spite of the semi- auto mode. If AVR control
is selected, the setpoint is the adjusted power factor.
Setpoints related to peak shaving
7000 Mains Power
Day and night

The mains power import limits for the peak shaving

Tmax and Tmin

The transducer range in kW, corresponding to the 4-20 mA transducer signal connected
on multi-input 46.

7010 Daytime period


These settings define the daytime period. The hours outside the daytime period are considered to be the
night-time period.
7020 Start generator
Start setpoint

The start setpoint is in percent of the day and night settings in menu 7000 Mains power

Delay

The genset will start when the start setpoint has been exceeded and this delay has expired.

Load

The minimum load the genset will produce when parallel to mains.

DEIF A/S

Page 30 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

7030 Stop generator


Stop setpoint

The stop setpoint is in percent of the day and night settings in menu 7000 Mains power.

Delay

The genset will stop when the stop setpoint has been exceeded and this delay has expired.
For a general description of the available running modes, please refer to the chapter Running
mode description.

3.7.7 Load takeover


Auto mode description- Back synchronising ON
The purpose of the load takeover mode is to transfer the load imported from the mains to the genset for operation on generator supply only.
When the start command is given, the genset will start and synchronise the generator breaker to the busbar
that is being supplied by the mains. When the generator breaker is closed, the imported load is decreased
(the power is being transferred to the genset) until the load is at the open breaker point. Then the mains
breaker opens.
When the stop command is given, the mains breaker is synchronised to the busbar and after closure the genset is deloaded, cooled down and stopped.
The CT4 (measuring CT placed in phase L1) input can be used for indication of the power imported from the
mains. Alternatively, a transducer connected to multi-input 46 can be used. This is a better solution if there is
some distance from the measuring point to the AGC 200.
kW
Mains power
Generator power

GB opens

Stop signal

MB opens

Start signal

Diagram, load takeover - example


The load takeover mode can be combined with the overlap function. In that case, the generator
and the mains breakers will never be closed at the same time for a longer period than the adjusted overlap time.
If the imported load is higher than the nominal genset power, an alarm appears and the load
takeover sequence is paused.

DEIF A/S

Page 31 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

Auto mode description- Back synchronising OFF


When the start command is given, the genset will start. When the frequency and voltage is OK, the mains
breaker is opened and the generator breaker is closed. Now, the generator supplies the load until the stop
command is given. Then, the generator breaker opens and the mains breaker closes. The genset cools down
and stops.
The CT4 (measuring CT placed in phase L1) input can be used for indication of the power imported from the
mains. Alternatively, a transducer connected to multi-input 46 can be used. This is a better solution if there is
some distance from the measuring point to the AGC 200.
If the imported load is higher than the nominal genset power, an alarm appears and the load
takeover sequence is paused.
Semi Auto mode description
When the generator breaker is closed and the mains breaker is opened, the unit will use the nominal frequency as setpoint for the speed governor. If AVR control is selected, the nominal voltage is used as setpoint.
When the generator is paralleled to the mains, it will be controlled so the imported power from the mains will
be kept at 0 kW. If AVR control is selected, the setpoint is the adjusted power factor.
For a general description of the available running modes, please refer to the chapter Running
mode description.

3.7.8 Mains power export (fixed power to mains)


Auto mode description
The mains power export mode can be used to maintain a constant level of power through the mains breaker.
The power can be exported to the mains or imported from the mains, but always at a constant level.
If a fixed level of imported power must be used, it is still the mains power export mode that is
to be selected! This mode covers import as well as export.
The genset starts as a result of a digital start command. It synchronises to the mains and will start to export
power to the mains. The amount of power exported will be kept at a fixed level regardless of the load on the
busbar. The stop command will cause the genset to deload and trip the generator breaker. Afterwards, it will
cool down and stop.

DEIF A/S

Page 32 of 324

Functional descriptions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Stop signal

Start signal

The CT4 (measuring CT placed in phase L1) input can be used for indication of the power imported from the
mains. Alternatively, a transducer connected to multi-input 46 can be used. This is a better solution if there is
some distance from the measuring point to the AGC 200.

Ramp up
Ramp down

Mains power export


setpoint

kW

Diagram, mains power export - example


Please notice that the setpoint of the mains power export can be adjusted to 0 kW. This means
that the genset will be parallel to the mains but no power will be exported.
Semi-auto mode description
When the generator breaker is closed and the mains breaker is opened, the unit will use the nominal frequency as setpoint for the speed governor. If AVR control is selected, the nominal voltage is used as setpoint.When the generator is paralleled to the mains, it will be controlled according to the mains power export
setpoint. If AVR control is selected, the setpoint is the adjusted power factor.
For a general description of the available running modes, please refer to the chapter Running
mode description.

3.8 Running mode description


3.8.1 Semi-auto mode
The unit can be operated in semi-auto mode. Semi-auto means that the unit will not initiate any sequences
automatically, as is the case with the auto mode. It will only initiate sequences if external signals are given.
An external signal may be given in three ways:
1. Push-buttons on the front are used.
2. Digital inputs are used
3. Modbus command.
The standard AGC 200 is equipped with a limited number of digital inputs, please refer to the
chapter Digital inputs in this document and the data sheet for additional information about
availability.

When the genset is running in semi-auto mode, the unit will control the speed governor and the AVR.
The following sequences can be activated in semi-auto:

DEIF A/S

Page 33 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Command

Functional descriptions

Description

Start

The start sequence is initiated and continues until the genset starts or the
maximum number of start attempts has been reached. The frequency (and
voltage) will be regulated to make the GB ready to close.

Stop

The genset will be stopped. After disappearance of the running signal, the stop
sequence will continue to be active in the extended stop time period. The
genset is stopped without cooling-down time.

Close GB

The unit will close the generator breaker if the mains breaker is open, and it
will synchronise and close the generator breaker if the mains breaker is
closed.

Open GB

The unit will ramp down and open the generator breaker at the breaker open
point if the mains breaker is closed. The unit will open the generator breaker
instantly if the mains breaker is open or the genset mode is island mode.

Close MB

The unit will close the mains breaker if the generator breaker is open, and it
will synchronise and close the mains breaker if the generator breaker is
closed.

Open MB

The unit opens the mains breaker instantly.

Man GOV
UP

The regulator is deactivated and the governor output is activated as long as


the GOV input is ON.

Man GOV
DOWN

The regulator is deactivated and the governor output is activated as long as


the GOV input is ON.

Man AVR
UP

The regulator is deactivated and the governor output is activated as long as


the AVR input is ON.

Man AVR
DOWN

The regulator is deactivated and the governor output is activated as long as


the AVR input is ON.

Comment

When AMF
mode is selected, the
unit will not
regu-late
after breaker closure.

3.8.2 Test mode


The test mode function is activated by selecting test with the MODE push-button on the display or by activating a digital input.
The settings for the test function are set up in menu 7040.
Setpoint: Load setpoint when paralleling to mains.
Timer: Engine run time during the test period.
Return: When the test is completed, the unit will return to the selected mode (semi-auto or auto).
Type: Selection of one of the three types of tests: Simple, load or full.
If the timer is set to 0.0 min., the test sequence will be infinite.
Test mode cannot be used if the genset is in island operation (genset mode selected to island
mode).

DEIF A/S

Page 34 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

Power management (option G4): Test mode is not available.


Simple Test
The simple test will only start the genset and run it at nominal frequency with the generator breaker open. The
test will run until the timer expires.
Load Test
The load test will start the genset and run it at nominal frequency, synchronise the generator breaker and produce the power typed in the setpoint in menu 7041. The test will run until the timer expires.
To run the load test, it is required that Sync. to mains is enabled in menu 7084.

When running a load test sequence, the overlap function is ignored.


Full Test
The full test will start the genset and run it at nominal frequency, synchronise the generator breaker and
transfer the load to the generator before opening the mains breaker. When the test timer expires, the mains
breaker will be synchronised and the load is transferred back to the mains before the generator breaker is
opened and the generator is stopped.
To run the full test, it is required that Sync. to mains is enabled in menu 7084.

3.8.3 Manual mode


When manual mode is selected, the genset can be controlled with digital inputs. The following commands are
possible:
Command

Comment

Start (input or push-button)

Genset starts (no regulation).

Stop (input or push-button)

Genset opens GB and stops without cooling down.

Manual increase speed

Unit gives increase signal to the speed governor.

Manual decrease speed

Unit gives decrease signal to the speed governor.

Manual increase voltage

Unit gives increase signal to the AVR.

Manual decrease voltage

Unit gives decrease signal to the AVR.

It is necessary to configure the digital inputs through the PC utility software to use the manual
commands. The number of configurable digital inputs is option-dependent.
It is not possible to open and close the generator breaker or the mains breaker in manual
mode.
MAN mode cannot be selected, when AUTO mode is selected. To go from AUTO to MAN, it is
necessary to go to SEMI-AUTO to make MAN available.

DEIF A/S

Page 35 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

3.8.4 OFF mode


When the OFF mode is selected, the unit is locked for certain actions. This means that it cannot start the
genset or perform any breaker operations.The purpose of the OFF mode is to make sure that the genset
does not start for instance during maintenance work.If the digital inputs are used to change the mode, then it
is important to keep in mind that the input configured to OFF mode is a constant signal. So, when it is ON, the
unit is in a blocked state and when it is OFF, it returns to the mode it was in before OFF mode was selected.
If OFF mode is selected using the display after the digital OFF input is activated, the AGC 200
will stay in OFF mode after the OFF input is deactivated. The OFF mode must now be changed
using the display. The OFF mode can only be changed locally by display or digital input.
Before the running mode is changed, it is important to check that persons are clear of the genset and that the genset is ready for operation.
If OFF mode is selected when the generator is running, the breaker will open and the engine
will be stopped immediately.
Alarms are not influenced by OFF mode selection.
The genset can be started from the local engine control panel if such is installed. Therefore,
DEIF recommends avoiding local cranking and starting of the genset.

3.9 Single-line diagrams


3.9.1 Island operation
Load
AGC 200

DEIF A/S

Page 36 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

3.9.2 Automatic mains failure/fixed power/base load

Load
AGC 200

3.9.3 Peak shaving/load takeover/mains power export

Mains
breaker
(MB)

AGC 200

Load
Generator
breaker
(GB)

G
Diesel generator set

DEIF A/S

Page 37 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

3.9.4 Multiple gensets, load sharing


Load

AGC 200

AGC 200

3.10 Flowcharts
3.10.1 Flowcharts
Using flowcharts, the principles of the most important functions will be illustrated in the next sections. The
functions included are:
Mode shift
MB open sequence
GB open sequence
Stop sequence
Start sequence
MB close sequence
GB close sequence
Fixed power
Load takeover
Single generator/island operation
Peak shaving
Mains power export
Automatic nains failure
Test sequence
The following flowcharts are for guidance only. For illustrative purposes, the flowcharts are
simplified.

DEIF A/S

Page 38 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

Mode shift
Start

No

Mode shift
enabled
Yes

Mode not
island and AMF

No

Yes

Mains failure

No

Yes
Initiate AMF
sequence

No

Mains OK

Yes

Initiate mains
return sequence

MB close
sequence

Continue in
selected mode

End

DEIF A/S

Page 39 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

MB open sequence

Start

MB closed

No

Yes
Load take
over

No

Mains failure

Yes

Deload MB

No
Load = 0

No

Load too
high

Yes

Alarm

Yes

Open MB

MB opened

No

Alarm MB
open failure

Yes
End

DEIF A/S

Page 40 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

GB open sequence

Start

Stop conditions
OK

No

Yes
Is GB
closed

No

Yes
Soft open

Failclas
shutdown

No

Yes

Deload DG
No
Load < open
set point

No

Ramp down
timer expired

Yes
Yes
Open GB

GB opened

No

Alarm

Yes
End

DEIF A/S

Page 41 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

Stop sequence

Start

No

Stop conditions
OK
Yes
GB open
seq OK

No

Yes
AUTO
mode

No

Yes

No

Cooldown
timer run out
Yes

Run coil

No

Stop relay

Yes
Deactivate
run relay

Genset
stopped

Activate stop
relay

No

Alarm

Yes
End

DEIF A/S

Page 42 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

Start sequence
Start

Start condition
OK

No

Yes
Start prepare
timer

No

Yes

Start relay
ON

Start relay timer


timeout

No

Genset started

No

Yes

Yes
Off relay
ON

Run feedback
detected

No

Alarm

Yes
Stop relay timer
timed out
Yes
No

Max start
attempts

No

F/U OK

No

Yes
Ready to
close GB

Yes
Start failure
alarm

DEIF A/S

End

Page 43 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

MB close sequence
Start

Is MB open

No

Yes

Voltage on
mains/bus

No

Yes

Voltage on
gen

No

Yes

GB closed

No

Yes
Back sync ON

Direct close OK

Yes

No

Yes

No
Sync timer
runout

Sync MB

Synchronised

GB open
sequence

No

Yes

Alarm sync.
failure

Alarm GB
open failure

No

Yes

Close MB

MB closed

No

Close failure
alarm

Yes
End

DEIF A/S

Page 44 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

GB close sequence
Start

Is GB open

No

Yes

Start seq OK

No

Yes
Single DG
application

No

Island mode

No

All GBs OFF

Yes

Yes

No

Yes

Yes
Voltage on bus

Voltage on
busbar

No

Yes

No

MB close
No
Yes

TB Present

No

Yes
TB open

Yes

No

Yes

MB open
No
No

Direct closing
OK

Sync GB

Time runout

DG freq match
BB freq

Yes

No
Alarm sync
failure

Yes
Close GB

GB closed

No

Alarm

Yes
End

DEIF A/S

Page 45 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

Fixed power
Start

Activate start
input

Start
sequence

GB close
sequence

Ramp-up to
load set-point

Operation

Deactivate
start input

GB open
sequence

Stop
sequence

End

DEIF A/S

Page 46 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

Load takeover
Start

Activate start
input

Start
sequence

GB close
sequence

Mains load = 0 kW

No

Ramp-up
genset load

Yes
MB open
sequence

Genset
operation

Deactivate
start input

MB close
sequence

DEIF A/S

GB open
sequence

Stop
sequence

End

Page 47 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

Single generator island operation


Start

Start input
active

Start
sequence

GB close
sequence

Operation

Start input
deactivated

GB open
sequence

Stop
sequence

End

DEIF A/S

Page 48 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

Peak shaving
Start

Mains power
above start
set point

Start
sequence

GB close
sequence

Operation:
produce power
above set point

Mains power
below stop
set point

GB open
sequence

Stop
sequence

End

DEIF A/S

Page 49 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

Mains power export


Start

Activate start
input

Start
sequence

Close GB
sequence

Ramp up to
MPE set point

operation

Deactivate
start input

GB open
sequence

Stop
sequence

End

DEIF A/S

Page 50 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

Automatic mains failure


Start

No

Mains failure
Yes

#7065: start
eng + open MB

No

Yes

Open MB

Start sequence

Start sequence

Open MB

GB close
sequence

GB close
sequence

Mains ok

No

Yes

Time out

DEIF A/S

MB close
sequence

End

Page 51 of 324

Functional descriptions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Test sequence
Start

Select test
mode

Start sequence

Test timer

Timer run out

No

Engine running No
Yes

Yes
Stop sequence

Freq/voltage OK

No

Yes
Sync of GB
allowed

Engine stopped
No

No

Yes

Return to
running mode,
menu 7043

Sync GB

Opening og MB
allowed

No Ramp up to
P setpoint

Yes

End

No

P Mains = 0kW

Yes

Open MB

3.11 Sequences
3.11.1 About sequences
The following contains information about the sequences of the engine, the generator breaker and, if installed,
the mains breaker. These sequences are automatically initiated if the auto mode is selected, or if the commands are selected in the semi-auto mode.

DEIF A/S

Page 52 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

In the semi-auto mode, the selected sequence is the only sequence initiated (for example, press the START
push-button: The engine will start, but no subsequent synchronising is initiated).
The following sequences will be illustrated below:
START sequence
STOP sequence
Breaker sequences
If island operation is selected, the digital input MB closed is NOT to be activated with a 12/24 volt input signal. A mains breaker failure will occur if the wiring of the mains breaker feedback inputs is wrong.
Please refer to our Application Notes or Installation Instructions for information about the required breaker wiring.
Start sequence
The following drawings illustrate the start sequences of the genset with normal start prepare and extended
start prepare.

DEIF A/S

Page 53 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

No matter the choice of start prepare function, the running coil is activated 1 s before the start relay (starter).
Start sequence:
Extended start prepare

Start prepare

tOFF

Crank (starter)

tOFF

Run coil
1 sec.

Stop coil

Running feedback

1st start attempt

2nd start attempt

3rd start attempt

Start sequence:
Extended start prepare

Start prepare

tOFF

Crank (starter)

tOFF

Run coil
1 sec.

Stop coil

Running feedback

1st start attempt

DEIF A/S

2nd start attempt

3rd start attempt

Page 54 of 324

Functional descriptions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Start sequence conditions


The start sequence initiation can be controlled by the following conditions:
RMI 46 (oil pressure)
RMI 47 (water temperature)
RMI 48 (fuel level)
This means that if for example the oil pressure is not primed to the sufficient value, then the crank relay will
not engage the starter motor. The selection is made in setting 6185. For each of the RMI settings, the rule is
that the value (oil pressure, fuel level or water temperature) must exceed the set point of setting 6186 before
starting is initiated.
If the value in 6186 is set to 0.0, the start sequence is initiated as soon as it is requested.
The following diagram shows an example where the RMI signal builds up slowly, and starting is initiated at
the end of the third start attempt.
Start sequence
Cranking depends on RMI

Start prepare
(3 start attempts)

Stop relay

Crank relay

Run coil

Running feedback

RMI
measurement OK
RMI value

Cranking starts

Running feedback
Different types of running feedback can be used to detect if the motor is running. Please refer to menu 6170
for selection of the running feedback type.
The running detection is made with a built-in safety routine. The running feedback selected is the primary
feedback. At all times, all the types of running feedback are used for running detection. If, for some reason,
the primary choice is not detecting any running feedback, the starter relay will stay activated for one additional second. If a running feedback is detected based on one of the secondary choices, the genset will start. In
this way, the genset will still be functional even though a tacho sensor is damaged or dirty.

DEIF A/S

Page 55 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

As soon as the genset is running, no matter if the genset is started based on the primary or secondary feedback, the running detection will be made based on all available types.
The sequence is shown in the following diagram.

Running feedback failure

Primary running
feedback

Secondary running
feedback
1sec
Start relay (crank)
tAlarm
Alarm

Interruption of start sequence


The start sequence is interrupted in the following situations:
Event

Comment

Stop signal
Start failure
Remove starter feedback

Tacho set point

Running feedback

Digital input

Running feedback

As soon as voltage is detected with a frequency above the set point in parameter 6165 (default 32 Hz)
The running detection based on the frequency measurement can replace
the running feedback based on tacho or digital input or engine communication

Running feedback

Oil pressure set point (menu 6175)

Running feedback

EIC (engine communication) (option H5)

Emergency stop
Alarm

Alarms with shutdown or trip and stop fail class

Stop push-button on display

Only in semi-auto or manual mode

Modbus stop command

Semi-auto or manual mode

Binary stop input

Semi-auto or manual mode

Deactivate the auto start/


stop

Auto mode in the following genset modes:


Island operation, fixed power, load takeover or mains power export mode

Running mode

It is not possible to change the running mode to block as long as the genset is running

If the MPU input is to be used to remove the starter, it has to be set up in menu 6174.

DEIF A/S

Page 56 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

The only protections that can stop the genset/interrupt the start sequence when the shutdown
override input is activated, are the digital input emergency stop and the alarm overspeed
2. Both of these must have the fail class shutdown.
Set points related to the start sequence
Crank failure alarm (4530 Crank failure)
If MPU is chosen as the primary running feedback, this alarm will be raised if the specified RPM is not
reached before the delay has expired.
Run feedback failure (4540 Run feedb. fail)
If running is detected on the frequency (secondary), but the primary running feedback, for example digital input, has not detected running, this alarm will be raised. The delay to be set is the time from the secondary
running detection and until the alarm is raised.
Hz/V failure (4550 Hz/V failure)
If the frequency and voltage are not within the limits set in menu 2110 after the running feedback is received,
this alarm is raised when the delay has expired.
Start failure alarm (4570 Start failure)
The start failure alarm occurs, if the genset has not started after the number of start attempts set in menu
6190.
Start prepare (6180 Starter)
Normal prepare: The start prepare timer can be used for start preparation purposes, for example prelubrication or preglowing. The start prepare relay is activated when the start sequence is initiated and deactivated
when the start relay is activated. If the timer is set to 0.0 s, the start prepare function is deactivated.
Extended prepare: The extended prepare will activate the start prepare relay when the start sequence is initiated and keep it activated when the start relay activates until the specified time has expired. If the ext. prepare time exceeds the start ON time, the start prepare relay is deactivated when the start relay deactivates. If
the timer is set to 0.0 s, the extended prepare function is deactivated.
Start ON time: The starter will be activated for this period when cranking.
Start OFF time: The pause between two start attempts.

DEIF A/S

Page 57 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

Stop sequence
The drawings illustrate the stop sequence.
Stop sequence
Run coil

tCOOL

Cooling down time

tstop

Run coil

Running feedback

Sequence initiated

Stop sequence
Stop coil

tCOOL

Cooling down time

Stop coil

tstop

Running feedback

Sequence initiated

The stop sequence will be activated if a stop command is given. The stop sequence includes the cooling
down time if the stop is a normal or controlled stop.
Description

Cooling down

Stop

Auto mode stop

Trip and stop alarm

Stop button on display


Remove auto start/stop
Emergency stop

DEIF A/S

Comment

Semi-auto or Manual

Auto mode: Island operation, fixed power, load takeover, mains power export

Engine shuts down and GB opens

Page 58 of 324

Functional descriptions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Interruption of the stop sequence can occur in these situations:


Event

Comment

Mains failure

AMF mode selected (or mode shift selected ON) and auto mode selected

Start button is pressed

Semi-auto mode: Engine will run in idle speed

Binary start input

Auto mode: Island operation and fixed power, load takeover or mains power
export

Exceeding set point

Auto mode: Peak shaving

GB close button is pressed

Semi-auto mode only

The stop sequence can only be interrupted during the cooling down period.
When the engine is stopped, the analogue speed governor output is reset to the offset value.
Please refer to the mentioned option descriptions.
Set points related to the stop sequence
Stop failure (4580 Stop failure)
A stop failure alarm will appear if the primary running feedback or the generator voltage and frequency are
still present after the delay in this menu has expired.
Stop (6210 Stop)
Cooling down: The length of the cooling down period.
Extended stop: The delay after the running feedback has disappeared until a new start sequence is allowed.
The extended stop sequence is activated any time the stop button is pressed.
If the cooling down timer is set to 0.0 s, the cooling down sequence will be infinite.
Breaker sequences:
The breaker sequences will be activated depending on the selected mode:
Mode

Genset mode

Breaker control

Auto

All

Controlled by the unit

Semi-auto

All

Push-button

Manual

All

None

Block

All

None

Before closing the breakers, it must be checked that the voltage and frequency are OK. The limits are adjusted in menu 2110 Sync. blackout.
Set points related to MB control:
7080 MB control
Mode shift:
When enabled, the AGC 200 will perform the AMF sequence in case of a mains failure, regardless of the actual genset mode.

DEIF A/S

Page 59 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

MB close delay:
The time from GB OFF to MB ON when back synchronisation is OFF.
Back sync.:
Enables synchronisation from mains to generator.
Sync. to mains:
Enables synchronisation from generator to mains.
Load time:
After opening of the breaker, the MB ON sequence will not be initiated before this delay has expired.
Please refer to the description of breaker spring load time.
If no MB is represented, then the relays and inputs normally used for MB control become configurable. The power plant constructor (USW) is used for configuration of the plant design if
the application does not include an MB.
AGC 200 without back synchronisation: The GB can only be closed if the mains breaker is
open.The MB can only be closed if the generator breaker is open.
AGC 200 with back synchronisation: If the GB or MB push-button is activated, the AGC 200 will
start synchronising if the generator or mains voltage is present.The GB can close directly if the
MB is open. The MB can close directly if the GB is open.
AMF MB opening function (menu 7065):
It is possible to select the functionality of the mains breaker opening function. This is necessary if the unit
operates in Automatic Mains Failure (AMF).
The possibilities in menu 7065 are:
Selection

Description

Start engine and open


mains breaker

When a mains failure occurs, the mains breaker opens and the engine starts at
the same time.

Start engine

When a mains failure occurs, the engine starts. When the generator is running
and the frequency and voltage are OK, the MB opens and the GB closes.

DEIF A/S

Page 60 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

AMF timers:
The time charts describe the functionality at a mains failure and at mains return. Back synchronisation is deactivated. The timers used by the AMF function are indicated in the table below:
Timer

Description

Menu number

tFD

Mains failure delay

7071 f mains failure


7061 U mains failure

tFU

Frequency/voltage OK

6220 Hz/V OK

tFOD

Mains failure OK delay

7072 f mains failure


7062 U mains failure

tGBC

GB ON delay

6231 GB close delay

tMBC

MB ON delay

7082 MB load time

The timer tMBC is only active if back synchronisation is deactivated.


Example 1:
7065 Mains fail control: Start engine and open MB

Mains OK
tMBC
MB On
GB On
Gen start seq
tFD

tFOD

Gen stop seq


Gen running
Gen f/U OK
tFU

Mains failure
detected

Mains OK

Example 2:
7065 Mains fail control: Start engine

Mains OK
MB On
tMBC
GB On
tGBC
Gen start seq
tFD
Gen stop seq
tFOD
Gen running
Gen f/U OK
Mains failure
detected

DEIF A/S

tFU

Mains OK

Page 61 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Functional descriptions

Conditions for breaker operations


The breaker sequences react depending on the breaker positions and the frequency/voltage measurements.
Conditions for breaker operations
Sequence

Condition

GB ON, direct closing

Running feedback
Generator frequency/voltage OK
MB open

MB ON, direct closing

Mains frequency/voltage OK
GB open

GB ON, synchronising

Running feedback
Generator frequency/voltage OK
MB closed
No generator failure alarms

MB ON, synchronising

Mains frequency/voltage OK
GB closed
No generator failure alarms

GB OFF, direct opening

MB open

MB OFF, direct opening

Alarms with fail classes: Shut down or Trip MB alarms

GB OFF, deloading

MB closed

MB OFF, deloading

Alarms with fail class: Trip and stop

DEIF A/S

Page 62 of 324

Display and menu structure

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

4. Display and menu structure


4.1 Display and menu stucture
4.1.1 Display unit
The display has six different lines, each with 25 characters, and holds a number of push-button functions
which are presented below.

4.1.2 Push-button functions


The display unit has a number of push-button functions which are described below:
1

7
8

20

19

10

18

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

Shifts the display to the Measurements menu


Shifts the menu to the Log menu: Event, alarm and battery log
Shifts the display to menu for system settings
Shifts the display to the service menu
The arrows are used to manoeuvre in the menus and to shift views. Also used to change parameter settings
Alarm push-button. Used to show active alarms
This button is used to silence the horn
The ESC button is used to go back in menus or to exit
TEST mode is activated (see the previous chapter "Running mode description" for further description)
This push-button is used for lamp test. When pushed, the LEDs will flash in different colours. Used to
control that the LEDs are working properly
SEMI-auto mode is activated (see the previous chapter "Running mode description" for further description)
BLOCK mode is activated (see the previous chapter "Running mode description" for further description)
Manual mode is activated (see the previous chapter "Running mode description" for further description)
AUTO mode is activated (see the previous chapter "Running mode description" for further description)
Manual activation of open breaker sequence if SEMI or MAN is selected
Manual activation of close breaker sequence if SEMI or MAN is selected
Manual activation of open breaker sequence if SEMI or MAN is selected

DEIF A/S

Page 63 of 324

Display and menu structure

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

18. Manual activation of close breaker sequence if SEMI or MAN is selected


19. Stop of the genset if SEMI or MAN is selected
20. Start of the genset if SEMI or MAN is selected

4.1.3 LED functions


The display unit has a number of LED functions. The colour is green or red or a combination in different situations. The display LEDs are indicating as follows:
1

12

11

10

1. Four configurable LEDs. These can be configured with M-Logic


2. Indicates that the auxiliary supply is ON, while flashing new firmware the LED will be red
3. When this LED blinks, there is an (or more) unacknowledged alarm(s). When it glows there is an (or
more) acknowledged alarm(s)
4. Indicates OFF mode
5. Indicates SEMI-auto mode
6. Indicates manual mode
7. Indicates AUTO mode
8. Glows green when mains is OK. Glows red when mains is not OK
9. Glows when breaker is closed
10. Glows when breaker is closed
11. Glows green when voltage and frequency are OK
12. Glows green when engine is running

4.1.4 Menu structure


The display includes two menu systems which can be used without password entry:
View menu system
This is the commonly used menu system. 20 windows are configurable and can be entered by using the arrow push-buttons.
Setup menu system (not commonly used by the operator)

DEIF A/S

Page 64 of 324

Display and menu structure

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

This menu system is used to set up the unit, and if the operator needs detailed information that is not available in the view menu system.
Changing of parameter settings is password protected.

4.1.5 Entry window


When the unit is powered up, an entry window appears. The entry window is the turning point in the menu
structure and as such the gateway to the other menus. It can always be reached by pushing the BACK pushbutton three times.
The event and alarm list will appear at power-up if an alarm is present.

MAINS FAILURE
U-supply

24.1 V

0.001 PF

0 kVA

0 kW
0 kVAr

Energy Total

0 kWh

Run Absolute

0 hrs

4.1.6 View menu


The view menus (V1, V2 and V3) are the daily use menus for the operator.

MAINS FAILURE
U-supply

24.1 V

0.001 PF

0 kVA

0 kW
0 kVAr

Energy Total

0 kWh

Run Absolute

0 hrs

1/20

In the view menus, various measured values are on display.


1. First display line: operational status or measurements
2. Second display line: measurements relating to operational status
3. Third display line: measurements relating to operational status
4. Fourth display line: selection of setup and view menus

DEIF A/S

Page 65 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Display and menu structure

4.1.7 View menu navigation


Display of measured values according to the selections made during configuration.
For detailed information about configuration, please see the Designer's Reference Handbook.

The views contain up to 20 different windows which can be selected using the
located on the right hand side of the display.

and

push-buttons

4.1.8 Display contrast


It is possible to adjust the contrast of the display in the parameter menu 9150. The contrast can be adjusted
from the value -10 to +10. This feature can be used to compensate for the ambient lighting.

DEIF A/S

Page 66 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Display and menu structure

4.1.9 Status line texts


Condition

Comment

BLOCK

Block mode is activated

SIMPLE TEST

Test mode is activated

LOAD TEST
FULL TEST
SIMPLE TEST ###.#min

Test mode is activated and test timer counting down

LOAD TEST ###.#min


FULL TEST ###.#min
ISLAND MAN
ISLAND SEMI

Genset stopped or running and no other action taking


place

READY ISLAND AUTO

Genset stopped in Auto

ISLAND ACTIVE

Genset running in Auto

AMF MAN
AMF SEMI

Genset stopped or running and no other action taking


place

READY AMF AUTO

Genset stopped in Auto

AMF ACTIVE

Genset running in Auto

FIXED POWER MAN


FIXED POWER SEMI

Genset stopped or running and no other action taking


place.

READY FIXED P AUTO

Genset stopped in Auto

FIXED POWER ACTIVE

Genset running in Auto

PEAK SHAVING MAN


PEAK SHAVING SEMI

Genset stopped or running and no other action taking


place.

READY PEAK SHAV AUTO

Genset stopped in Auto

PEAK SHAVING ACTIVE

Genset running in Auto

LOAD TAKEOVER MAN


LOAD TAKEOVER SEMI

Genset stopped or running and no other action taking


place

READY LTO AUTO

Genset stopped in Auto

LTO ACTIVE

Genset running in Auto

MAINS P EXPORT MAN


MAINS P EXPORT SEMI

Genset stopped or running and no other action taking


place

READY MPE AUTO

Genset stopped in Auto

MPE ACTIVE

Genset running in mains power export mode

DG BLOCKED FOR START

Generator stopped and active alarm(s) on the generator

GB ON BLOCKED

Generator running, GB open and an active "Trip GB"


alarm

SHUTDOWN OVERRIDE

The configurable input is active

DEIF A/S

Page 67 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Display and menu structure

Condition

Comment

ACCESS LOCK

The configurable input is activated, and the operator


tries to activate one of the blocked keys

GB TRIP EXTERNALLY

Some external equipment has tripped the breaker

An external trip is
logged in the event
log

MB TRIP EXTERNALLY

Some external equipment has tripped the breaker

An external trip is
logged in the event
log

IDLE RUN

The "Idle run" function is active. The genset will not


stop until a timer has expired

IDLE RUN ###.#min

The timer in the "Idle run" function is active

COMPENSATION FREQ

Compensation is active

Aux. test ##.#V ####s

Battery test activated

DELOAD

Decreasing the load of the genset in order to open the


breaker

START DG(s) IN ###s

The start genset set point is exceeded

STOP DG(s) IN ###s

The stop genset set point is exceeded

START PREPARE

The start prepare relay is activated

START RELAY ON

The start relay is activated

START RELAY OFF

The start relay is deactivated during the start sequence

MAINS FAILURE

Mains failure and mains failure timer expired

MAINS FAILURE IN ###s

Frequency or voltage measurement is outside the limits

The timer shown is


the mains failure
delay. Text in
mains units

MAINS U OK DEL ####s

Mains voltage is OK after a mains failure

The timer shown is


the mains OK delay

MAINS f OK DEL ####s

Mains frequency is OK after a mains failure

The timer shown is


the mains OK delay

Hz/V OK IN ###s

The voltage and frequency on the genset is OK

When the timer


runs out, it is allowed to operate
the generator
breaker

COOLING DOWN ###s

Cooling-down period is activated

GENSET STOPPING

This info is shown when cooling down has finished

The frequency is
not at the nominal
setting

EXT. STOP TIME ###s


PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE

DEIF A/S

This info is shown if the language file is downloaded


from the PC utility software

Page 68 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Condition

Display and menu structure

Comment

---xx-------- >00< ------------

Generator is synchronising

TOO SLOW 00<-------------

Generator running too slow during synchronising

-----------> 00 TOO FAST

Generator running too fast during synchronising

EXT. START ORDER

A planned AMF sequence is activated

There is no failure
on the mains during
this sequence

SELECT GENSET MODE

Power management has been deactivated and no


other genset mode has been selected

Option G5 must be
available

QUICK SETUP ERROR

Quick setup of the application failed

MOUNT CAN CONNECTOR

Connect the power management CAN line

ADAPT IN PROGRESS

The AGC 200 is receiving the application, to which it


has just been connected

SETUP IN PROGRESS

The new AGC is being added to the existing application

SETUP COMPLETED

Successful update of the application in all AGC units

REMOVE CAN CONNECTOR

Remove the power management CAN lines

RAMP TO #####kW

The power ramp is ramping in steps, and the next


step that will be reached after the timer has expired
will be displayed

DERATED TO #####kW

Displays the ramp-down set point

UNEXPECTED GB ON BB

Another generator breaker is closed on to the busbar


(due to a GB position failure) while no voltage is
present on the busbar

DEIF A/S

The "xx" marks the


actual generator
phase angle position in the synchronisation. When the
"xx" is aligned over
the 00 centre, the
generator is in synchronism

This indicates that


other breakers cannot close to the
busbar because of
position failure on
one or more GBs

Page 69 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Display and menu structure

4.1.10 Texts only related to power management (AGC 24x only)


Status text

Condition

Comment

DG unit
BLACKOUT ENABLE

This info is shown if a CAN failure is present in a power management application.

UNIT STANDBY

If redundant mains units are present, this message is


shown on the redundant unit.

DELOADING BTB XX

DG units are load sharing asymmetrically to deload


BTB XX dividing two sections in an island application.

BTB XX DIVIDING SEC.

BTB XX is dividing two sections in an island application.

SYNCHRONISING TB XX

TB XX is synchronising.

SYNCHRONISING MB XX

MB XX is synchronising.

SYNCHRONISING BTB XX

BTB XX is synchronising.

Deloading TB XX

Displays that a tie breaker is being deloaded in semiauto mode.


Mains unit

UNIT STANDBY

If redundant mains units are present this message is


shown on the redundant unit.

TB TRIP EXTERNALLY

Some external equipment has tripped the breaker.

An external trip is
logged in the
event log.

BTB unit
DIVIDING SECTION

A BTB unit is dividing two sections in an island application.

READY AUTO OPERATION

BTB unit in Auto and ready for breaker operation (no


active BTB trip" alarm).

SEMI-AUTO OPERATION

BTB unit in Semi-auto

AUTO OPERATION

BTB unit in Auto, but not ready for breaker operation


(active "BTB trip" alarm).

BLOCKED FOR CLOSING

Last open BTB in a ring bus.

BTB TRIP EXTERNALLY

Some external equipment has tripped the breaker.

An external trip is
logged in the
event log.

All units
BROADCASTING APPL. #

DEIF A/S

Broadcast of an application through the CAN line.

Broadcasts one of
the four applications from one unit
to the other AGCs
in the power management system.

Page 70 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Display and menu structure

Status text

Condition

RECEIVING APPL. #

AGC 200 receiving an application.

BROADCAST COMPLETED

Successful broadcast of an application.

RECEIVE COMPLETED

Application received successfully.

BROADCAST ABORTED

Broadcast terminated.

RECEIVE ERROR

Application is not received correctly.

DEIF A/S

Comment

Page 71 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Display and menu structure

4.1.11 Available display views


View line configuration
For generator

For bus/mains

G f-L1 frequency L1 (Hz)

M f-L1 frequency L1 (Hz)

G f-L2 frequency L2 (Hz)

M f-L2 frequency L2 (Hz)

G f-L3 frequency L3 (Hz)

M f-L3 frequency L3 (Hz)

Gen. active power (kW)

Mains active power (kW)

Gen. reactive power (kVAr)

Mains reactive power (kVAr)

Gen. apparent power (kVA)

Mains apparent power (kVA)

Power factor

Power factor

Voltage angle between L1-L2 (deg.)

Voltage angle between L1-L2 (deg.)

Voltage angle between L2-L3 (deg.)

Voltage angle between L2-L3 (deg.)

Voltage angle between L3-L1 (deg.)

Voltage angle between L3-L1 (deg.)

BB U-L1N

BB U-L1N

BB U-L2N

BB U-L2N

BB U-L3N

BB U-L3N

BB U-L1L2

BB U-L1L2

BB U-L2L3

BB U-L2L3

BB U-L3L1

BB U-L3L1

BB U-MAX

BB U-MAX

BB U-Min

BB U-Min

BB f-L1

BB f-L1

BB AngL1L2-180.0deg

BB AngL1L2-180.0deg

BB-G Ang -180.0deg

BB-M Ang -180.0deg

U-Supply (power supply V DC)

U-Supply (power supply V DC)

Energy counter, total (kWh)

Energy counter, total (kWh)

Energy counter, daily (kWh)

Energy counter, daily (kWh)

Energy counter, weekly (kWh)

Energy counter, weekly (kWh)

Energy counter, monthly (kWh)

Energy counter, monthly (kWh)

G U-L1N (voltage L1-N)

M U-L1N (voltage L1-N)

G U-L2N (voltage L2-N)

M U-L2N (voltage L2-N)

G U-L3N (voltage L3-N)

M U-L3N (voltage L3-N)

G U-L1L2 (voltage L1-L2)

M U-L1L2 (voltage L1-L2)

G U-L2L3 (voltage L2-L3)

M U-L2L3 (voltage L2-L3)

G U-L3L1 (voltage L3-L1)

M U-L3L1 (voltage L3-L1)

G U-Max (voltage max.)

M U-Max (voltage max.)

G U-Min (voltage min.)

M U-Min (voltage min.)

DEIF A/S

Page 72 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Display and menu structure

View line configuration


G I-L1 (current L1)

M I-L1 (current L1)

G I-L2 (current L2)

M I-L2 (current L2)

G I-L3 (current L3)

M I-L3 (current L3)

Run abs. (absolute run time)


Run rel. (relative run time)
Next prio (next priority shift)
Run ShtD O (shutdown override run time)
Mains power A102

P TB A105

Number of GB operations

Number of TB operations

Start attempts
Start att Std (start attempts standard)
Start att Dbl (start attempts double)
P available

P available

P mains

P mains

P DGs tot

P DGs tot

Number of MB operations

Number of MB operations

Service timer 1
Service timer 2
MPU
Multi-input 46

Multi-input 46

Multi-input 47

Multi-input 47

Multi-input 48

Multi-input 48

View line configuration


For generator

For bus/mains

Cos Phi
P tie breaker
Cos Phi (current)
Power reference (actual)
Power reference (current)

Power reference (current)

Fan A priority and hours


Fan B priority and hours
Fan C priority and hours
Fan D priority and hours
Parameter ID
Governor regulator type
AVR regulator type
EIC readings

DEIF A/S

Page 73 of 324

Display and menu structure

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

View line configuration


External analogue readings
View menu example
MAINS FAILURE

MAINS FAILURE

U-supply

24.1 V

0.001 PF

0 kVA

0 kW

Press

0 kVAr

MAINS FAILURE

Event log

Press

Alarm log
Battery test log

Setup menu
1000 Protection
2000 Synchronisation

AGC 200

2500 Regulation

2010-01-06

08:59:08

3000 Binary input

Press

Press

MAINS FAILURE

Press

MAINS FAILURE

MAINS FAILURE

0 kW

0%

MAINS FAILURE

Setup menu

0 kVAr

0%

Wed Jan 06 13:36:23

1000 G

-P>

0 kVA

0%

1010 G

-P>

MB OFF

1030 G

I>

Wed Jan 06 13:36:23

1040 G

I>

AGC 200
2010-01-06

08:59:08

The scrollbar
indicates that more
readings are
available below

Press
MAINS FAILURE
1010 G

-P>

Setpoint :

-9.0 %

Timer :

10.2 s

Output A : Not used


Output B : Not used

4.1.12 Mode overview


The unit has four different running modes and one block mode. The modes are selected directly with pushbuttons in the lower right corner of the unit front.
Auto
In auto mode, the unit will operate automatically and the operator cannot initiate any sequences manually.
Semi-auto
In semi-auto mode, the operator must initiate all sequences. This can be done via the push-button functions,
Modbus commands or digital inputs. When started in semi-automatic mode, the genset will run at nominal
values.
Test
The test sequence will start when the test mode is selected.
Manual
When manual mode is selected, the binary increase/decrease inputs can be used (if they have been configured) as well as the start and stop push-buttons. When starting in manual mode, the genset will start without
any subsequent regulation.

DEIF A/S

Page 74 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Display and menu structure

OFF
When the OFF mode is selected, the unit is not able to initiate any sequences, e.g. the start sequence.

OFF mode must be selected, when maintenance work is carried out on the genset.

DEIF A/S

Page 75 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Display and menu structure

4.1.13 Password
The unit includes three password levels. All levels can be adjusted in the PC software.
Available password levels:
Password level

Factory setting

Access
Customer

Service

Customer

2000

Service

2001

Master

2002

Master

A parameter cannot be entered with a password that is ranking too low. But the settings can be displayed
without password entry.
Each parameter can be protected by a specific password level. To do so, the PC utility software must be
used. Enter the parameter to be configured and select the correct password level.

DEIF A/S

Page 76 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Display and menu structure

The password level can also be changed from the parameter view in the column "Level".

4.1.14 Parameter access


To gain access to adjust the parameters, the password level must be entered:

If the password level is not entered, it is not possible to enter the parameters.
The customer password can be changed in jump menu 9116. The service password can be
changed in jump menu 9117. The master password can be changed in jump menu 9118.
The factory passwords must be changed if the operator of the genset is not allowed to change
the parameters.
It is not possible to change the password at a higher level than the password entered.

DEIF A/S

Page 77 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

PID controller

5. PID controller
5.1 PID controller
5.1.1 PID controller
The unit controller is a PID controller. It consists of a proportional regulator, an integral regulator and a differential regulator. The PID controller is able to eliminate the regulation deviation and can easily be tuned in.
Please refer to the "General Guidelines for Commissioning".

5.1.2 Controllers
There are three controllers for the governor control and, if AVR control is selected, also three controllers for
the AVR control. Furthermore, there are two controllers performing synchronisation.
Controller

GOV

AVR

Comment

Frequency

Controls the frequency

Power

Controls the power

P load sharing

Controls the active power load sharing

Voltage

Controls the voltage

var

Controls the power factor

Q load sharing

Controls the reactive power load sharing

Sync

Controls the frequency when synchronising

Phase

Controls the frequency during static synchronisation when the frequencies


are close to similar

The table below indicates when each of the controllers is active. This means that the controllers can be tuned
in when the shown running situations are present.

DEIF A/S

Page 78 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

PID controller

GOVERNOR
Frequency

Power

AVR
P LS

Voltage

var

SCHEMATIC
Q LS

GB OPEN
GB

GB

GB

GB CLOSED
X

GB

G
X

GB

GB

SINGLE DG WITH MAINS CONNECTION


X

GB

MB

GB

MB

G
X

DEIF A/S

Page 79 of 324

PID controller

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

GOVERNOR

AVR

SCHEMATIC

GB

MB

G
DELOAD
X

GB

G
X

X
GB

GB

G
X

GB

MB

GOVERNOR
Freq

Pow

P LS

Sync

AVR
Phase

Volt

var

SCHEMATIC
Q LS

SYNCHRONISING
X

------------Dynamic synchronisation-----------GB

G
X

------------Static synchronisation-----------GB

5.1.3 Principle drawing


The drawing below shows the basic principle of the PID controller.

DEIF A/S

Page 80 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Set point

PID controller

P-part
(Kp)

I-part
(Ti)

Output

D-part
(Td)

PID s Kp 1
Td s
Ti s

As illustrated in the above drawing and equation, each regulator (P, I and D) gives an output which is summarised to the total controller output.
The adjustable settings for the PID controllers in the AGC 200 unit are:
Kp :

The gain for the proportional part.

Ti :

The integral action time for the integral part.

Td :

The differential action time for the differential part.

The function of each part is described in the following.

5.1.4 Proportional regulator


When the regulation deviation occurs, the proportional part will cause an immediate change of the output.
The size of the change depends on the gain Kp.
The diagram shows how the output of the P regulator depends on the Kp setting. The change of the output at
a given Kp setting will be doubled, if the regulation deviation doubles.

P regulator

2%

4%

100

Output (%)

80

1%

60

40

0.5 %
20

0
0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Kp

DEIF A/S

Page 81 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

PID controller

Speed range
Because of the characteristic above, it is recommended to use the full range of the output to avoid an unstable regulation. If the output range used is too small, a small regulation deviation will cause a rather big output
change. This is shown in the drawing below.
kP

1% regulation
deviation

kP

mA
5

10

15

20

25

A 1% regulation deviation occurs. With the Kp setting adjusted, the deviation causes the output to change
20%. The table shows that the output of the AGC 200 changes relatively much if the maximum speed range
is low.
Max. speed range

Output change

Output change in % of max. speed range

50%

20%

20/50*100%

40

100%

20%

20/100*100%

20

Dynamic regulation area


The drawing below shows the dynamic regulation area at given values of Kp. The dynamic area will be smaller if the Kp is adjusted to a higher value.

DEIF A/S

Page 82 of 324

PID controller

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Dynamic regulation band


Kp=50

100

Kp=10

75
50
25

Kp=1

Frequency
[Hz]
44

45

46

47

48

0
49 50
-25

51

52

53

54

55

56

-50
-75
-100

Output [%]

Integral regulator
The main function of the integral regulator is to eliminate offset. The integral action time Ti is defined as the
time the integral regulator uses to replicate the momentary change of the output caused by the proportional
regulator.
In the drawing below, the proportional regulator causes an immediate change of 10%. The integral action
time is then measured when the output reaches 2 x 10 = 20%.

Integral action time, Ti


6
Ti = 10 s

Ti = 20 s

mA 3
2
1
0
0

10

15

20

25

30

35

sec

As shown in the drawing, the output reaches 20% twice as fast at a Ti setting of 10 s than with a setting of 20
s.

DEIF A/S

Page 83 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

PID controller

The integrating function of the I regulator is increased if the integral action time is decreased. This means that
a lower setting of the integral action time Ti results in a faster regulation.
If the Ti is adjusted to 0 s, the I regulator is switched OFF.
The integral action time Ti must not be too low. This will make the regulation hunt similar to a
too high proportional action factor Kp.
Differential regulator
The main purpose of the differential regulator (D regulator) is to stabilise the regulation, thus making it possible to set a higher gain and a lower integral action time Ti. This will make the overall regulation eliminate deviations much faster.
In most cases, the differential regulator is not needed; however, in case of very precise regulation situations,
e.g. static synchronisation, it can be very useful.

The output from the D regulator can be explained with the equation:

D Td Kp

de
dt

D = Regulator output
Kp = Gain
de/dt = Slope of the deviation (how fast the deviation occurs)
This means that the D regulator output depends on the slope of the deviation, the Kp and the Td setting.
Example: In the following example, it is assumed that Kp = 1.

D-regulator
8

Output/deviation

7
6
Deviation 2

5
4
3

D-output 2, Td=1s

Deviation 1

D-output 2, Td=0.5 s
D-output 1, Td=0.5 s

0
0

0.5

1.5

2.5

Time [s]

DEIF A/S

Page 84 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

PID controller

Deviation 1:

A deviation with a slope of 1

Deviation 2:

A deviation with a slope of 2.5 (2.5 times bigger than deviation 1

D output 1, Td=0.5 s:

Output from the D regulator when Td=0.5 s and the deviation is according to Deviation 1.

D output 2, Td=0.5 s:

Output from the D regulator when Td=0.5 s and the deviation is according to Deviation 2.

D output 2, Td=1 s:

Output from the D regulator when Td=1 s and the deviation is according to Deviation 2.

The example shows that the bigger the deviation and the higher the Td setting is, the bigger is the output
from the D regulator. Since the D regulator is responding to the slope of the deviation, it also means that
when there is no change, the D output will be zero.
When commissioning, please keep in mind that the Kp setting has influence on the D regulator
output.
If the Td is adjusted to 0 s, the D regulator is switched OFF.
The differential action time Td must not be too high. This will make the regulation hunt similar
to a too high proportional action factor Kp

5.1.5 Load share controller/var share controller


The load share controller and VAr share controller is used in the AGC 200 whenever load sharing/VAr sharing mode is activated. The controller is a PID controller similar to the other controllers in the system, and it
handles frequency control as well as power control (load sharing) and voltage as well as reactive power control (VAr sharing).
Load share controller
Adjustment of the load share controller is done in menu 2540 (analogue control) or 2590 (relay control).
VAr share controller
Adjustment of the VAr share controller is done in menu 2660 (analogue control) or 2700 (relay control).
General
The primary purpose of the PID controllers is always frequency/voltage control because they are variable in a
load sharing system, as well as the power/reactive power on the individual generator. Since the load sharing
system requires power/reactive power regulation as well, the PID controllers can be affected by the power/
reactive power regulator. For this purpose, a so-called weight factor is used (PWEIGHT/QWEIGHT).
The regulation deviation from the power/reactive power regulator can therefore have great or less influence
on the PID controller. An adjustment of 0% means that the power/reactive power control is switched off. An
adjustment of 100% means that the power/reactive power regulation is not limited by the weight factor. Any
adjustment in between is possible.
The difference between adjusting the weight value to a high or low value is the speed at which the power/
reactive power regulation deviation is eliminated. So if a firm load sharing is needed, the weight factor must
be adjusted to a higher value than if an easy load sharing is required.

DEIF A/S

Page 85 of 324

PID controller

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

An expected disadvantage of a high weight factor is that when a frequency/voltage deviation and a power/
reactive power deviation exist, then hunting could be experienced. To avoid this, you can decrease either the
weight factor or the parameters of the frequency/voltage regulator.

5.1.6 Synchronising controller


The synchronising controller is used in the AGC 200 whenever synchronising is activated. After a successful
synchronisation, the frequency controller is deactivated and the relevant controller is activated. This could
e.g. be the load sharing controller. The adjustments are made in menu 2050. For synchronising, voltage
matching is carried out using the voltage controller (setting 2640).
Dynamic synchronising
When dynamic synchronising is used, the controller 2050 fSYNC controller is used during the entire synchronising sequence. One of the advantages of dynamic synchronising is that it is relatively fast. In order to improve the speed of the synchronising further, the generator will be sped up between the points of synchronisation (12 oclock to 12 oclock) of the two systems. Normally, a slip frequency of 0.1 Hz gives synchronism
each 10 seconds, but with this system on a steady engine, the time between synchronism is reduced.
Static synchronising
When synchronising is started, the synchronising controller 2050 fSYNC controller is activated and the generator frequency is controlled towards the busbar/mains frequency. The phase controller takes over when the
frequency deviation is so small that the phase angle can be controlled. The phase controller is adjusted in
menu 2070 (2070 phase controller).

5.1.7 Relay control


When the relay outputs are used for control purposes, the regulation works like this:
Regulator
output

45Hz

Fix up signal

50Hz

Up pulse

No reg.

55Hz

Down pulse

Hz

Fix down signal

The regulation with relays can be split up into five steps.

DEIF A/S

Page 86 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Range

PID controller

Description

Comment

Static range

Fix up signal

The regulation is active, but the increase relay will be constantly activated because of the size of the regulation deviation.

Dynamic
range

Up pulse

The regulation is active, and the increase relay will be pulsing in order to
eliminate the regulation deviation.

Dead band
area

No reg.

In this particular range, no regulation takes place. The regulation accepts a predefined dead band area in order to increase the lifetime of
the relays.

Dynamic
range

Down pulse

The regulation is active, and the decrease relay will be pulsing in order
to eliminate the regulation deviation.

Static range

Fix down
signal

The regulation is active, but the decrease relay will be constantly activated because of the size of the regulation deviation.

As the drawing indicates, the relays will be fixed ON if the regulation deviation is big, and they will be pulsing
if it is closer to the setpoint. In the dynamic range, the pulses get shorter and shorter when the regulation
deviation gets smaller. Just before the dead band area, the pulse is as short as it can get. This is the adjusted
time GOV ON time/(AVR ON time). The longest pulse will appear at the end of the dynamic range (45 Hz
in the example above).
Relay adjustments
The time settings for the regulation relays can be adjusted in the control setup. It is possible to adjust the period time and the ON time. They are shown in the drawing below.
Adjustment

Description

Period time

Maximum relay time

The time between the beginnings of two subsequent relay pulses.

ON time

Minimum relay time

The minimum length of the relay pulse. The relays will never be activated for a shorter time than the ON time.

DEIF A/S

Comment

Page 87 of 324

PID controller

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

As it is indicated in the drawing below, the length of the relay pulse will depend on the actual regulation deviation. If the deviation is big, then the pulses will be long (or a continued signal). If the deviation is small, then
the pulses will be short.
Relay ON

PERIOD

ON

PERIOD

PERIOD

ON

ON

PERIOD

ON

PERIOD

ON

t [sec]

HIGH

<DEVIATION>

LOW

Signal length
The signal length is calculated compared to the adjusted period time. In the drawing below, the effect of the
proportional regulator is indicated.

P regulator

2%

4%

100

Output (%)

80

1%

60

40

0.5 %
20

0
0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Kp

In this example, we have a 2 percent regulation deviation and an adjusted value of the Kp = 20. The calculated regulator value of the unit is 40%. Now, the pulse length can be calculated with a period time = 2500 ms:

e DEVIATION / 100 * t PERIOD


40 / 100 * 2500 1000 ms

DEIF A/S

Page 88 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

PID controller

The length of the period time will never be shorter than the adjusted ON time.
Regulation failure
The governor/AVR regulation failure in menu 2560/2680 occurs when the regulation is activated but the setpoint cannot be reached.
The alarm will appear when the setpoint is reached. The deviation is calculated in percent:
Example:
UACTUAL = 400V AC
UNOMINAL = 440V AC
Difference in percent: (440-400)/440*100 = 9.1%
If the alarm setting is lower than 9.1% in this example, the alarm appears.
Adjust the alarm setting Dead band to 100% to deactivate the alarm.

DEIF A/S

Page 89 of 324

Synchronisation

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

6. Synchronisation
6.1 Synchronisation
The unit can be used for synchronisation of generator and mains breaker (if installed). Two different synchronisation principles are available, namely static and dynamic synchronisation (dynamic is selected by default).
This chapter describes the principles of the synchronisation functions and the adjustment of these.
In the following, the term synchronisation means synchronising and closing of the
synchronised breaker.

6.2 Dynamic synchronisation


In dynamic synchronisation the synchronising genset is running at a different speed than the generator on the
busbar. This speed difference is called slip frequency. Typically, the synchronising genset is running with a
positive slip frequency. This means that it is running with a higher speed than the generator on the busbar.
The objective is to avoid a reverse power trip after the synchronisation.
The dynamic principle is illustrated below.

Synchronisation principle dynamic synchronisation


LOAD

GB

GB

Speed:

Speed:
1503 RPM
50.1 Hertz

Synchronising generator
L2

L2

1500 RPM
50.00 Hertz

L3

L3

Generator on load
L1

L1

L1

L1

L1

L1

L1
L3

L1

L3

L2

L2

L3

L2

L3

L2

L3

L2

L3

L2

Angle
L1gen/L1bus
[deg]

Synchronised
180
90
t [s]

0
0s

2.5 s

5.0 s

7.5 s

In the example above, the synchronising genset is running at 1503 RPM ~ 50.1 Hz. The generator on load is
running at 1500 RPM ~ 50.0 Hz. This gives the synchronising genset a positive slip frequency of 0.1 Hz.

DEIF A/S

Page 90 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Synchronisation

The intention of the synchronising is to decrease the phase angle difference between the two rotating systems. These two systems are the three-phase system of the generator and the three-phase system of the
busbar. In the illustration above, phase L1 of the busbar is always pointing at 12 oclock, whereas phase L1 of
the synchronising genset is pointing in different directions due to the slip frequency.
Of course both three-phase systems are rotating, but for illustrative purposes the vectors for
the generator on load are not shown to be rotating. This is because we are only interested in
the slip frequency for calculating when to release the synchronisation pulse.
When the generator is running with a positive slip frequency of 0.1 Hz compared to the busbar, then the two
systems will be synchronised every 10 seconds.

Please observe the chapter regarding PID controllers and the synchronising controllers.
In the illustration above, the difference in the phase angle between the synchronising set and the busbar gets
smaller and will eventually be zero. Then the genset is synchronised to the busbar, and the breaker will be
closed.

6.2.1 Close signal


The unit always calculates when to close the breaker to get the most accurate synchronisation. This means
that the close breaker signal is actually issued before being synchronised (read L1 phases exactly at 12
oclock).
The breaker close signal will be issued depending on the breaker closing time and the slip frequency (response time of the circuit breaker is 250 ms, and the slip frequency is 0.1 Hz):

The synchronisation pulse is always issued, so the closing of the breaker will occur at the 12
oclock position.
The length of the synchronisation pulse is the response time + 20 ms (2020 Synchronisation).

6.2.2 Load picture after synchronising


When the incoming genset has closed its breaker, it will take a portion of the load depending on the actual
position of the fuel rack. Illustration 1 below indicates that at a given positive slip frequency, the incoming
genset will export power to the load. Illustration 2 below shows that at a given negative slip frequency, the
incoming genset will receive power from the original genset. This phenomenon is called reverse power.

DEIF A/S

Page 91 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Synchronisation

To avoid nuisance trips caused by reverse power, the synchronising settings can be set up
with a positive slip frequency.

FUEL INDEX

0%

G1

100%

PGen1

GB

LOAD
FUEL INDEX

0%

G2

100%

PGen2

GB

Illustration 1, POSITIVE slip frequency


______________________________________________________________________________________

FUEL INDEX

0%

G1

100%

PGen1

GB

LOAD
FUEL INDEX

0%

G2

100%

PGen2

GB

Reverse power

Illustration 2, NEGATIVE slip frequency

6.2.3 Adjustments
The dynamic synchroniser is selected in 2000 Sync. type in the control setup and is adjusted in 2020 Synchronisation.
Setting

Description

Comment

2021 fMAX

Maximum slip frequency

Adjust the maximum positive slip frequency where synchronising is allowed.

2022 fMIN

Minimum slip frequency

Adjust the maximum negative slip frequency where synchronising is allowed.

2023 UMAX

Maximum voltage differrence


(+/- value)

The maximum allowed voltage difference between the busbar/mains and the generator.

2024 tGB

Generator breaker closing time

Adjust the response time of the generator breaker.

2025 tMB

Mains breaker closing time

Adjust the response time of the mains breaker.

DEIF A/S

Page 92 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Synchronisation

It is obvious that this type of synchronisation is able to synchronise relatively fast because of the adjusted
minimum and maximum slip frequencies. This actually means that when the unit is aiming to control the frequency towards its setpoint, then synchronising can still occur as long as the frequency is within the limits of
the slip frequency adjustments.
Dynamic synchronisation is recommended where fast synchronisation is required, and where
the incoming gensets are able to take load just after the breaker has been closed.
Static and dynamic synchronisation can be switched by using M-logic.

6.3 Static synchronisation


In static synchronisation, the synchronising genset is running very close to the same speed as the generator
on the busbar. The aim is to let them run at exactly the same speed and with the phase angles between the
three-phase system of the generator and the three-phase system of the busbar matching exactly.
It is not recommended to use the static synchronisation principle when relay regulation outputs are used. This is due to the slower nature of the regulation with relay outputs.
The static principle is illustrated below.

Synchronisation principle static synchronisation


LOAD

GB

GB

Speed:

Speed:
1500.3 RPM
50.01 Hertz

Synchronising generator

L1
L3
L2

Generator on load

L1

L1

L3

1500 RPM
50.00 Hertz

L1

L1

L1

L1

L1

L3
L2

L2

L3

L2

L3

L2

L3

L2

L3

L2

L3

L2

Angle
L1gen/L1bus
[deg]

Synchronised
30
20
10
0

DEIF A/S

t [s]

Page 93 of 324

Synchronisation

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

6.3.1 Phase controller


When the static synchronisation is used and the synchronising is activated, the frequency controller will bring
the genset frequency towards the busbar frequency. When the genset frequency is within 50 mHz of the busbar frequency, then the phase controller takes over. This controller uses the angle difference between the
generator system and the busbar system as the controlling parameter.
This is illustrated in the example above where the phase controller brings the phase angle from 30 deg. to 0
deg.

6.3.2 Close signal


The close signal will be issued when phase L1 of the synchronising generator is close to the 12 oclock position compared to the busbar which is also in 12 oclock position. It is not relevant to use the response time of
the circuit breaker when using static synchronisation, because the slip frequency is either very small or nonexisting.
To be able to get a faster synchronisation, a "close window" can be adjusted. The close signal can be issued
when the phase angle UGENL1-UBBL1 is within the adjusted setpoint. The range is +/-0.1-20.0 deg. This is
illustrated in the drawing below.

close window

Max. dU difference
Max. dU difference

Direction of
rotation

UBB

UGEN

The synchronisation pulse is sent dependent on the settings in menu 2030. It depends on whether it is the
GB or the MB that is to be synchronised.

6.3.3 Load picture after synchronisation


The synchronised genset will not be exposed to an immediate load after the breaker closure if the maximum
df setting is adjusted to a low value. Since the fuel rack position almost exactly equals what is required to run
at the busbar frequency, no load jump will occur.
If the maximum df setting is adjusted to a high value, then the observations in the section about "dynamic
synchronisation" must be observed.

DEIF A/S

Page 94 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Synchronisation

After the synchronising, the unit will change the controller setpoint according to the requirements of the selected genset mode.
Static synchronisation is recommended where a slip frequency is not accepted, for instance if
several gensets synchronise to a busbar with no load groups connected.
Static and dynamic synchronisation can be switched by using M-logic.

6.3.4 Adjustments
The following settings must be adjusted if the static synchroniser is selected in menu 2000:
Setting

Description

Comment

2031
Maximum df

The maximum allowed frequency difference between the busbar/mains and the generator.

+/- value.

2032
Maximum dU

The maximum allowed voltage difference between the busbar/mains and the generator.

+/- value related to the nominal generator voltage.

2033
Closing window

The size of the window where the synchronisation pulse can be released.

+/- value.

2034
Static sync

Minimum time inside the phase window before


sending a close command.

2035
Static type GB

"Breaker" or "Infinite sync" can be chosen.

"Infinite sync" will close the MB to the


busbar and run the generator in sync
with the mains. The GB is not allowed
to close.

2036
Static type MB

"Breaker" or "Infinite sync" can be chosen.

"Infinite sync" will close the GB to the


busbar and run the generator in sync
with the mains. The MB is not allowed
to close.

2061
Phase KP

Adjustment of the proportional factor of the PI


phase controller.

Only used during analogue regulation


output.

2062
Phase KI

Adjustment of the integral factor of the PI phase


controller.

2070
Phase KP

Adjustment of the proportional factor of the PI


phase controller.

DEIF A/S

Only used during relay regulation output.

Page 95 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Synchronisation

6.4 GB closing before excitation


It is possible to adjust the AGC to start up the genset with the excitation switched off. When the gensets are
started up, the breakers will be closed and the excitation started. It is also possible to close the breaker before the engine is started. This function is called "close before excitation".
The purpose of the "close before excitation" is that the gensets are able to be ready for the load very quickly.
All of the gensets will be connected to the busbar as soon as they are started, and as soon as the excitation
is switched on, the gensets are ready for operation. This is faster than the normal synchronising, because in
that case the breakers will not be closed until the generator voltage is in the synchronised position, and it
takes some time to achieve that position.
The "close before start" function can also be used if the load requires a "soft" start. This can be the case
when the gensets connect to a transformer.
As soon as the excitation is activated, the generators will equalise the voltage and frequency and will eventually run in a synchronised system. When the excitation is activated, then the regulators of the AGC will be
switched on after an adjustable delay.
The function can be used in the single AGC but also the AGC with option G4 or G5.
The excitation must be increased slowly when this function is used.

This function can only be used with a magnetic pick-up or J1939 speed signal.

This function is not available in units with option G3.


The principle is described in the flowcharts below.
Flowchart abbreviations
Delay 1
Delay 2
Delay 3

=
=
=

Menu 2252
Menu 2262
Menu 2271

SP1
SP2

=
=

Menu 2251
Menu 2263

DEIF A/S

Page 96 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Synchronisation

6.4.1 Flowchart 1, GB handling


Start

Start DG(s)
No
RPM > SP1

No

Delay 1 expired

Yes
Yes

Close GB
No
RPM > SP2

No

Delay 1 expired

Yes

Trip GB

Start
excitation

Activate
regulators

Delay 2 expired

Yes
Delay 1 expired
on all DG(s)
Yes
Start
excitation

No
No
Yes
Delay 2 expired

No

Yes

No

Delay 3 expired

UBUS OK
No

Activate
regulators

Yes
Close before
excitation
failure

No
Yes

Yes
End

DEIF A/S

UBUS OK

Sync GB

No

Delay 3 expired
Yes
Close before
excitation
failure

Page 97 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Synchronisation

6.4.2 Flowchart 2, TB handling (AGC 244 only)


Start

No

TB Open
Yes

Any GB closed

No

Yes

PAVAIL > PCAP

No

Yes
GB + TB

No

Yes

MB OFF

No

Yes

Close TB

Sync TB

End

DEIF A/S

Page 98 of 324

Synchronisation

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

6.4.3 Genset start actions


The start sequence of the AGC is changed in order to achieve the function "close before excitation". The following parameters must be adjusted:
Menu

Description

Comment

2251

RPM setpoint
for breaker
closing

The generator breaker will close at the adjusted level. The range is from 0-400
RPM. If it is adjusted to 0, then the breaker will be closed when the start command is given.
In the example below the setting is adjusted to 400.

2252

RPM timer

The genset must reach the setpoint (menu 2263) within the adjusted delay.
When the delay expires and the RPM is above the setpoint, then the excitation
will be started. If the RPM is below the setpoint, then the GB will be tripped.

2253

Output A

Select the relay output that must be used to start the excitation.
Configure the relay to be a limit relay in the I/O setup.

2255

Enable

Enable the function "close before excitation".

Engine RPM

1500 RPM
1350 RPM

400 RPM

time
Close GB

Start RPMNOM
excitation

The diagram above shows that the GB will be closed at 400 RPM. When the engine RPM has reached the
setpoint (menu 2263) (1450 RPM), then the excitation is switched on.

6.4.4 Breaker sequence


The "GB close before start" function can be used in three applications:
1. AGC single genset plant
2. AGC power management plant - no tie breaker present
3. AGC power management plant - tie breaker present
In one of the applications a tie breaker is present, and it must be adjusted in the menu 2261 whether only the
generator breaker must be closed or both the generator breaker and also the tie breaker.

DEIF A/S

Page 99 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Synchronisation

The breaker sequence adjustments are the following:


Menu

Description

Comment

2261

Breaker selection

Select breakers to close: GB or GB + TB.

2262

Timer

The timer defines the period from the excitation is started and until the regulation is activated. The alarms with inhibit set to "Not run status" will be activated after this timer has expired.

2263

Excitation start level

The setting defines at what level of RPM the excitation is started.

6.4.5 "Close before excitation" failure


If the starting of the genset does not succeed, then the alarm menu 2270 "Cl.bef.exc.fail" will occur, and the
selected fail class will be executed.

6.5 Separate synchronising relay


6.5.1 Separate synchronising relay
When the AGC 200 gives the synchronising command, the relays on terminal 17/18/19 (generator breaker)
and terminal 11/12/13 (mains breaker) will activate, and the breaker must close when this relay output is activated.
This default function can be modified using a digital input and extra relay outputs depending on the required
function. The relay selection is made in menu 2240, and the input is selected in the input settings in the utility
software.

DEIF A/S

Page 100 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Synchronisation

The table below describes the possibilities:


InputRelays

Relay selected
(Two relays used)

Relay not selected


(One relay used)

Not
used

Synchronising:
The breaker ON relay and the sync. relay activate at the
same time when synchronising is OK.
Blackout closing:
The breaker ON relay and the sync. relay activate at the
same time when the voltage and frequency are OK.

Synchronising:
The breaker ON relay activates
when synchronising is OK.
Blackout closing:
The breaker ON relay activates
when the voltage and frequency are
OK. DEFAULT selection

Low

Synchronising:
Not possible.
Blackout closing:
The breaker ON relay and the sync. relay activate at the
same time when the voltage and frequency are OK.

Synchronising:
Not possible.
Blackout closing:
The breaker ON relay activates
when the voltage and frequency are
OK.

High

Synchronising:
The relays will activate in two steps when the synchronising is selected:
1. Breaker ON relay activates.
2. When synchronised, the sync. relay activates.

Synchronising:
Not possible.
Blackout closing:
The breaker ON relay activates
when the voltage and frequency are
OK.

See note below!


Blackout closing:
The breaker ON relay and the sync. relay activate at the
same time when the voltage and frequency are OK.

When two relays are used together with the separate sync. input, then please notice that the
breaker ON relay will be activated as soon as the GB ON/synchronising sequence is activated.
Care must be taken that the GB ON relay cannot close the breaker, before the sync. signal is
issued by the sync. relay.
The selected relay for this function must have the limit function. This is adjusted in the I/O
setup.

DEIF A/S

Page 101 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Synchronisation

6.6 Inhibit conditions before synchronising mains breaker


This function is used to inhibit the synchronising of the mains breaker after blackout. After blackout, the timer
in menu 2291 ("Delay activate recovery 2") will start to run, and if the mains voltage and frequency are inside
the limits (2281/2282/2283/2284) before the timer runs out, the short interruption timer (menu 2292 "Recovery
del. 1") will be started. When the timer has run out, the synchronising of the MB will start.

Mains failure

Delay act. rec2


2291

Mains condition
Ok 2281-2284

Yes

No

Delay act. rec2


Expires 2291

Recovery del.2
2294

Recovery del.1
2292

Close Mains
breaker

If the "Delay activate recovery 2" timer runs out, the long interruption timer (menu 2294 "Recovery del. 2") will
start to run.
Examples:
Recovery timer 1 (short interruption timer)
Menu 2291 = 3 s
Menu 2292 = 5 s
That means: if the short interruption timer is set to < 3 s, and the grid is back and voltage and frequency are
inside the acceptable range stated above, then after 5 s the MB can be closed.

DEIF A/S

Page 102 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Synchronisation

Recovery timer 2 (long interruption timer)


Menu 2291 = 3 s
Menu 2294 = 60 s
The long interruption timer will allow the MB to reconnect as soon as the mains voltage and frequency have
been uninterrupted within the timer setting in menu 2294 ("Recovery del. 2"). Then the MB can be closed.
The inhibit parameters for synchronising the MB are disabled by default.

DEIF A/S

Page 103 of 324

Engine communication

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

7. Engine communication
7.1 Engine communication
7.1.1 Engine communication
This function gives the possibility of communication between ML-2 and several engine types over the CANbus. AVR control is possible for selected digital voltage regulators.

7.1.2 Modbus communication


If option H2 is present, it is possible to read engine data over the Modbus.
Please refer to the document Description of option H2.

7.1.3 Wiring
For wiring details, please refer to the document Installation Instructions.

7.1.4 Principle diagram


Display

Option H5

ECM module
Generator set

AGC 200

Option H2

PLC (or computer),


AMS (Alarm- and
Monitoring System)

7.1.5 Functional description


This communication extracts information from the Electronic Control Module (ECM) of an engine equipped
with an ECM module with CANbus interface. The values can be used as display values, alarms/shutdown
alarms and values to be transmitted through Modbus.

DEIF A/S

Page 104 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

Engine types:
Data can be transmitted between the ML-2 units and the following engine controllers/types:
Engine manufacturer

Engine controller/type

Comment

Caterpillar

ADEM III and A4/C4.4, C6.6, C9, C15, C18, C32

Rx/Tx

Cummins

CM850/570/2150/2250, QSL, QSB5, QXL15 and 7, QSM11, QSK19,


50 and 60

Rx/Tx

Detroit Diesel

DDEC III and IV/Series 50, 60 and 2000

Rx/Tx

Deutz

EMR 2, EMR 3 (EMR)/912, 913, 914 and L2011

Rx/Tx

Generic J1939

Rx/Tx

Iveco

EDC7 (Bosch MS6.2)/Series NEF, CURSOR and VECTOR 8

Rx/Tx

John Deere

JDEC/PowerTech M, E and Plus

Rx/Tx

MTU

MDEC, module M.302 or M.303/Series 2000 and 4000

Rx

MTU

MDEC, module M.201 or M.304/Series 2000 and 4000

Rx

MTU

ADEC/Series 2000 and 4000 (ECU 7)

Rx
Select M.303

MTU

J1939 Smart Connect/Series 1600 (ECU 8)

Rx/Tx

Perkins

Series 1100, 1300, 2300, 2500 and 2800

Rx/Tx

Scania

EMS

Rx

Scania

EMS S6 (KWP2000)/Dx9x, Dx12x, Dx16x

Rx/Tx

Volvo Penta

EDC4

Rx
Select EMR 2

Volvo Penta

EMS

Rx

Volvo Penta

EMS 2 and EDCIII/D6, D7, D9, D12 and D16 (GE and AUX variants
only)

Rx/Tx

Rx/Tx: Please refer to the section Specific engine type descriptions for details of data read
and write.
The engine type is selected in menu 7561.

For support of controller/engine types not listed, please contact DEIF A/S.
AVR types:
Data can be transmitted between the ML-2 units and the following AVRs:
Engine manufacturer
Caterpillar

DEIF A/S

AVR type
CDVR

Comment
Tx

Page 105 of 324

Engine communication

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Communication system:
All these protocols are based on a CANbus communication system. Except for the MDEC and ADEC communication, they are all based on the J1939. The MDEC and ADEC protocols are MTU designed protocols
based on CANopen.
The Baud rate is fixed by the engine manufacturer at:
MDEC, ADEC
125 kb/s

Caterpillar, Cummins, Detroit Diesel, Deutz, Iveco, John Deere, Perkins, MTU J1939
Smart Connect, Scania and Volvo Penta
250 kb/s

EIC unit:
The selection of the EIC unit (menu 10970) determines whether bar/PSI or Celsius/Fahrenheit is used. The
selection affects display readings, values used for alarm evaluation (menu 76xx) and data readable by Modbus communication (option H2).
Common for all alarm functions:
A number of alarms can be configured. The following items can be configured to an alarm:
Menu number

Alarm

Comment

7570

EI comm. error

Communication error.

7580

EIC warning

Any alarm listed as warning for the selected engine type in


the section Specific engine type descriptions.

7590

EIC shutdown

Any alarm listed as shutdown for the selected engine type in


the section Specific engine type descriptions.

7600

EIC overspeed

Actual RPM.

7610/7620

EIC coolant t. (2 levels)

Actual temperature.

7630/7640

EIC oil press. (2 levels)

Actual pressure.

7650/7660

EIC oil temp. (2 levels)

Actual temperature.

7670/7680

EIC coolant level (2 levels)

Actual cooling water level

J1939 measurement table:


This is the common J1939 measurement overview, showing which measurements are available. Please notice that not all measurements are supported by the individual engines; please refer to the specific engine
description.
The table shows which values can be displayed in the view menu. The values must be selected
in the views setting of the PC utility software.
The display values corresponding to the engine communication have a description beginning with EIC.

DEIF A/S

Page 106 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

Error messages The following error messages can occur:


Message

Description

Engine I. value N.A.

The view is not selectable for the present engine type.

Value selected error

The value cannot be read due to sensor error, sub-system or module error.

N.A.

The value is not supported by the engine, or there is a communication error.

Object selection, J1939:


The view lines can be configured with these available values
For Modbus scaling, please see the Modbus tables.

The engine is expected to use source address 0.

DEIF A/S

Page 107 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Object

PGN
no.

Engine communication

Priority

Start
position of
1st data byte

Length
(bytes)

SPN
no.

Unit

J1939-71 scaling

EIC speed

61444

3/6

190

RPM

0.125 rpm/bit, offset 0

EIC coolant temp. (*1)

65262

3/6

110

1 C/bit, offset -40C

EIC oil pressure (*2)

65263

100

kpa

4 kpa/bit, offset 0

EIC faults

65230

1218

EIC oil temp. (*3)

65262

3/6

175

0.03125C/bit, offset
-273C

EIC fuel temp.

65262

3/6

174

1oC/bit, offset -40C

EIC intake manifold #1


P.(also called EIC
boost P.)

65270

102

kpa

2 kpa/bit, offset 0

EIC air inlet temp.

65269

172

1C/bit, offset -40C

EIC coolant level

65263

111

0.4%/bit, offset 0

EIC fuel rate

65266

183

l/h

0.05 l/h per bit, offset


0

EIC intake manifold 1


temp. (also called EIC
charge air temp.)

65270

105

1C/bit, offset -40C

EIC d.d. % torque

61444

3/6

512

1%/bit, offset -125%

EIC actual % torque

61444

3/6

513

1%/bit, offset -125%

EIC acc. pedal pos.

61443

3/6

91

0.4%/bit, offset 0

EIC % load, c. speed

61443

3/6

92

1%/bit, offset 0

EIC air inlet pressure

65270

106

kpa

2 kpa/bit, offset 0

EIC exhaust gas


temp.

65270

173

0.03125C/bit, offset
-273C

EIC engine hours

65253

247

0.05 hr/bit, offset 0,


max.: 32767 hrs

EIC oil filter diff. press.

65276

3/6

99

kpa

0.5 kpa/bit, offset 0

EIC key switch battery


potential

65271

158

V DC

0.05V DC/bit, offset 0

EIC fuel del. press.

65263

94

kpa

4 kpa/bit, offset 0

EIC oil level

65263

98

0.4%/bit, offset 0

EIC crankcase press.

65263

101

kpa

1/128 kpa/bit, offset


-250 kpa

EIC coolant pressure

65263

109

kpa

2 kpa/bit, offset 0

EIC water in. fuel

65279

2 Bit

97

DEIF A/S

1/bit, offset 0

00: No, 01: Yes, 10:


Error, 11: Not available

Page 108 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Object

PGN
no.

Engine communication

Priority

Start
position of
1st data byte

Length
(bytes)

SPN
no.

Unit

J1939-71 scaling

EIC turbo oil temp.

65262

3/6

176

0.03125C/bit, offset
-273C

EIC particulate trap inlet

65270

81

kpa

0.5 kpa/bit, offset 0

EIC air filter diff.

65270

107

kpa

0.05 kpa/bit, offset 0

EIC coolant filter diff.

65270

112

kpa

0.5 kpa/bit, offset 0

EIC atmospheric
press.

65269

108

kpa

0.5 kpa/bit, offset 0

EIC ambient air temp.

65269

171

0.03125C/bit, offset
-273C

EIC trip fuel_gaseous

65199

1039

kg

0.5 kg/bit, offset 0

EIC total fuel


used_gaseous

65199

1040

kg

0.5 kg/bit, offset 0

EIC engine trip fuel

65257

182

0.5 L/bit, offset 0

EIC engine total fuel


used

65257

250

0.5 L/bit, offset 0

EIC Nominal Power

65214

166

kW

0.5 kW/bit

EIC Mean trip fuel


consumption

65203

1029

l/h

0.05[l/h]/bit

EIC Intake Manifold


#1 absolute pressure

64976

3563

Bar

2 kPa/bit

EIC Air filter diff. pressure

64976

2809

Bar

0.05 kPa offset 0

EIC Fuel supply pump


inlet pressure

65130

1381

Bar

2 kPa/bit offset 0

EIC Fuel filter (ss) diff.


pressure

65130

1382

Bar

2 kPa/bit offset 0

EIC Intercooler temperature2

65150

3/6

52

1C/bit, offset -40C

EIC Fuel filter diff.


pressure2

65276

3/6

95

Bar

2 kPa/bit. 0 offset

EIC Exhaust gas


temp. R manifold2

65031

2433

0.03125C/bit, offset
-273C

EIC Exhaust gas


temp. L manifold2

65031

2434

0.03125C/bit, offset
-273C

Diagnostic message
1/2

65226

2/6/7

DEIF A/S

Page 109 of 324

Engine communication

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

For the Iveco Vector 8 type only:


(*1): EIC coolant temp.: PGN=65282, priority=6, start at byte 5, length=1byte, SPN=110, same scale.
(*2): EIC oil pressure. PGN=65282, priority=6, start at byte 7, length=1byte, 8 kPa/bit gain, 0 kPa offset, data
range: 0 to +2000 kPa.
(*3): EIC oil temp.: PGN=65282, priority=6, start at byte 6, length=1byte, SPN=175, same scale.
The objects are not supported by all engines. Please refer to the specific engine type manual
for information about the specific engine.
The Modbus addresses are read only (function code 04h) and are only available if option H2
(Modbus RTU) is implemented.

7.1.6 Show engine values in display unit


It is possible to parameterise the AGC so all analogue values from the engine CANbus is shown in the display unit. This is an example where speed, inlet air and coolant temp. is shown. The number of available
views is 20 views. The number can be increased with the auto view function.

ISLAND
EIC Speed

AUTO
1500 rpm

EIC coolant t

81 C

EIC t. Air Inlet

35 C

Energy Total

0 kWh

Run Absolute

0 hrs

The AGC is set up in one of two ways:


1. Use the function of the PC Utility SW: configuration of the user views. In this way, the 20 three-line
views can be configured to show the desired.A total of 20 views is displayed (unless fewer is set up).
2. Use the auto view function in the communication setup. (Menu number 7564.) In this way, the 20 threeline views are kept with their present setup and all engine values are added to the list of the 20 three-line
views. A total of 20+14 three-line views are available. The 20 lines are user-configurable but the 14 additional lines are dedicated to EIC values and cannot be modified by the user
The first option is useful when a few EIC values need to be shown and if all off the 20 user- configurable
views are not already used to display requested values.
The second option is useful if it is requested to read all available EIC data from the ECU. It must be noted
that all available data is shown when using this method until the additional 14 views are used. The number of
extra display views depends on the available data from the specific engine controller connected to the controller.

DEIF A/S

Page 110 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

Configuration of user views


This is done from the PC utility SW by choosing the user view icon in the settings menu (or on the horizontal
toolbar):

Activation of auto views


The extra view lines are displayed if the menu 7564 is switched to ON and the engine CANbus is active. (It
might be necessary to start the engine before switching 7564 to ON). The setting automatically returns to
OFF.
To de-activate the auto view function, please follow these steps:
1. Adjust Engine IF type to OFF (menu 7561)
2. Adjust EIC AUTOVIEW to ON (menu 7564)
3. 3. Adjust EIC AUTOVIEW to OFF (menu 7564) (the menu is not reset automatically when no engine is
selected)
Verification of J1939 objects
To verify the communication, various CAN PC tools can be used. Common for these is that they must be connected to the CANbus between the Multi-line 2 unit and the engine controller. When the tool is connected, it is
possible to monitor the communication between the two units. For use of the CAN tool, please refer to the
manual for the product used.
As an example, you can see the following telegram:
0xcf00400 ff 7d 7d e0 15 ff f0 ff
DATA BYTE: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0xc is the priority.
f004 is the PGN number (61444 in decimal value).
The eight bytes following the CAN ID (0xcf00400) are data, starting with byte 1.
The priority needs to be converted to decimal. Please notice that the three priority bits in this case are displayed in the CAN ID (you read 0xcf00400 instead of 0x0cf00400). In other cases, you may read e.g.
0x18fef200 (PGN 65266).
The formula to find the priority number (P) is to divide by 4:0xc = 12 (Dec) => Priority 3

DEIF A/S

Page 111 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Priority

Engine communication

Decimal ID

Hexadecimal ID

4d

0x4

8d

0x8

12d

0xc

16d

0x10

20d

0x14

24d

0x18

Normally in SAE J1939, only priority 3 and 6 are used.


Hereafter the data can be read (PGN 61444):
0xcf00400 xD ff 7d 7d e0 15 ff f0 ff
Engine torque

(Data byte 1)

ff

Driver demand torque

(Data byte 2)

7d

Actual engine torque

(Data byte 3)

7d

Engine speed

(Data byte 4)

e0

Engine speed

(Data byte 5)

15

Source address

(Data byte 6)

ff

Engine starter mode

(Data byte 7)

f0

Engine demand

(Data byte 8)

ff

Not available

Not available
Not available

Calculation example:
RPM resolution is 0.125 RPM/bit, offset 0. The result is then 15e0 (Hex) or 5600 (dec)*0.125 = 700 RPM.
Displaying of J1939 DM1/DM2, Scania KWP2000 and Caterpillar/Perkins alarms
Besides some engine specific alarms, which are shown in the standard alarm list, the J1939 diagnostic messages DM1 (active alarms) and DM2 (historic alarm log list) as well as the Scania KWP 2000 alarms can all
be shown on the display. In both cases, the alarms are accessed through the LOG list.

Press

to enter the list:

MAINS FAILURE
Event log
Alarm log
Battery test log
EIC DM1 alarms
EIC DM2 alarms

DEIF A/S

Page 112 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Use

the

Engine communication

and buttons to scroll through the list, and select the alarm log you wish to see by pressing

.For DM1 and DM2, the SPN (Suspect Parameter Number) and FMI (Failure Mode Indicator) will be
shown along with a clear text.
In the DM2 list, if you wish to acknowledge, the entire alarm log list will be cleared. For safety reasons, this
requires the master password (please see the password description in this document for details of passwords).
If the controller has no translation text of an SPN diagnostic number, Text N/A. will be
shown. For information about particular SPN numbers, please consult the engine manufacturers documentation or SAE J1939-71 for a general description.
Scania KWP 2000:
The Scania KWP 2000 log shows active and passive alarms in a mix. Use the
scroll through the list.

and

buttons to

If you acknowledge, the entire alarm log list will be cleared. For safety reasons, this requires the master password (please see the password description in this document for details of passwords).
Caterpillar/Perkins
Press the LOG button for 2 seconds. That will bring the alarm log on the display. Caterpillar and Perkins have
a primary and a secondary DM1 log as well as one DM2 log.
The primary DM1 log shows alarms from the ADEM III/IV engine controllers. The secondary DM1 log shows
alarms from the EMCP 3.x genset controller. Similar to the J1939 protocol, the DM2 log shows the historical
alarms. Use the

and

buttons to scroll through the list.

CLRALL: By pressing ENTER, the entire alarm log list will be cleared. For safety reasons, this requires the
master password (please see the Designers Reference Handbook for details of passwords).

DEIF A/S

Page 113 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

7.1.7 Control commands sent to the engine


Engine types with the possibility to send commands to the ECM via the CANbus communication line:
Engine
type/
Command

Detroi
t
Die
sel
DD
EC

Jo
hn
De
ere
JD
EC

Caterpillar

Per
kin
s

Cu
mmi
ns

Generic
J19
39

De
utz
EM
R

Ive
co

Ive
co,
Ve
cto
r8

MT
U
MD
EC

MT
U
AD
EC

MT
U
J19
39
sm
art
c

Sc
ani
a
EM
S

Sc
ani
a
EM
S
S6

Vol
vo
Pe
nta

Vol
vo
Pe
nta
EM
S2

Preheat

Start/
stop

Run/
Stop
(Fuel)

Engine
speed

Nominal frequency

Governor
gain

Idle
speed

Droop

Shutdown
override

Engine
overspeed
test

Enable
Cylinder
Cutout

Intermittent
oil priming

DEIF A/S

Page 114 of 324

Engine communication

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine
type/
Command

Detroi
t
Die
sel
DD
EC

Jo
hn
De
ere
JD
EC

Caterpillar

Per
kin
s

Cu
mmi
ns

Generic
J19
39

De
utz
EM
R

Ive
co

Ive
co,
Ve
cto
r8

MT
U
MD
EC

MT
U
AD
EC

MT
U
J19
39
sm
art
c

Sc
ani
a
EM
S

Sc
ani
a
EM
S
S6

Vol
vo
Pe
nta

Vol
vo
Pe
nta
EM
S2

Engine
operating
mode

Demand
Switch

Trip
counter
reset

Engine
speed
gov
param
command

For engine types not mentioned, CANbus control is not supported. In these cases, start/stop
etc. must be sent to the controller using hardwired connections.
The menu number 7563 must be used to enable or disable the transmission of all the Multi-line
2 unit EIC control frames listed in the above table.

7.1.8 EIC 50 Hz to 60 Hz switch


If the setpoint fNOMINAL is changed on the AGC between 50 and 60 Hz, then the change is made with a
frequency ramp of 2 Hz per seconds. This frequency ramp is used when switching between nominal settings
1-4 or if the parameter of the nominal frequency is changed between 50 and 60 Hz.

7.1.9 EIC droop


There are two ways of obtaining a speed droop:
For engines where the droop command or setpoint can be sent to the engine controller, the DROOP setting in
parameter 2771 is the actual droop that is being used, and this setpoint is sent to the ECU. This method is
referred to as EIC droop.
For engines where the droop command or setpoint cannot be sent to the engine controller, the DROOP setting in parameter 2771 is used for droop emulation in the AGC 200. This method is known as EIC droop
emulation. EIC droop emulation is a generic function developed by DEIF which is possibly to use on every
engine type.

DEIF A/S

Page 115 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

In both cases, the DROOP function is activated in the M-Logic (EIC droop/EIC droop emulation) command
output.
In the table below it is shown which engine types support EIC droop with a command or set point
Engine type/protocols

Command

Set point

Scania

Cummins

Iveco

Perkins

Caterpillar

Volvo

MTU
DDEC (Detroit Diesel)
JDEC (John Deere)
EMR (Deutz)
Generic J1939

7.1.10 EIC inhibit


The EIC alarms can be inhibited through M-Logic. This would typically be necessary during stopping of the
engine. The following alarms are inhibited by this command:
EIC red alarm
EIC yellow alarm
EIC malfunction
EIC protection

7.1.11 EIC idle


The Idle function of the AGC is activated in the menu 6290. If this is used with engines with speed control
from CAN bus communication, the speed is defined to be 600 rpm.

7.1.12 Specific engine type descriptions


The J1939 warnings/shutdowns with corresponding SPN and FMI numbers in this chapter refer
to those that will automatically appear in the alarm list. The alarms can be acknowledged from
the display.
The available alarms vary from engine type to engine type. Besides these, the entire log list can
be read in the engine controller by pressing the LOG button for three seconds.

DEIF A/S

Page 116 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

7.1.13 Caterpillar/Perkins (J1939)


Warning/shutdown list

J1939 codes
SPN

FMIwarning

FMIshutdown

Low oil pressure

100

17

Intake manifold #1 P

102

15

Coolant temperature

110

15

High inlet air temp.

172

15

Fuel temperature

174

15

Overspeed

190

15

EIC yellow lamp

EIC red lamp

EIC malfunction

EIC protection

FMI indication means that the alarm in question is not supported.

Write commands to engine controller


Engine controls- All the write commands to the engine controller (e.g. speed, start/stop, etc.) are enabled
in setting 7563 (EIC controls).
Engine speed - CANbus ID for speed control: 0x0c000000. J1939 TSC1.
M-Logic commands are available to enable/disable start/stop and speed controls
EIC start/stop enable
EIC speed control inhibit
The speed regulation is enabled in setting 2781 (Reg. output) and 7563 (EIC controls).
Write commands to AVR
AVR controlsAll the write commands to the AVR (voltage control) are enabled in setting 7563 (EIC controls).
If engine controls are needed but not the AVR control, the latter can be disabled through menu 7565

DEIF A/S

Page 117 of 324

Engine communication

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

7.1.14 Cummins CM850-CM570 (J1939)


Warning/shutdown list

J1939 codes
SPN

FMIwarning

FMIshutdown

Low oil pressure

100

18

Coolant temperature

110

16

Oil temperature

175

16

Intake manifold temp.

105

16

Fuel temperature

174

16

Coolant level low

111

18

Overspeed

190

16

Crankcase pressure high

101

Coolant pressure low

109

EIC yellow lamp

EIC red lamp

EIC malfunction

EIC protection

FMI indication means that the alarm in question is not supported.

Write commands to engine controller


Engine controls - All the write commands to the engine controller (e.g. speed, start/stop, etc.) are enabled
in setting 7563 (EIC controls). M-Logic commands are available to enable/disable speed controls:
EIC speed control inhibit
Engine speed- CANbus ID for speed control: 0x00FF69DC. For Cummins proprietary Engine governing
EG telegram, the source address of the ML-2 controller is 0xDC/220 dec)
Engine speed (engine with PCC controller) - CANbus ID for speed control: 0x00FF5FDC. For Cummins
proprietary Engine governing EG telegram, the source address of the ML-2 controller is 0xDC/220
dec).This speed telegram is used by enabling the M-Logic function: EIC Select Cummins PCC1301
The speed regulation is enabled in setting 2781 (Reg. output) and 7563 (EIC controls).

Frequency selection - Nominal frequency is written automatically, based on the frequency nominal setting. 50 Hz is written if fNOM &lt;55 Hz, 60 Hz is written if fNOM is &gt;55 Hz.
Gain setting - Gain is set in menu 2773
Shut down overrideThis command can be used in order to prevent shut down actions from the ECU. The
function follows the standard AGC function shutdown override (digital input on the AGC)
Cummins aftertreatment
If Cummins aftertreatment equipment is installed in the exhaust line and the system is connected to the ECU,
indicators from the treatment system can be read over the J1939 link and some regeneration can be controlled.

DEIF A/S

Page 118 of 324

Engine communication

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

The table shows lamps and status indicators from the aftertreatment. The states can be reached through MLogic and can be shown on DEIF AOP display units.
State- Status, indicator

Diesel particulate filter regeneration


status

Diesel particulate filter status

Particulate
filter lamp

High exhaust system temp

Regeneration disabled

OFF

ON solid

ON fast blink

Inhibited

Not inhibited

Not active

Active

Regenerationneeded

Regenerationnot needed

Regenerationlowest level

Regenerationmoderate level

Regenerationhighest level

Besides the lamps and status indicators, two aftertreatment switches for control of the regeneration are available. These can be reached through M-Logic in the command group.
1. Cummins particulate filter manual (non-mission) regeneration initiate.
2. Cummins particulate filter regeneration.

7.1.15 Detroit Diesel DDEC (J1939)


Warning/shutdown list

J1939 codes
SPN

FMIwarning

FMIshutdown

EIC yellow lamp

EIC red lamp

EIC malfunction

EIC protection

FMI indication means that the alarm in question is not supported.


Write commands to engine controller
Engine controls - All the write commands to the engine controller (e.g. speed, start/stop, etc.) are enabled
in setting 7563 (EIC controls).
Engine speed - CANbus ID for speed control: 0x0c000000. J1939 TSC1.
M-Logic commands are available to enable/disable speed controls:
EIC speed control inhibit

DEIF A/S

Page 119 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

The speed regulation is enabled in settings 2781 (Reg. output) and 7563 (EIC controls).

7.1.16 Deutz EMR 2-EMR 3 (J1939)


Warnings and shutdowns

J1939 codes
SPN

FMIwarning

FMIshutdown

Low oil pressure

100

Coolant temperature

110

Overspeed

190

EIC yellow lamp

EIC red lamp

EIC malfunction

EIC protection

FMI indication means that the alarm in question is not supported.


Write commands to engine controller
Engine controls - All the write commands to the engine controller (e.g. speed, start/stop, etc.) are enabled
in setting 7563 (EIC controls).
Engine speed- CANbus ID for speed control: 0xc000003. For J1939 TSC1, the source address of the
ML-2 controller is 3.
M-Logic commands are available to enable/disable speed controls:
EIC speed control inhibit
The speed regulation is enabled in setting 2781 (Reg. output) and 7563 (EIC controls).

7.1.17 Generic J1939 (J1939)


Warnings and shutdowns

J1939 codes
SPN

FMIwarning

FMIshutdown

EIC yellow lamp

EIC red lamp

EIC malfunction

EIC protection

FMI indication means that the alarm in question is not supported.

DEIF A/S

Page 120 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

Write commands to engine controller


Engine controls- All the write commands to the engine controller (e.g. speed, start/stop, etc.) are enabled
in setting 7563 (EIC controls).
Engine speed - CANbus ID for speed control: 0x0c000000. J1939 TSC1.
M-Logic commands are available to enable/disable speed controls:
EIC speed control inhibit
The speed regulation is enabled in setting 2781 (Reg. output) and 7563 (EIC controls).

7.1.18 Iveco (J1939)


Warning/shutdown list

J1939 codes
SPN

FMIwarning

FMIshutdown

Low oil pressure

100

17

Intake manifold #1 P

102

15

Coolant temperature

110

15

High inlet air temp.

172

15

Fuel temperature

174

15

Overspeed

190

15

EIC yellow lamp

EIC red lamp

EIC malfunction

EIC protection

FMI indication "" means that the alarm in question is not supported.
Write commands to engine controller
Engine controls - All the write commands to the engine controller (e.g. speed, start/stop, etc.) are enabled
in setting 7563 (EIC controls).
Engine speed - CANbus ID for speed control: 0xc000003. For J1939 TSC1, the source address of the
ML-2 controller is 3. For the Iveco Vector 8 type only: CANbus ID for speed control: 0xcFF0027.
M-Logic commands are available to enable/disable start/stop and speed controls:
EIC start/stop enable
EIC speed control Inhibit
The speed regulation is enabled in setting 2781 (Reg. output) and 7563 (EIC controls).

DEIF A/S

Page 121 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

7.1.19 John Deere JDEC (J1939)


Warning/shutdown list

J1939 codes
SPN

FMIwarning

FMIshutdown

Low oil pressure

100

18

Intake manifold

105

16

Coolant temperature

110

16

Fuel injection pump

1076

10

Fuel temperature

174

16

ECU failure

2000

EIC yellow lamp

EIC red lamp

EIC malfunction

EIC protection

FMI indication "" means that the alarm in question is not supported.
Write commands to engine controller
Engine controls - All the write commands to the engine controller (e.g. speed, start/stop, etc.) are enabled
in setting 7563 (EIC controls).
Engine speed - CANbus ID for speed control: 0x0c000000. J1939 TSC1.
M-Logic commands are available to enable/disable speed controls:
EIC speed control inhibit
The speed regulation is enabled in setting 2781 (Reg. output) and 7563 (EIC controls).

7.1.20 MTU J1939 Smart Connect


This protocol is available with MTU series 1600 with ECU8/Smart Connect.
Warning/shutdown list

J1939 codes
SPN

FMIwarning

FMIshutdown

EIC yellow lamp

EIC red lamp

EIC malfunction

EIC protection

DEIF A/S

Page 122 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

FMI indication "" means that the alarm in question is not supported.
Write commands to engine controller
Engine controls - All the write commands to the engine controller (e.g. speed, start/stop, etc.) are enabled
in setting 7563 (EIC controls).
Engine speed - CANbus ID for speed control: 0x0c000000. J1939 TSC1.
M-Logic commands are available to enable/disable start/stop and speed controls:
EIC start/stop enable
EIC speed control inhibit
The speed regulation is enabled in setting 2781 (Reg. output) and 7563 (EIC controls).

Frequency selection - Nominal frequency is automatically written, based on the frequency nominal setting. 50 Hz is written if fNOM <55 Hz, 60 Hz is written if fNOM is >55 Hz.
Shut down override - This command can be used with a digital input in order to override shut down actions from the ECU.
Engine overspeed - testThe command is activated through M-Logic. Testing of the overspeed function at
any given rpm.
Enable cylinder cutout - Can be used to engage all cylinders if the engine is running with one bank only.
The command is activated through M-Logic.
Intermittent oil priming - Engage the pre-lubricating oil pump if installed. The command is activated
through M-Logic.
Engine operating mode - Switches the operating mode of the engine. This is activated through M-Logic
(EIC Engine or mode command).
Demand switch - Set method of speed control between digital (Up/Down ECU with relay controls), analogue (Analog ECU Relative for analogue VDC control) or from J1939 commands (Analog CAN). This
is selected in the menu 2790. Please refer to the MTU documentation for the ECU8 for further information
about switching between normal and emergency operation in local or remote
Speed gov param command - Parameter switch for selection between: Default and Variant 1 M-Logic is
used to select Variant 1 parameters.
Trip counter reset - This command resets the trip fuel consumption counter. The command is activated
through M-Logic.

7.1.21 MTU ADEC (CANopen)


The MTU ADEC is not a part of the J1939, therefore the reading of values, alarms and shutdowns is different.

DEIF A/S

Page 123 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

Display readings
Object
EIC speed
EIC coolant temp.
EIC oil pressure
EIC faults
EIC oil temp.
EIC fuel temp.
EIC coolant level
EIC charge air pressure
EIC charge air temp.(or EIC intake manifold 1 temp.)
EIC air inlet press.
EIC running hours
EIC ECU power supp.
EIC oil level
EIC after cooler water inlet temp.
EIC atmospheric press.
EIC ambient air temp.
EIC exch. temp. A
EIC exch. temp. B
EIC temp. winding 1
EIC temp. winding 2
EIC temp. winding 3
EIC turbo 1 outlet temp.
EIC engine intercooler temp.
EIC fuel rate
EIC engine trip fuel
EIC trip average fuel rate
The Modbus addresses are read only (function code 04h) and are only available if option H2
Modbus RTU is implemented.

DEIF A/S

Page 124 of 324

Engine communication

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Warning:
Below is a list of warnings that can be shown on the display. The warnings will be shown as an alarm in the
alarm window. The alarms can be acknowledged from the display, but they will be visible until the alarm disappears in the ECM module.
Warning list
Coolant temp. high

ECU power supply high

Charge air temp. high

ECU power supply low

Intercooler coolant temp. high

Generator temp. high

Lube oil temp. high

Holding tank high level

ECU temp. high

Holding tank low level

Engine speed too low

Generator winding 1 high temp.

Prelube fail.

Generator winding 2 high temp.

Start speed not reached

Generator winding 3 high temp.

Common alarm (yellow)

Ambient temp. high

Lube oil pressure low

Water in fuel 1

Coolant level low

Water in fuel 2

Intercooler coolant level low

Fuel temp. high

ECU defect

Exhaust bank A high temp.

Speed demand failure

Exhaust bank B high temp.

Power supply low voltage

Fuel high pressure 1

Power supply high voltage

Fuel high pressure 2

Overspeed

Day tank high level

Lube oil press. low

Day tank low level

Coolant temp. high

Run-up speed not reached

Lube oil temp. high

Idle speed not reached

Charge air temp. high


Shutdown:
Below is a shutdown value that can be shown on the display. It is possible to configure EIC shutdown in the
system setup to put the unit in a shutdown state and/or to activate relay outputs if necessary. The shutdown
state is present, until it disappears in the ECM module.
Shutdown list
AL com. alarm red
Write commands to engine controller
Engine controls - All the write commands to the engine controller (e.g. speed, start/stop, etc.) are enabled
in setting 7563 (EIC controls).
Engine speed - CANbus ID for speed control: 0x300+ADEC ID speed demand telegram (ADEC ID is
selected in menu 7562, default ID is 6- 0x306).
M-Logic commands are available to enable/disable start/stop and speed controls:
EIC start/stop enable

DEIF A/S

Page 125 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

The speed regulation is enabled in setting 2781 (Reg. output) and 7563 (EIC controls).

Start/stop command
Frequency selection - Nominal frequency is written automatically based on the frequency nominal setting.
50 Hz is written if fNOM <55 Hz, 60 Hz is written if fNOM is >55 Hz.
The CANopen node ID no. is selected in setting 7562. The default value (6) usually matches the
ADEC setting.

Demand switch - Set method of speed control between digital (Up/Down ECU with relay controls), analogue (Analog ECU Relative for analogue VDC control) or from J1939 commands (Analog CAN). This
is selected in the menu 2790. Please refer to the MTU documentation for the ECU8 for further information
about switching between normal and emergency operation in local or remote.
Trip counter reset - This command resets the trip fuel consumption counter. The command is activated
through M-Logic.
Enable Cylinder Cutout - Can be used to engage all cylinders if the engine is running with one bank only.
The command is activated through M-Logic.

7.1.22 MTU ADEC module 501, without SAM module (option H13)
The MTU ADEC module 501 is not a part of the J1939, therefore the readings of values, alarms
and shutdowns are different.

DEIF A/S

Page 126 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

Displayed values
Display readings
Act-Droop
Battery
Camshaft
ECU Stop activated 1
F speed an
INJECT-QUAN
MDEC Faults
Mean T. fuel
Nom power
Operation
P L Oil Lo
P L Oil Lolo
P. Ch. Air
P. Fuel
P. Oil
Speed
Speed D SW
T. Ch. Air
T. Coolant
T. Fuel
T. Oil
TCOOL-HIHI
T-ECU
T-INTERC
T-LUBE-HI
T-LUBE-HIHI
Total fuel
Trip fuel
The Modbus addresses are read-only (function code 04h) and are only available if the option
H2/N Modbus RTU is implemented.

DEIF A/S

Page 127 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

Alarms
Below is a list of alarms that can be shown on the display. The alarms will be shown in the alarm window. The
alarms can be acknowledged from the display, but they will be visible until the alarm disappears in the ECM
module.
Alarm list

Display text

Warning

Shutdown

ADEC yellow alarm

EIC yellow lamp WA

ADEC red alarm

EIC red lamp SD.

High high engine speed

Overspeed shutdown

Low low lube oil pressure

L Oil Pres. Shutdown

High high coolant temperature

H Coolant T Shutdown

High intercooler temperature

H Interc. T Warning

Sensor Defect Coolant Level

SD Coolant Level

Low low coolant level

L Cool. Lev. Shutdown

ADEC ECU failure

MDEC ECU Failure

Low Lube oil pressure

L Oil Pres. Warning

Low Common rail fuel pressure

LO P-Fuel Com-Rail

High Common rail fuel pressure

HI P-Fuel Com-Rail

Low preheat temperature

AL Preheat Temp. Low

Low low Charge air coolant level

SS Cool Level Ch-Air

Power amplifier 1 failure

AL Power Amplifier 1

Power amplifier 2 failure

AL Power Amplifier 2

Transistor output status

AL Status Trans-Outp

Low ECU power supply voltage

LO ECU Power Supply

High ECU power supply voltage

HI ECU Power

High charge air temperature

HI T-Charge Air

High Lube oil temperature

HI T-Lube Oil

High ECU temperature

HI T-ECU

Low engine speed

SS Eng. Speed Low

Check error code

AL Check Error Code

Common rail leakage

AL Com. Rail Leakage

Automatic engine stop

AL Aut. Engine Stop

MG Start speed not reached

MG Start Speed Fail

MG runup speed not reached

MG Runup Speed Fail

MG idle speed reached

MG Idle Speed Fail

Low low ECU power supply voltage

LOLO ECU Pow. Supply

High high ECU power supply voltage

HIHI ECU Pow. Supply

Sensor Defect coolant level charge air

SD Cool Level Ch-Air

High fuel temperature

HI T-Fuel

Override feedback from ECU

SS Override

DEIF A/S

Page 128 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Alarm list

Engine communication

Display text

Warning

Shutdown

High high lube oil temperature

H Oil Temp. Shutdown

Speed demand defected

AL Speed demand Def.

High coolant temperature

H Coolant T Warning

High high temperature charge air

H Ch. Air T Shutdown

Low fuel oil pressure

LO P-Fuel Oil

Low low fuel oil pressure

SS P-Fuel Oil

MDEC indication " " means that the alarm in question is not supported.
Write commands to engine controller
Engine controls
All the write commands to the engine controller (for example: speed, start/stop, etc.) are enabled in setting 7563 (EIC Controls).
Engine speed
M-Logic commands are available to enable/disable start/stop and speed controls:
EIC start/stop enable
EIC speed control inhibit
Manual speed control (up/down)
The speed regulation is enabled in setting 2781 (Reg. output) and 7563 (EIC Controls).

Start/stop command
Frequency selection
Nominal frequency is written automatically, based on the frequency nominal setting. 50 Hz is written if
fNOM < 55 Hz, 60 Hz is written if fNOM is > 55 Hz.
Shutdown override
This command can be used with a digital input in order to override shutdown actions from the ECU.
Trip counter reset*
This command resets the trip fuel consumption counter. The command is activated through M-Logic.
Enable Cylinder Cutout*
The command can be used to engage all cylinders if the engine is running with one bank only. The command is activated through M-Logic.
Engine overspeed test
The command is activated through M-Logic. Testing of the overspeed function at any given RPM.
EIC alarms acknowledgement
Intermittent oil priming
Engage the pre-lubrication oil pump if installed. The command is activated through M-Logic.
Priming on engine start

7.1.23 MTU MDEC module 302/303 (MTU)


The MTU MDEC is not a part of the J1939, therefore the reading of values, alarms and shutdowns is different.

DEIF A/S

Page 129 of 324

Engine communication

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Displayed values
Object
EIC speed
EIC coolant temp.
EIC oil pressure
EIC faults
EIC oil temp.
EIC fuel temp.
EIC charge air pressure
EIC charge air temp.(or EIC intake manifold 1 temp.)
The Modbus addresses are read only (function code 04h), and are only available if the option
H2 Modbus RTU is implemented.
Alarms
Below is a list of alarms that can be shown on the display. The alarms will be shown in the alarm window. The
alarms can be acknowledged from the display, but they will be visible until the alarm disappears in the ECM
module.
Alarm list

Warning

Shutdown

MDEC yellow alarm

MDEC red alarm

Overspeed

Low oil pressure

High coolant temp.

High oil temp.

High intercooler temp.

Defective cool. level switch

Low coolant level

MDEC ECU failure

MDEC indication " " means that the alarm in question is not supported.
Write commands to engine controller: None.

7.1.24 Scania EMS (J1939)


Warning/shutdowns: None.
Write commands to engine controller: None.

DEIF A/S

Page 130 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

7.1.25 Scania EMS 2 S6 (J1939)


Scania EMS 2 S6 does not use the J1939 SPN/FMI (Suspect Parameter Number/Failure Mode
Indicator) system for alarm handling. Instead, the DNL2 system is used. For this reason, the
alarm handling is also different.
Warnings and shutdowns (DNL2 alarms): Below is a list of warnings and shutdowns that can be shown on
the display. They will be shown as an alarm in the alarm window. The alarms can be acknowledged from the
display, but they will be visible until the alarm disappears in the ECM module.
Warning/shutdown list

DNL2 warning

DNL2 shutdown

EMS warning

Low oil pressure

High coolant temp.

Stop limit exceeded

Charge 61

EIC yellow lamp

EIC red lamp

EIC malfunction

EIC protection

DNL2 indication means that the alarm in question is not supported.

Handling of alarms is only active when the engine is running.


Error log: It is possible to retrieve and acknowledge alarms in the error log of the Scania EMS S6 (KWP
2000).
The alarms available are the same alarms which can be read by the flash combination of the diagnostics
lamp on the EMS S6 (please refer to the engine documentation).
For option H5, the EMS S6 software version and engine number are automatically retrieved
when CANbus communication is established.

DEIF A/S

Page 131 of 324

Engine communication

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Flash code

ML-2 displayed text

Description

Overreving

One or both engine speed sensors have indicated above 3000 RPM

12

Speed sensor 1

Engine sensor 1

13

Speed sensor 2

Engine sensor 2

14

Water T sen.

Engine coolant temperature sensor

15

Char. air T sen.

Charge air temperature sensor

16

Char. air P sen.

Charge air pressure sensor

17

Oil temp. sen.

Oil temperature sensor

18

Oil pres. sen.

Oil pressure sensor

23

Fault in cor.

Fault in coordinator

25

Throttle pedal

CAN message for fine tune nominal speed out of range

27

Emerg. stop o.r.

Engine stop overridden

31

Oil pres. prot.

Oil pressure protection activated

32

Wrong parameter

Wrong parameter setting for defect CAN communication

33

Battery voltage

Battery voltage out of range

37

Emerg. stop cor.

Emergency stop switch activated

43

CAN cir. defect

CAN circuit defect

48

CAN mess. DLN1

CAN message from the coordinator missing or not correct

49

Wrong CAN ver.

Non-matching CAN version in EMS and coordinator

51

Un. inj. cyl. 1

Unit injector cylinder 1

52

Un. inj. cyl. 2

Unit injector cylinder 2

53

Un. inj. cyl. 3

Unit injector cylinder 3

54

Un. inj. cyl. 4

Unit injector cylinder 4

55

Un. inj. cyl. 5

Unit injector cylinder 5

56

Un. inj. cyl. 6

Unit injector cylinder 6

57

Un. inj. cyl. 7

Unit injector cylinder 7

58

Un. inj. cyl. 8

Unit injector cylinder 8

59

Extra ana. inp.

Voltage out of range on extra analogue input pin

61

System shutdown

System shut down incorrectly

66

Coola. l. prot.

Low engine coolant level

86

HW watchdog

Hardware watchdog

87

Fault in RAM

The EMS has detected that the fault code memory is not functioning
correctly

89

Seal

The programme in the EMS has been altered in a prohibited manner

94

Coola. shut-off

Engine coolant temperature/oil pressure shutdown

96

Overheat prot.

Overheat protection activated

99

Fault in TPU

Error in TPU (Timer Processor Unit)

Write commands to engine controller

DEIF A/S

Page 132 of 324

Engine communication

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine controls - All the write commands to the engine controller (e.g. speed, start/stop, etc.) are enabled
in setting 7563 (EIC controls).
Droop
Engine speed
CANbus ID: Offset: 0xcfff727
Speed: 0x0cff802
M-Logic commands are available to enable/disable start/stop and speed controls:
EIC start/stop enable
EIC speed control inhibit
Frequency selection - Nominal speed/frequency is selected in 2772. If User is selected, nominal speed/
frequency is written automatically, based on the frequency nominal setting.
Start/stop command
The speed regulation is enabled in setting 2781 (Reg. output) and 7563 (EIC controls).
It is only possible to write commands to the engine when the Scania Coordinator is NOT mounted.

Control:
In the parameter 2770 it is possible to configure the droop setting and the initial speed setting.

7.1.26 Volvo Penta EMS (J1939)


Warning/shutdown list

J1939 codes
SPN

FMI warning

FMI shutdown

Low oil pressure

100

Intake manifold #1 P

102

Coolant temperature

110

High inlet air temp.

172

Fuel temperature

174

Fuel pressure

94

--Oil level

98

Overspeed

190

Coolant level low

111

EIC yellow lamp

EIC red lamp

EIC malfunction

EIC protection

Write commands to engine controller: None.

DEIF A/S

Page 133 of 324

Engine communication

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

7.1.27 Volvo Penta EMS 2 (J1939)


EMS 2 and EDCIII/D6, D7, D9, D12 and D16 (GE and AUX variants only).
Warning/shutdown list

J1939 codes
SPN

FMI warning

FMI shutdown

Low oil pressure

100

Intake manifold #1 P

102

Coolant temperature

110

High inlet air temp.

172

Fuel temperature

174

Fuel pressure

94

--Oil level

98

Overspeed

190

Coolant level low

111

EIC yellow lamp

EIC red lamp

EIC malfunction

EIC protection

FMI indication "" means that the alarm in question is not supported.
Write commands to engine controller
Engine controls - All the write commands to the engine controller (e.g. speed, start/stop, etc.) are enabled
in setting 7563 (EIC controls).
Engine speed - CANbus ID for speed control: 0x0cff4611 Volvo Penta proprietary telegram
M-Logic commands are available to enable/disable start/stop and speed controls:
EIC start/stop enable
EIC speed control inhibit
Preheat
Start/stop
Readable states:
Preheat and running
The speed regulation is enabled in setting 2781 (Reg. output) and 7563 (EIC controls).

Primary or secondary speed is selected in setting 2774.

7.1.28 Parameters
Parameters related to engine communication can be found in settings 2770 and 7500-7660. Please refer to
the separate parameter list for details.

DEIF A/S

Page 134 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

7.1.29 Modbus communication


This chapter is to be considered as additional information for option H2 (Modbus RS485 RTU). Please refer
to the ECM (Engine Communication Module) user manuals for more information about the ECM protocol
technical description and the details of each communication value.
If option H2 is installed, the data can be transmitted to a PLC, a computer, the alarm and monitoring system
or a Scada system.
Please refer to the option H2 technical documentation for more information about our standard
external Modbus communication.
A certain amount of engine data can be transmitted from the engine communication module to the controller
unit. They can be transmitted through Modbus option H2.
The available values depend on the selected type of engine communication.
The data readable by the Modbus communication are converted into the chosen unit in menu 10970.

7.1.30 Reading of analogue values


The reading of values is independent of engine type, so all readings below are available in the Modbus protocol.
The availability of data from the individual engine types is dependent on the specific engine. Please refer to
the manual of the engine in question.
This data refers to the common J1939 display reading list as well as the overview of readings in the MTU
ADEC (CANopen) and MTU MDEC (MTU protocol).

DEIF A/S

Page 135 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

Measurement table (read only) function code 04h


Addr.

Content

Unit

Scaling

Description

J1939

ADEC

MDEC

593

EIC speed

[RPM]

1/1

1/1

Speed

594

EIC coolant temp.

[deg] [F]

1/10

1/10

Coolant temperature

595

EIC oil pressure

[bar] [psi]

1/100

1/100

Engine oil pressure

596

EIC no. of faults

[Faults]

1/1

1/1

Number of faults

597

EIC oil temp.

[deg] [F]

1/10

1/10

Engine oil temperature

598

EIC fuel temp.

[deg] [F]

1/1

1/10

Fuel temperature

599

EIC intake manifold #1 P

[bar] [psi]

1/100

Intake manifold #1 P

600

EIC air inlet temp.

[deg] [F]

1/1

Air inlet temperature

601

EIC coolant level

[%]

1/10

Coolant level

602

EIC fuel rate

[L/h]

1/10

Fuel rate

603

EIC charge air press.

[bar] [psi]

1/100

Charge air press.

604

EIC intake manifold 1 T (or


EIC charge air T)

[deg] [F]

1/1

1/10

Intake manifold 1 temperature

605

EIC d.d. % torque

[%]

1/1

Drivers demand engine percent torque

606

EIC actual % torque

[%]

1/1

Actual engine - percent


torque

607

EIC acc. pedal pos.

[%]

1/1

Accelerator pedal position

608

EIC % load, c. speed

[%]

1/1

Percent load at current


speed

609

EIC air inlet pressure

[bar] [psi]

1/100

Air inlet pressure

610

EIC exhaust gas temp

[deg] [F]

1/10

Exhaust gas temperature

611

EIC engine hours

[H]

1/1

1/1

1/1

Engine hours

612

EIC oil filter diff. press

[bar] [psi]

1/100

Oil filter diff. press.

613

EIC battery voltage

[V]

1/10

Key switch battery potential

614

EIC fuel del. press.

[bar] [psi]

1/100

Fuel delivery pressure

615

EIC oil level

[%]

1/10

Engine oil level

616

EIC crankcase press.

[bar] [psi]

1/100

Crankcase pressure

617

EIC coolant pressure

[bar] [psi]

1/100

Coolant pressure

618

EIC water in fuel

[2 bits]

1/1

Water in fuel (1 = Yes, 0 =


No)

619

Reserved

--

620

Reserved

--

621

Reserved

--

622

Reserved

--

623

EIC turbo oil temp.

[deg] [F]

1/10

Turbo oil temp.

DEIF A/S

Page 136 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

Measurement table (read only) function code 04h


624

EIC trap inlet

[bar] [psi]

1/100

Trap inlet

625

EIC air filter diff. press.

[bar] [psi]

1/1000

Air filter diff. press

626

EIC cool filter diff. press.

[bar] [psi]

1/100

Cool filter diff. press.

627

EIC atm press.

[bar] [psi]

1/100

Atmospheric pressure

628

EIC ambient air temp.

deg] [F]

1/10

Ambient air temp. [F/10]

629

EIC exch. temp. A

deg] [F]

1/10

Exch. temp. bank A

630

EIC exch. temp. B

deg] [F]

1/10

Exch. temp. bank B

631

EIC winding 1 temp.

deg] [F]

1/1

Gen. winding 1 temp.

632

EIC winding 2 temp.

deg] [F]

1/1

Gen. winding 2 temp.

633

EIC winding 3 temp.

deg] [F]

1/1

Gen. winding 3 temp.

634

Reserved

635

Reserved

636

EIC turbo 1 compr. outlet


press

[bar] [psi]

1/10

Turbo 1 compr. outlet


press.

637

EIC intercooler temp

[deg] [F]

1/10

Intercooler temp.

638

EIC engine trip fuel

[L]

1/1

1/1

Engine trip fuel

639

EIC engine total fuel used

[kL]

1/10

Engine total fuel used

640

EIC trip fuel_gaseous

[kg]

1/1

1/1

Trip fuel, gaseous

641

EIC total fuel used gaseous

[ton]

1/10

Total fuel used, gaseous

900

EIC trip average fuel rate

[L/h]

1/10

901

EIC Nominal power

kWm

1/1

1/1

Nominal power of the engine

902

EIC trip fuel liquid

[L]

1/2

1/10

High word

903

EIC trip fuel liquid

[L]

1/2

1/10

Lo word

904

EIC trip fuel liquid

[L]

1/2

1/10

High word

905

EIC trip fuel liquid

[L]

1/2

1/10

Lo word

906

EIC mean trip fuel consumption

[L/h]

1/1000

High word

907

EIC mean trip fuel consumption

[L/h]

1/1000

Lo word

908

EIC Engine Power

kWm

1/1

Nominal power of the engine (ADEC)

909

EIC Engine hours

[H]

1/2

1/1

1/1

Engine hours high word

910

EIC Engine hours

[H]

1/2

1/1

1/1

Engine hours low word

911

EIC Intake Manifold #1 Absolute Pressure

Bar or psi

1/100*

*Only MTU J1939 Smart


Connect!

912

EIC Air filter diff. pressure

Bar or psi

1/100

913

EIC Fuel supply pump inlet


pressure

Bar or psi

1/100

DEIF A/S

Page 137 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

Measurement table (read only) function code 04h


914

EIC Fuel filter (suction


side)diff. pressure

Bar or psi

1/100

915

EIC Fuel filter diff. pressure

Bar or psi

1/100

Diff pressure

932

EIC Speed Demand source

Digit

Identifies speed demand


source

933

EIC lube oil pressure LO limit

Bar

1/100

Lubrication oil pressure


limit 1

934

EIC lube oil pressure LOLOlimit

Bar

1/100

Lubrication oil pressure


limit 2

935

EIC fuel pressure

Bar

1/100

Fuel pressure

936

EIC coolant limit HI

[deg] [F]

1/10

Coolant high limit temp. 1

937

EIC coolant limit HIHI

[deg] [F]

1/10

Coolant high limit temp. 2

938

EIC intercooler coolant

[deg] [F]

1/10

Intercooler coolant temperature

939

EIC ECU temperature

[deg] [F]

1/10

ECU temperature

940

EIC actual droop

1/10

Actual droop percentage

941

EIC act. inject. Quantity

1/10

Injection quantity Act. DBR


%

7.1.31 Reading of diagnostic codes


To interpret an SPN and/or FMI number, refer to the documentation of the engine manufacturer.
SPN means Suspect Parameter Number. E.g. if the coolant water temperature becomes too high, the SPN
code 110 will be shown.
FMI means Failure Mode Indicator. E.g. if the temperature in the above example is at shutdown level, the
FMI code 0 will be shown.
OC means Occurrence counter and it indicates how many times a specific alarm has occurred. E.g. if the
specific alarm in the above example (SPN 100, FMI 0) has occurred 2 times, the OC code 2 will be shown.

In the table below, a specific SPN number is linked to the same FMI- and OC number.

DEIF A/S

Page 138 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

Active Diagnostic Code (DM1/SPN)


Addr.

Content

Description

1370

SPN diagnostic no. 1

Lo word

1371

SPN diagnostic no. 2

Lo word

1372

SPN diagnostic no. 3

Lo word

1373

SPN diagnostic no. 4

Lo word

1374

SPN diagnostic no. 5

Lo word

1375

SPN diagnostic no. 6

Lo word

1376

SPN diagnostic no. 7

Lo word

1377

SPN diagnostic no. 8

Lo word

1378

SPN diagnostic no. 9

Lo word

1379

SPN diagnostic no. 10

Lo word

1380

SPN diagnostic no. 1

High word

1381

SPN diagnostic no. 2

High word

1382

SPN diagnostic no. 3

High word

1383

SPN diagnostic no. 4

High word

1384

SPN diagnostic no. 5

High word

1385

SPN diagnostic no. 6

High word

1386

SPN diagnostic no. 7

High word

1387

SPN diagnostic no. 8

High word

1388

SPN diagnostic no. 9

High word

1389

SPN diagnostic no. 10

High word

1390-1401

Not used

Reserved

Active Fail mode Identifier (DM1/FMI)


Addr.

Content

Description

1402

FMI diagnostic no. 1

1403

FMI diagnostic no. 2

1404

FMI diagnostic no. 3

1405

FMI diagnostic no. 4

1406

FMI diagnostic no. 5

1407

FMI diagnostic no. 6

1408

FMI diagnostic no. 7

1409

FMI diagnostic no. 8

1410

FMI diagnostic no. 9

1411

FMI diagnostic no. 10

1412-1417

Not used

Reserved

DEIF A/S

Page 139 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

Active Occurrence Counter (DM1/OC)


Addr.

Content

Description

1418

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 1

1419

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 2

1420

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 3

1421

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 4

1422

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 5

1423

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 6

1424

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 7

1425

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 8

1426

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 9

1427

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 10

1428-1433

Not Used

Reserved
Active Diagnostic Code (DM2/SPN)

Addr.

Content

Description

1434

SPN diagnostic no. 1

Lo word

1435

SPN diagnostic no. 2

Lo word

1436

SPN diagnostic no. 3

Lo word

1437

SPN diagnostic no. 4

Lo word

1438

SPN diagnostic no. 5

Lo word

1439

SPN diagnostic no. 6

Lo word

1440

SPN diagnostic no. 7

Lo word

1441

SPN diagnostic no. 8

Lo word

1442

SPN diagnostic no. 9

Lo word

1443

SPN diagnostic no. 10

Lo word

1444

SPN diagnostic no. 1

High word

1445

SPN diagnostic no. 2

High word

1446

SPN diagnostic no. 3

High word

1447

SPN diagnostic no. 4

High word

1448

SPN diagnostic no. 5

High word

1449

SPN diagnostic no. 6

High word

1450

SPN diagnostic no. 7

High word

1451

SPN diagnostic no. 8

High word

1452

SPN diagnostic no. 9

High word

1453

SPN diagnostic no. 10

High word

1454-1465

Not Used

Reserved

DEIF A/S

Page 140 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

Active Fail Mode Identifier (DM2/FMI)


Addr.

Content

Description

1466

FMI diagnostic no. 1

1467

FMI diagnostic no. 2

1468

FMI diagnostic no. 3

1469

FMI diagnostic no. 4

1470

FMI diagnostic no. 5

1471

FMI diagnostic no. 6

1472

FMI diagnostic no. 7

1473

FMI diagnostic no. 8

1474

FMI diagnostic no. 9

1475

FMI diagnostic no. 10

1476-1481

Not Used

Reserved

Active Occurrence Counter (DM2/OC)


Addr.

Content

Description

1482

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 1

1483

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 1

1484

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 1

1485

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 1

1486

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 1

1487

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 1

1488

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 1

1489

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 1

1490

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 1

1491

Occurrence counter diagnostic no. 1

1492-1499

Not Used

Reserved

DEIF A/S

Page 141 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

7.1.32 Alarms, Caterpillar/Perkins


Alarm, status and measurement table (read only) function code 04h.
Addr.
1020

Content
EIC alarms, DEIF controller

Type
Bit 0 7570 EIC communication error
Bit 1 7580 EIC warning
Bit 2 7590 EIC shutdown
Bit 3 7600 EIC overspeed
Bit 4 7610 EIC coolant water temperature 1
Bit 5 7620 EIC coolant water temperature 2
Bit 6 7630 EIC oil pressure 1
Bit 7 7640 EIC oil pressure 2
Bit 8 7650 EIC oil temp. 1
Bit 9 7660 EIC oil temp. 2
Bit 10 7670 EIC coolant level 1
Bit 11 7680 EIC coolant level 2

1024

EIC alarms, engine controller (DM1)

Bit 1 EIC low oil pressure, warning


Bit 2 EIC low oil pressure, shutdown
Bit 3 EIC boost pressure, warning
Bit 4 EIC high coolant temperature, warning
Bit 5 EIC low coolant level, shutdown
Bit 6 EIC high inlet air temperature, warning
Bit 7 EIC fuel temperature, warning
Bit 8 EIC ECM yellow lamp, warning
Bit 9 EIC ECM red lamp, shutdown
Bit 10 EIC overspeed, warning
Bit 11 EIC overspeed, shutdown
Bit 12 EIC protection Bit 13 EIC malfunction

DEIF A/S

Page 142 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

7.1.33 Alarms, Cummins


Alarm, status and measurement table (read only) function code 04h.
Addr.
1020

Content
EIC alarms, DEIF controller

Type
Bit 0 7570 EIC communication error
Bit 1 7580 EIC warning
Bit 2 7590 EIC shutdown
Bit 3 7600 EIC overspeed
Bit 4 7610 EIC coolant water temperature 1
Bit 5 7620 EIC coolant water temperature 2
Bit 6 7630 EIC oil pressure 1
Bit 7 7640 EIC oil pressure 2
Bit 8 7650 EIC oil temp. 1
Bit 9 7660 EIC oil temp. 2
Bit 10 7670 EIC coolant level 1
Bit 11 7680 EIC coolant level 2

1023

EIC alarms, engine controller (DM1)

Bit 0 EIC yellow


Bit 1 EIC red
Bit 2 EIC protection
Bit 3 EIC malfunction

DEIF A/S

Page 143 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Addr.
1024

Content
EIC alarms, engine controller (DM1)

Engine communication

Type
Bit 0 EIC DEC communication error
Bit 1 EIC low oil pressure, warning
Bit 2 EIC low oil pressure, shutdown
Bit 3 EIC high coolant temperature, warning
Bit 4 EIC high coolant temperature, shutdown
Bit 5 EIC low coolant level, warning
Bit 6 EIC low coolant level, shutdown
Bit 7 EIC intake manifold temp, warning
Bit 8 EIC intake manifold, shutdown
Bit 9 EIC fuel temp., warning
Bit 10 EIC fuel temp., shutdown
Bit 11 EIC coolant pressure, shutdown
Bit 12 EIC oil temp., warning
Bit 13 EIC oil temp., shutdown
Bit 14 EIC overspeed, shutdown
Bit 15 EIC crankcase press., shutdown

DEIF A/S

Page 144 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

7.1.34 Alarms, DDEC Detroit engines


Alarm, status and measurement table (read only) function code 04h.
Addr.
1020

Content
EIC alarms, DEIF controller

Type
Bit 0 7570 EIC communication error
Bit 1 7580 EIC warning
Bit 2 7590 EIC shutdown
Bit 3 7600 EIC overspeed
Bit 4 7610 EIC coolant water temperature 1
Bit 5 7620 EIC coolant water temperature 2
Bit 6 7630 EIC oil pressure 1
Bit 7 7640 EIC oil pressure 2
Bit 8 7650 EIC oil temp. 1
Bit 9 7660 EIC oil temp. 2
Bit 10 7670 EIC coolant level 1
Bit 11 7680 EIC coolant level 2

1024

EIC alarms, engine controller (DM1)

Bit 0 EIC communication error, warning


Bit 1 EIC warning
Bit 2 EIC shutdown
Bit 3 EIC protection
Bit 4 EIC malfunction

DEIF A/S

Page 145 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

7.1.35 Alarms, EMR 2 EMR 3 Deutz engines


Alarm, status and measurement table (read only) function code 04h.
Addr.
1020

Content
EIC alarms, DEIF controller

Type
Bit 0 7570 EIC communication error
Bit 1 7580 EIC warning
Bit 2 7590 EIC shutdown
Bit 3 7600 EIC overspeed
Bit 4 7610 EIC coolant water temperature 1
Bit 5 7620 EIC coolant water temperature 2
Bit 6 7630 EIC oil pressure 1
Bit 7 7640 EIC oil pressure 2
Bit 8 7650 EIC oil temp. 1
Bit 9 7660 EIC oil temp. 2
Bit 10 7670 EIC coolant level 1
Bit 11 7680 EIC coolant level 2

1024

EIC alarms, engine controller (DM 1)

Bit 0 EIC high coolant temperature, shutdown


Bit 1 EIC low oil pressure, shutdown
Bit 2 EIC overspeed, shutdown
Bit 3 EIC EMR shutdown (LS: lamp status)
Bit 4 EIC EMR warning (LS: lamp status)
Bit 5 EIC communication error
Bit 6 EIC protection Bit 7 EIC malfunction

DEIF A/S

Page 146 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

7.1.36 Alarms, Generic J1939


Alarm, status and measurement table (read only) function code 04h.
Addr.
1020

Content
EIC alarms, DEIF controller

Type
Bit 0 7570 EIC communication error
Bit 1 7580 EIC warning
Bit 2 7590 EIC shutdown
Bit 3 7600 EIC overspeed
Bit 4 7610 EIC coolant water temperature 1
Bit 5 7620 EIC coolant water temperature 2
Bit 6 7630 EIC oil pressure 1
Bit 7 7640 EIC oil pressure 2
Bit 8 7650 EIC oil temp. 1
Bit 9 7660 EIC oil temp. 2
Bit 10 7670 EIC coolant level 1
Bit 11 7680 EIC coolant level 2

1024

EIC alarms, engine controller (DM1)

Bit 0 EIC communication error


Bit 1 EIC yellow
Bit 2 EIC red
Bit 3 EIC protection
Bit 4 EIC malfunction

DEIF A/S

Page 147 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

7.1.37 Alarms, Iveco


Alarm, status and measurement table (read only) function code 04h.
Addr.
1020

Content
EIC alarms, DEIF controller

Type
Bit 0 7570 EIC communication error
Bit 1 7580 EIC warning
Bit 2 7590 EIC shutdown
Bit 3 7600 EIC overspeed
Bit 4 7610 EIC coolant water temperature 1
Bit 5 7620 EIC coolant water temperature 2
Bit 6 7630 EIC oil pressure 1
Bit 7 7640 EIC oil pressure 2
Bit 8 7650 EIC oil temp. 1
Bit 9 7660 EIC oil temp. 2
Bit 10 7670 EIC coolant level 1
Bit 11 7680 EIC coolant level 2

1024

EIC alarms, engine controller (DM 1)

Bit 0 EIC communication error


Bit 1 EIC low oil pressure, warning
Bit 2 EIC low oil pressure, shutdown
Bit 3 EIC boost pressure, warning
Bit 4 EIC high coolant temperature, warning
Bit 5 EIC high coolant temperature, shutdown
Bit 6 EIC high inlet air temperature, warning
Bit 7 EIC fuel temperature, warning
Bit 8 EIC ECM yellow lamp, warning
Bit 9 EIC ECM red lamp, shutdown
Bit 10 EIC overspeed, warning
Bit 11 EIC overspeed, shutdown
Bit 12 EIC protection Bit 13 EIC malfunction

DEIF A/S

Page 148 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

7.1.38 Alarms, JDEC John Deere engines


Alarm, status and measurement table (read only) function code 04h.
Addr.
1020

Content
EIC alarms, DEIF controller

Type
Bit 0 7570 EIC communication error
Bit 1 7580 EIC warning
Bit 2 7590 EIC shutdown
Bit 3 7600 EIC overspeed
Bit 4 7610 EIC coolant water temperature 1
Bit 5 7620 EIC coolant water temperature 2
Bit 6 7630 EIC oil pressure 1
Bit 7 7640 EIC oil pressure 2
Bit 8 7650 EIC oil temp. 1
Bit 9 7660 EIC oil temp. 2
Bit 10 7670 EIC coolant level 1
Bit 11 7680 EIC coolant level 2

1024

EIC alarms, engine controller (DM 1)

Bit 0 EIC high coolant temperature, shutdown


Bit 1 EIC low oil pressure, shutdown
Bit 2 EIC fuel temperature, shutdown
Bit 3 EIC fuel control valve, shutdown
Bit 4 EIC ECU failure, shutdown
Bit 5 EIC oil pressure, warning
Bit 6 EIC intake manifold, warning
Bit 7 EIC coolant temperature, warning
Bit 8 EIC fuel injection pump, warning
Bit 9 EIC JDEC shutdown (LS: lamp status)
Bit 10 EIC JDEC warning (LS: lamp status)
Bit 11 EIC communication error
Bit 12 EIC protection Bit 13 EIC malfunction

DEIF A/S

Page 149 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

7.1.39 Alarms, MTU J1939 Smart Connect


Alarm, status and measurement table (read only) function code 04h.
Addr.
1020

Content
EIC alarms, DEIF controller

Type
Bit 0 7570 EIC communication error
Bit 1 7580 EIC warning
Bit 2 7590 EIC shutdown
Bit 3 7600 EIC overspeed
Bit 4 7610 EIC coolant water temperature 1
Bit 5 7620 EIC coolant water temperature 2
Bit 6 7630 EIC oil pressure 1
Bit 7 7640 EIC oil pressure 2
Bit 8 7650 EIC oil temp. 1
Bit 9 7660 EIC oil temp. 2
Bit 10 7670 EIC coolant level 1
Bit 11 7680 EIC coolant level 2

1024

EIC alarms, engine controller (DM1)

Bit 0 EIC communication error


Bit 1 EIC yellow
Bit 2 EIC red
Bit 3 EIC protection
Bit 4 EIC malfunction

DEIF A/S

Page 150 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

7.1.40 Alarms, MTU ADEC


Alarm, status and measurement table (read only) function code 04h.
Addr.
1020

Content
EIC alarms, DEIF controller

Type
Bit 0 7570 EIC communication error
Bit 1 7580 EIC warning
Bit 2 7590 EIC shutdown
Bit 3 7600 EIC overspeed
Bit 4 7610 EIC coolant water temperature 1
Bit 5 7620 EIC coolant water temperature 2
Bit 6 7630 EIC oil pressure 1
Bit 7 7640 EIC oil pressure 2
Bit 8 7650 EIC oil temp. 1
Bit 9 7660 EIC oil temp. 2
Bit 10 7670 EIC coolant level 1
Bit 11 7680 EIC coolant level 2

1022

EIC alarms, engine controller

Bit 0 EIC ECU power supp. voltage LowLow


Bit 1 EIC Fuel high temp.
Bit 2 EIC Exhaust A high temp.
Bit 3 EIC Exhaust B high temp.
Bit 4 EIC Pressure 1 high (Aux. 1)
Bit 5 EIC Pressure 2 high (Aux. 2)
Bit 6 EIC Day tank high level
Bit 7 EIC Day tank low level
Bit 8 EIC Run-up speed not reached
Bit 9 EIC Idle speed not reached

DEIF A/S

Page 151 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Addr.
1023

Engine communication

Content
EIC alarms, engine controller

Type
Bit 0 EIC Common alarm red
Bit 1 EIC Overspeed
Bit 2 EIC Lube oil press. LowLow
Bit 3 EIC Coolant temperature HiHi
Bit 4 EIC Lube oil temp. HiHi
Bit 5 EIC Charge air temp. HiHi
Bit 6 EIC ECU power supp. voltage HiHi
Bit 7 EIC Generator temp. high warning
Bit 8 EIC Holding tank high level
Bit 9 EIC Holding tank low level
Bit 10 EIC Winding 1 temp. high
Bit 11 EIC Winding 2 temp. high
Bit 12 EIC Winding 3 temp. high
Bit 13 EIC Ambient temp. high
Bit 14 EIC Water in fuel 1
Bit 15 EIC Water in fuel 2

DEIF A/S

Page 152 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Addr.
1024

Engine communication

Content
EIC alarms, engine controller

Type
Bit 0 EIC Coolant high temp.
Bit 1 EIC Charge air high temp.
Bit 2 EIC Intercooler coolant high temp.
Bit 3 EIC Lube oil high temp.
Bit 4 EIC ECU high temp.
Bit 5 EIC Engine speed low
Bit 6 EIC Prelube fail.
Bit 7 EIC Start speed not reached
Bit 8 EIC Common alarm Yellow
Bit 9 EIC Lube oil pressure low
Bit 10 EIC Coolant level low
Bit 11 EIC Intercooler coolant level low
Bit 12 EIC ECU defect
Bit 13 EIC Speed demand defect
Bit 14 EIC Power supply low voltage
Bit 15 EIC Power supply high voltage

DEIF A/S

Page 153 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

7.1.41 MTU ADEC module 501, without SAM module (H13 option)
Alarm, status and measurement table (read only) function code 04h.
Addr.
1020

Content
EIC alarms, DEIF controller

Type
Bit 0 EIC communication error
Bit 2 EIC shutdown
Bit 3 EIC overspeed
Bit 4 EIC coolant water temperature 1
Bit 5 EIC coolant water temperature 2
Bit 6 EIC oil pressure 1

1022

EIC alarms, engine controller

Bit 0 EIC Automatic engine stop


Bit 1 EIC MG start speedfail
Bit 2 EIC Runup speedfail1
Bit 3 EIC Idle speedfail
Bit 4 EIC ECU power supply voltage low limit2
Bit 5 EIC ECU power supply voltage high limit2
Bit 6 EIC Aftercooler coolant level sensor defect
Bit 7 EIC Fuel temperature high limit 2

1023

EIC alarms, engine controller

Bit 0 EIC Common rail fuel pressure limit 1


Bit 1 EIC Common rail fuel pressure limit 2
Bit 2 EIC Override
Bit 3 EIC Preheat temperature low
Bit 4 EIC Charge air coolant level 2
Bit 5 EIC Power amplifier 1
Bit 6 EIC Power amplifier 2
Bit 7 EIC Transistor output status, TAA1 to TAA6
Bit 8 EIC ECU Power supply voltage low limit1
Bit 9 EIC ECU Power supply voltage high limit1
Bit 10 EIC Charge air temperature limit1
Bit 11 EIC Lube oil temperature limit1
Bit 12 EIC ECU temperature limit1
Bit 13 EIC Engine speed low limit1
Bit 14 EIC Check error code
Bit 15 EIC Common rail leakage

1024

EIC alarms, engine controller

Bit 0 EIC overspeed, shutdown


Bit 1 EIC low oil pressure, warning
Bit 2 EIC low oil pressure, shutdown
Bit 3 EIC low coolant level, shutdown

DEIF A/S

Page 154 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Addr.

Content

Engine communication

Type
Bit 4 EIC ADEC ECU failure, shutdown
Bit 5 EIC high coolant temperature, warning
Bit 6 EIC high coolant temperature, shutdown
Bit 7 EIC high intercooler coolant temp, warning
Bit 8 EIC high oil temperature, shutdown
Bit 9 EIC high charge air temperature, shutdown
Bit 10 EIC defect coolant level switch, warning
Bit 11 EIC ADEC yellow alarm, warning
Bit 12 EIC ADEC red alarm, shutdown
Bit 13 EIC communication error
Bit 14 EIC fuel delivery pressure limit1
Bit 15 EIC fuel delivery pressure limit2

DEIF A/S

Page 155 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

7.1.42 Alarms, MTU MDEC series 2000/4000 module 302 & 303
Alarm, status and measurement table (read only) function code 04h.
Addr.
1020

Content
EIC alarms, DEIF controller

Type
Bit 0 EIC communication error
Bit 2 EIC shutdown
Bit 3 EIC overspeed
Bit 4 EIC coolant water temperature 1
Bit 5 EIC coolant water temperature 2
Bit 6 EIC oil pressure 1
Bit 7 EIC oil pressure 2

1024

EIC alarms, engine controller

Bit 0 EIC overspeed, shutdown


Bit 1 EIC low oil pressure, warning
Bit 2 EIC low oil pressure, shutdown
Bit 3 EIC low coolant level, shutdown
Bit 4 EIC MDEC ECU failure, shutdown
Bit 5 EIC high coolant temperature, warning
Bit 6 EIC high coolant temperature, shutdown
Bit 7 EIC high intercooler coolant temp., warning
Bit 8 EIC high oil temperature, shutdown
Bit 9 EIC high charge air temperature, shutdown
Bit 10 EIC defect coolant level switch, warning
Bit 11 EIC MDEC yellow alarm, warning
Bit 12 EIC MDEC red alarm, shutdown

DEIF A/S

Page 156 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

7.1.43 Alarms, Scania


Alarm, status and measurement table (read only) function code 04h
Addr.
1026

Content
EIC alarms (KWP 2000)

Type
Bit 0 EIC overreving
Bit 1 EIC speed sensor 1
Bit 2 EIC speed sensor 2
Bit 3 EIC water temp. sensor
Bit 4 EIC charge air temp. sensor
Bit 5 EIC charge air pressure sensor
Bit 6 EIC oil temp. sensor
Bit 7 EIC oil pressure sensor
Bit 8 EIC fault in cor.
Bit 9 EIC throttle pedal
Bit 10 EIC emergency stop override
Bit 11 EIC oil pressure prot.
Bit 12 EIC wrong parameter
Bit 13 EIC battery voltage
Bit 14 EIC oil pressure prot.
Bit 15 EIC emergency stop cor.

DEIF A/S

Page 157 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Addr.
1027

Engine communication

Content
EIC alarms (KWP 2000)

Type
Bit 0 EIC CAN cir. defect
Bit 1 EIC CAN mess. DLN1
Bit 2 EIC wrong CAN version
Bit 3 EIC un. inj. cyl. 1
Bit 4 EIC un. inj. cyl. 2
Bit 5 EIC un. inj. cyl. 3
Bit 6 EIC un. inj. cyl. 4
Bit 7 EIC un. inj. cyl. 5
Bit 8 EIC un. inj. cyl. 6
Bit 9 EIC un. inj. cyl. 7
Bit 10 EIC un. inj. cyl. 8
Bit 11 EIC extra ana. inp.
Bit 12 EIC system shutdown
Bit 13 EIC coola. L. prot.
Bit 14 EIC HW watchdog
Bit 15 EIC fault in RAM

DEIF A/S

Page 158 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Addr.
1028

Engine communication

Content
EIC alarms (KWP 2000)

Type
Bit 0 EIC seal
Bit 1 EIC coola. shut OFF
Bit 2 EIC overheat prot.
Bit 3 Fault in TPU
Bit 4 Not used
Bit 5 Not used
Bit 6 Not used
Bit 7 Not used
Bit 8 Not used
Bit 9 Not used
Bit 10 Not used
Bit 11 Not used
Bit 12 Not used
Bit 13 Not used
Bit 14 Not used
Bit 15 Not used

DEIF A/S

Page 159 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Engine communication

7.1.44 Alarms, Volvo Penta


Alarm, status and measurement table (read only) function code 04h.
Addr.
1020

Content
EIC alarms, DEIF controller

Type
Bit 0 7570 EIC communication error
Bit 1 7580 EIC warning
Bit 2 7590 EIC shutdown
Bit 3 7600 EIC overspeed
Bit 4 7610 EIC coolant water temperature 1
Bit 5 7620 EIC coolant water temperature 2
Bit 6 7630 EIC oil pressure 1
Bit 7 7640 EIC oil pressure 2
Bit 8 7650 EIC oil temp. 1
Bit 9 7660 EIC oil temp. 2
Bit 10 7670 EIC coolant level 1
Bit 11 7680 EIC coolant level 2

1024

EIC alarms (DM 1)

Bit 0 EIC overspeed, warning


Bit 1 EIC oil pressure, warning
Bit 2 EIC oil temperature, warning
Bit 3 EIC high coolant temperature, warning
Bit 4 EIC low coolant level, warning
Bit 5 EIC fuel pressure, warning
Bit 6 EIC ECM yellow lamp, warning
Bit 7 EIC ECM red lamp, shutdown
Bit 8 EIC high inlet air temperature, warning
Bit 10 EIC battery voltage, warning
Bit 11 EIC low oil level, warning
Bit 12 EIC protection
Bit 13 EIC malfunction

DEIF A/S

Page 160 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

8. Power management
8.1 Power management
8.1.1 Power management functions
In the following chapter, the power management functions of the AGC 200 are listed.
Plant modes:
Island mode (no mains unit)
Automatic Mains Failure (needs mains unit)
Fixed power/base load (needs mains unit)
Peak shaving (needs mains unit)
Load takeover (needs mains unit)
Mains power export (needs mains unit)
Display:
Mains unit display showing mains breaker and tie breaker
Generator unit showing generator and generator breaker
Power management functions:
16 mains, 16 gen-sets and 8 BTB's
Load-dependent start/stop
Priority selection
Manual
Running hours
Fuel optimisation
Ground relay control
ATS control
Safety stop (fail class = trip and stop)
Load management
Single mains support
Multi mains support
Secured mode
Quick setup/broadcast
Base load
Heavy consumer (HC)
Asymmetric load sharing (LS)
Common PF control
CAN flags

DEIF A/S

Page 161 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

8.1.2 Applications
Application

Drawing below

Comment

Island operation

Island mode plant

Multiple gensets

Automatic Mains Failure

Parallel with 1 to 16 mains

No back synchronising

Automatic Mains Failure

Parallel with 1 to 16 mains

With back synchronising

Automatic Mains Failure

ATS plant, multiple start

Multiple start system

Automatic Mains Failure

ATS plant, mains unit

Mains unit installed

Fixed power

Parallel

Also called base load. Needs mains unit

Mains power export

Parallel

Needs mains unit

Load takeover

Parallel

Needs mains unit

Peak shaving

Parallel

Needs mains unit

Regarding AC and DC connections for the individual applications, please refer to the Installation Instructions.
Island operation plant
In an application where up to 16 gensets are installed, the AGC 200 will automatically operate in an island
mode with load-dependent starting and stopping.
Busbar
CANbus

Generator
breaker
(GB 1)

AGC 200

G
Diesel generator set 1

Generator
breaker
(GB 2)

AGC 200

G
Diesel generator set 2

If a mains unit is installed and connected (for example for preparing future requirements to the application),
the island mode operation is selected in the mains unit.
Parallel with mains plant
An application where a mains breaker is installed together with up to 16 gensets is shown below.
The application also supports a redundant mains unit.
The application is shown with a tie breaker, but it is also possible to use the application without a tie breaker.
The tie breaker can only be placed as shown in the drawing below.

DEIF A/S

Page 162 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

Mains

Mains
breaker
(MB)

AGC 246

Load
Tie
Breaker
(TB)

Busbar
CANbus

Generator
breaker
(GB 1)

AGC 242

G
Diesel generator set 1

Generator
breaker
(GB 2)

AGC 242

G
Diesel generator set 2

This one-line diagram is also valid for AMF plants without back synchronising and load takeover plants without possibility of synchronising the genset to the mains.

DEIF A/S

Page 163 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

Multi-mains plant
Below is an example of a multi-mains plant with 3 mains, 3 BTBs and 1 generator.
It is possible to have up to 16 mains, 8 BTBs and 16 generator controllers in one power management system.

Mains 1

Mains 2

Mains 3
CANbus

Mains
breaker 1

Mains
breaker 2

AGC 245

Consumers

Mains
breaker 3

AGC 245

Consumers

AGC 246

Consumers

Tie
breaker 3

Bus tie
breaker 1

Bus tie
breaker 3

Bus tie
breaker 2
CANbus

AGC 244

CANbus

AGC 244

AGC 242

AGC 244

G
Diesel generator set 1

For further information about multi-mains, see the chapter "Multiple mains".
ATS plant
Applications that use an ATS for switching between mains supply and generator supply are supported as
well. An application example using an ATS is shown below.

DEIF A/S

Page 164 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

ATS plant, multiple start

Mains

Load

ATS

Auto Start/Stop

Busbar
CANbus

AGC 242

AGC 242

G
Diesel generator set 1

G
Diesel generator set 2

8.1.3 Initial power management setup


The AGC 200 is set up using the display and the PC utility software.

8.1.4 Application design


The application design with AGC units consists of different power management types: Genset, mains and
BTB.
The AGC-4 controller has the flexibility to change the type of controller that is required. For example, the unit
can be changed from a mains controller to a BTB or genset controller. The only requirement is that the unit is
an AGC-4 with option G5. On an AGC 200, the type of unit is fixed and cannot be changed. But an AGC 245
can operate as an AGC 246, and vice versa. (In that case, the front foil will not be correct, but the function will
work). On the AGC-4 platform, the controller type can be changed by pressing the jump button on the display
and going to menu 9000.
The different types of controllers and requirements are shown in the table below:

DEIF A/S

Page 165 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Platform

Controller

Requirements

AGC-4

AGC-4 - Mains

Option G5

AGC-4

AGC-4 - BTB

Option G5 or G4

AGC-4

AGC-4 - Genset

Option G5, G4 or G8

AGC 200

AGC 200 - Mains

AGC 245 or AGC 246

AGC 200

AGC 200 - BTB

AGC 244

AGC 200

AGC 200 - Genset

AGC 222, AGC 242 or AGC 243

AGC 100

AGC 100 - Mains

AGC 145 or AGC 146

Be aware that when you change the unit type in menu 9000, all settings will be changed back to
default.
The power management communication between the units is configured through the utility software. The
power management communication is CANbus communication, and, consequently, it must follow the standards for CANbus communication.
Before configuring the power management, it is necessary to identify which terminals the communication
lines go to. To simplify the installation, the CAN lines will normally run from CAN A to CAN A, but it is possible
to mix the CAN lines on application software newer than 4.5x (AGC-4, AGC 200 and AGC 100). On AGCs,
the power management lines can for example go from CAN port A on an AGC-4 (terminal numbers A1 and
A3) on the first controller to CAN port A on an AGC 200 (terminal numbers 7 and 9) on the next controller. It
is important that the wiring is a daisy chain connection and that it is identified to which terminals the communication bus goes on each controller. The power management communication lines can be redundant, in which
case they are named PM CAN primary and PM CAN secondary. The line must be a continuous communication bus, and it cannot be mixed with the other communication bus for power management.
The power management communication can be on different terminals, dependent on which options the controller has been delivered with. The different terminals are shown below:
Terminal no.

CAN
port

Controller

Note

A1 - CAN High
A3 - CAN Low

AGC-4

Can be occupied by option H7.

7 - CAN High
9 - CAN Low

AGC 24x

CAN A does not exist on AGC 22x.


Redundant CANbus communication is not possible on AGC
200.

53 - CAN High
55 - CAN Low

AGC 14x

Redundant CANbus communication is not possible on AGC


100.

B1 - CAN High
B3 - CAN Low

AGC-4

Can be occupied by option H7.

10 - CAN High
12 - CAN Low

AGC 22x or
AGC 24x

Redundant CANbus communication is not possible on AGC


200.

57 - CAN High
59 - CAN Low

AGC 14x

Redundant CANbus communication is not possible on AGC


100.

First, you must follow the CANbus lines and decide which one should be named PM CAN primary, and which
one should be named PM CAN secondary.

DEIF A/S

Page 166 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

There is no difference in functionality between the PM CAN primary and PM CAN secondary,
but the lines cannot be mixed up with each other.
If only one CANbus line is present, it is insignificant whether PM CAN primary or PM CAN secondary is selected. If PM CAN primary is selected, this will have to be selected in all controllers. The same goes for PM CAN secondary.
When the CAN ports on each controller have been selected, this will have to be set in the controller. To facilitate comprehension, some examples are given.
Example with AGC-4 units:

AGC4

AGC4

MB17

MB18

Loa d

Loa d

TB 17

TB 18

AGC4

Busbar

BTB 33
CANbus

GB 1

GB 2

AGC4

G
Diesel genera tor set 1

DEIF A/S

AGC4

G
Diesel genera tor set 2

Page 167 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

In this example, the application consists solely of AGC-4 units. The application is an H-coupling with two
mains, two gensets and one BTB. The application only has one CANbus line between the units. The CANbus
line goes to the terminal numbers shown in the table below:
Controller

Terminal no.

CAN port

CAN protocol

Genset 1 - AGC-4

A1 and A3

PM CAN primary

Genset 2 - AGC-4

A1 and A3

PM CAN primary

Mains 17 - AGC-4

A1 and A3

PM CAN primary

Mains 18 - AGC-4

A1 and A3

PM CAN primary

BTB 33 - AGC-4

A1 and A3

PM CAN primary

It is now possible to select whether the CANbus line should be named PM CAN primary or PM CAN secondary. It does not make a difference which one is selected when the application only has one CANbus line, as
long as it is the same in all controllers. In this example, PM CAN primary is selected. It is then required to go
to parameter 7840 in all controllers and set the corresponding CAN port to PM CAN primary.
It is also possible to mix the CAN ports on the AGC-4, but only on controllers with newer software (4.5x.x or
newer). In this way, it will be possible to make an application where the CAN lines are as shown in the table
below:
Controller

Terminal no.

CAN port

CAN protocol

Genset 1 - AGC-4

A1 and A3

PM CAN secondary

Genset 2 - AGC-4

B1 and B3

PM CAN secondary

Mains 17 - AGC-4

A1 and A3

PM CAN secondary

Mains 18 - AGC-4

B1 and B3

PM CAN secondary

BTB 33 - AGC-4

A1 and A3

PM CAN secondary

The order of the CAN ports is not important, as long as the settings in the controllers are correct. But it is
always recommended to use the same CAN port on each controller. This can be helpful when troubleshooting, and it can also facilitate commissioning. In the last example, it does not matter whether PM CAN primary
or PM CAN secondary is selected, the function will be the same. It is only important that it is PM CAN primary
in all controllers or PM CAN secondary in all controllers.
Example with AGC 200 units:

DEIF A/S

Page 168 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

AGC 245/246

AGC 245/246

MB17

MB18

Loa d

Loa d

TB 17

TB 18

AGC 244

Busbar

BTB 33
CANbus

GB 1

GB 2

AGC 242/243

AGC 242/243

G
Diesel genera tor set 2

Diesel genera tor set 1

In this example, the application consists solely of AGC 200 units. The application is an H-coupling with two
mains, two gensets and one BTB. The application only has one CANbus line between the units. The CANbus
line goes to the terminal numbers shown in the table below:
Controller

Terminal no.

CAN port

CAN protocol

Genset 1 - AGC 242/243

10 and 12

PM CAN primary

Genset 2 - AGC 242/243

10 and 12

PM CAN primary

Mains 17 - AGC 245/246

10 and 12

PM CAN primary

Mains 18 - AGC 245/246

10 and 12

PM CAN primary

BTB 33 - AGC 244

10 and 12

PM CAN primary

It is now possible to select whether the CANbus line should be named PM CAN primary or PM CAN secondary. It does not make a difference which one is selected, as long as it is the same in all controllers. In this
example, PM CAN primary is selected. It is then required to go to parameter 7840 in all controllers and set
the corresponding CAN port to PM CAN primary.
It is also possible to mix the CAN ports on the AGC 200, but only on controllers with newer software (4.5x.x or
newer). In this way, it will be possible to make an application where the CAN lines are as shown in the table
below:

DEIF A/S

Page 169 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Controller

Terminal no.

CAN port

CAN protocol

Genset 1 - AGC 242/243

10 and 12

PM CAN secondary

Genset 2 - AGC 242/243

10 and 12

PM CAN secondary

Mains 17 - AGC 245/246

10 and 12

PM CAN secondary

Mains 18 - AGC 245/246

7 and 9

PM CAN secondary

BTB 33 - AGC 244

7 and 9

PM CAN secondary

The order of the CAN ports is not important, as long as the settings in the controllers are correct. But it is
always recommended to use the same CAN port on each controller. This can be helpful when troubleshooting, and it can also facilitate commissioning. In the last example, it does not matter whether PM CAN primary
or PM CAN secondary is selected, the function will be the same. It is only important that it is PM CAN primary
in all controllers, or PM CAN secondary in ally controllers.
Example with AGC-4 and AGC 100 units:

AGC 145/146

AGC 145/146

MB17

MB18

Loa d

Loa d

TB 17

TB 18

AGC4

Busbar

BTB 33
CANbus

GB 1

GB 2

AGC4

G
Diesel genera tor set 1

AGC4

G
Diesel genera tor set 2

In this example, the application consists of a mix of AGC 100 units and AGC-4 units. The application is an Hcoupling with two mains, two gensets and one BTB. The application only has one CANbus line between the
units. The CANbus line goes to the terminal numbers shown in the table below:

DEIF A/S

Page 170 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

Controller

Terminal no.

CAN port

CAN protocol

Genset 1 - AGC-4

B1 and B3

PM CAN secondary

Genset 2 - AGC-4

B1 and B3

PM CAN secondary

Mains 17 - AGC 145/146

53 and 55

PM CAN secondary

Mains 18 - AGC 145/146

53 and 55

PM CAN secondary

BTB 33 - AGC-4

A1 and A3

PM CAN secondary

It is now possible to select whether the CANbus line should be named PM CAN primary or PM CAN secondary. It does not make a difference which one is selected, as long as it is the same in all controllers. In this
example, PM CAN secondary is selected. It is then required to go to parameter 7840 in all controllers and set
the corresponding CAN port to PM CAN secondary.
Example with AGC-4, AGC 200 and AGC 100 units:

AGC 145/146

AGC 145/146

MB17

MB18

Loa d

Loa d

TB 17

TB 18

AGC 244

Busbar

BTB 33
CANbus

GB 1

GB 2

AGC4

G
Diesel genera tor set 1

DEIF A/S

AGC4

G
Diesel genera tor set 2

Page 171 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

In this example, the application consists of different AGC units. The application is an H-coupling with two
AGC 100 mains, two AGC-4 gensets and one AGC 200 BTB. The application only has one CANbus line between the units. The CANbus line goes to the terminal numbers shown in the table below:
Controller

Terminal no.

CAN port

CAN protocol

Genset 1 - AGC-4

A1 and A3

PM CAN primary

Genset 2 - AGC-4

A1 and A3

PM CAN primary

Mains 17 - AGC 145/146

53 and 55

PM CAN primary

Mains 18 - AGC 145/146

53 and 55

PM CAN primary

BTB 33 - AGC 244

7 and 9

PM CAN primary

It is now possible to select whether the CANbus line should be named PM CAN primary or PM CAN secondary. It does not make a difference which one is selected, as long as it is the same in all controllers. In this
example, PM CAN primary is selected. It is then required to go to parameter 7840 in all controllers and set
the corresponding CAN port to PM CAN primary.
It has now been shown how the different controllers can be combined in an application.
Afterwards, all controllers must have an internal communication ID. This is set in parameter 7530 in all controllers. The different types of controllers will have different IDs numbers. The available IDs are shown in the
table below:
Controller type

Controller

Available IDs (7530)

Genset

AGC-4 with option G5, G4 or G8


AGC 22x, AGC 242 or AGC 243

1-16

Mains

AGC-4 with option G5


AGC 245 or AGC 246
AGC 145 or AGC 146

17-32

BTB

AGC-4 with option G5 or G4


AGC 244

33-40

The different controllers cannot have the same ID.


In the examples, the selected IDs will be:
Diesel generator set 1 - ID 1
Diesel generator set 2 - ID 2
Mains 17 - ID 17
Mains 18 - ID 18
BTB - ID 33
The selected IDs are set in parameter 7530 in each controller. Now it is possible to use the utility software
and make the actual application design for the controllers. The controllers must know the application design
in order to operate correctly in different auto sequences.
To enter the application configuration when connected to a controller with the utility software, press the Application configuration tab in the lower left corner. The tab looks like this:

DEIF A/S

Page 172 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

An empty window will appear. To make an application design for the controller, press the New plant configuration button shown below.

DEIF A/S

Page 173 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

The Plant options window shown below will appear.

DEIF A/S

Page 174 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

The plant options are described in the table below:


Description

Comments

Product
type

Controller type is
selected here.

This function is greyed out if a controller is already connected.

Plant
type

Select between
Single DG
Standard
Genset group
plant
Genset group

"Standard" should be selected for power management systems.


If "Single DG" is selected, the CAN ports for power management communication will be turned off.
"Genset group plant" and "Genset Group" are only relevant for controllers
with plant management. Plant management is for power plants consisting of
17-256 gensets in the same application. Contact support@deif.com for further information.

Application
properties

The application is
activated when it
is written to the
controller.
The application
can also be
named here.

It can be helpful to give the application a name if the controller is in a plant


where it will switch between application designs. The controllers are able to
switch between four different application designs. Controllers that are connected to each other via the CANbus communication cannot be activated to
different application designs or numbers.

Bus tie
options

The "Wrap busbar" option can


be selected here.

Activate this option if the busbar is connected like a ring connection in the
plant. When the wrap busbar option is set, it will be shown in the application
supervision like this:

Power
management
CAN

Primary CAN
Secondary CAN
Primary and secondary CAN
CAN bus off

The CAN protocol selected here should be identical to the settings in the
unit. So if PM CAN primary is selected in the units, this must be selected in
the plant settings as well. The setting called primary and secondary CAN is
only used when redundant CANbus communication lines for power management are present. If this setting is selected and only one line is present, an
alarm will appear in the display. This alarm cannot be cleared.
The setting for CANbus off should only be used if the AGC is in a standalone application.

Application
emulation

Off
Breaker and engine cmd. active
Breaker and engine cmd. inactive

The emulation is started here if the units have option I1.


When Breaker and engine cmd. active is set, the units will activate the relays and try to communicate with an ECU. If the units are mounted in a real
installation, the breakers will open/close and the engine start/stop. This will
not happen if the Breaker and engine cmd. inactive is selected. In real installations, the emulation can be used during the commissioning. But when the
commissioning is done, the emulation should be switched off.

When the selections in the plant options window have been made, it is possible to make the application drawing in the units.
Now, controllers can be added to the design, and it can be selected which type of breakers is present in the
application. This is done from the left side of the utility software.

DEIF A/S

Page 175 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

The table below describes the plant configuration options that are shown in the window above.

DEIF A/S

Page 176 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

No.

Power management

Description

Add and delete areas. Adding areas will make the application design/plant bigger.

Select which type of power source should be represented in the top of the area. Only mains or diesel
genset can be selected.

Set the internal command ID. This ID should correspond to the ID set in the controller.

Requires option T1 (critical power). Makes it possible to have redundant controller.

Because mains has been selected in the source (no. 2), it is possible to select which type of breaker
to use for mains breaker. The options are: Pulse, Externally controlled/ATS no control, Continuous
ND, Continuous NE, Compact or none.

Because mains has been selected in the source (no. 2), it is possible to select which type of breaker
to use for tie breaker. The options are: Pulse, Continuous NE, Compact or none.

Select whether the tie breaker should be normally open or normally closed.

BTB controllers can be added.

The type of breaker that is used for BTB operation. The options are: Pulse, Continuous NE, Compact
or Externally controlled. (Externally controlled BTB means that no controller is present. Breaker position inputs can be made to another controller in the power management system).

10

Set the ID for the specific BTB controller.

11

Select whether the BTB should be normally open or normally closed.

12

If Vdc breaker is selected, the breaker can open and close when there is no voltage on the busbar.
If Vac breaker is selected, voltage must be present on the busbar before the breaker can be handled.

13

If the BTB has an under-voltage coil, it is set here.

14

Requires option T1 (critical power). Makes it possible to have redundant controller.

15

Select which type of power source should be represented in the bottom of the area. Only mains or
diesel genset can be selected.

16

Set the internal command ID. This ID should correspond to the ID set in the controller.

17

Requires option T1 (critical power). Makes it possible to have redundant controller.

18

Because diesel genset has been selected in the power source (no. 15), it is possible to select which
type of breaker to use for generator breaker. The options are: Pulse, Continuous NE or Compact.

DEIF A/S

Page 177 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

The application drawing/design for the example will be like this:

Subsequently, the configuration for the plant must be sent to the units. This can be done by pressing the
Write plant configuration to the device button, which looks like this:
After pressing the button, only the one controller, to which you are connected, knows the actual application
configuration. The application configuration can then be sent from this controller to all the other controllers by
pressing the Broadcast button in the top of the utility software:
If the AGC is to fit into an application with AGC units with older software, this can also be done. But some
restrictions must be fulfilled before the system will work correctly. On older software, the communication lines
(CAN protocols) are called CAN A and CAN B. By default, these are set to a CAN port and cannot be switched. In the table below, this is shown for the different controllers.

DEIF A/S

Page 178 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Controller

Power management

CAN port

Note

AGC-4

A and B

CAN port A is CAN A


CAN port B is CAN B
If option H7 is set, only CAN B can be used for power management.
If two CAN ports are desired for power management communication, and the governor and AVR interfacing is to be done by EIC, then option H5.8 is required.

AGC 200

A and B

CAN port A is CAN A


CAN port B is CAN B
AGC 200 can only use one port at a time for power management communication
(redundant CAN is not possible).

AGC 100

A and B

CAN port A is CAN A


CAN port B is CAN B
AGC 100 can only use one port at a time for power management communication
(redundant CAN is not possible).

When handling controllers with older software, be aware that the settings in older software do not allow the
controllers to use other ports for power management than the ports that are set default. On older software, it
is not possible to mix the used CAN ports. If CAN port A is used, this should be used on all older controllers.
The same goes for CAN port B on older controllers. It is possible to mix newer controllers' and older controllers' power management communication. The easiest way to explain this is with an example:

AGC 145/146

AGC 145/146

MB17

MB18

Loa d

Loa d

TB 17

TB 18

AGC 244

Busbar

BTB 33
CANbus

GB 1

GB 2

AGC4

G
Diesel genera tor set 1

DEIF A/S

AGC4

G
Diesel genera tor set 2

Page 179 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

The setup shown above is the same as used in the example earlier. But the controllers now have different
software versions. The CAN ports used are shown in the table below:
Controller

Terminal no.

CAN port

CAN protocol

Genset 1 - AGC-4 (older software)

A1 and A3

CAN A

Genset 2 - AGC-4 (newer software)

B1 and B3

PM CAN primary

Mains 17 - AGC 145/146 (newer software)

57 and 59

PM CAN primary

Mains 18 - AGC 145/146 (older software)

53 and 55

CAN A

BTB 33 - AGC 244 (newer software)

7 and 9

PM CAN primary

Note that all controllers with older software (4.4x or older) use the same CAN port. When the controller with
older software uses CAN port A for power management communication, the setting in the controller with newer software should be PM CAN primary.
If the controllers with older software had used CAN port B instead, the setting in the controller with newer
software should be PM CAN secondary.
An overview is shown in the table below:
CAN port on controller
with older software

CAN port on controller with newer


software

Setting in controller with newer


software

Does not matter

PM CAN primary

Does not matter

PM CAN secondary

DEIF A/S

Page 180 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

The AGC-4 is capable of using redundant power management CAN lines. These could be used in an application like this:

AGC4

AGC4

MB17

MB18

Loa d

Loa d

TB 17

TB 18

AGC4

Busbar

BTB 33
CANbus

GB 1

GB 2

AGC4

AGC4

G
Diesel genera tor set 2

Diesel genera tor set 1

The application shown above consists solely of AGC-4 units with redundant CAN lines for power management. The controllers are a mix of newer and older software. The CAN lines go to these terminal numbers:
Terminal no. (1)

CAN port (1)

Terminal no. (2)

CAN port (2)

Genset 1 - AGC-4 (older software)

Controller

A1 and A3

B1 and B3

Genset 2 - AGC-4 (newer software)

B1 and B3

A1 and B3

Mains 17 - AGC-4 (newer software)

57 and 59

A1 and A3

Mains 18 - AGC-4 (older software)

A1 and A3

B1 and B3

BTB 33 - AGC-4 (newer software)

7 and 9

A1 and A3

Controllers with older software use the same CAN port for each CAN line.

DEIF A/S

Page 181 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

When the controllers are mixed with software and CAN ports, the controllers with the older software determine the settings in parameter 7840 for the controllers with newer software. If the CAN line on the controller
with older software goes to CAN port A, the setting for the controllers with newer software should be PM CAN
primary. The settings from the example are shown below. To facilitate comprehension, the CAN lines are divided into two tables:
Table for CAN line A/PM CAN primary
(The table shows which CAN ports should be set to PM CAN primary on the controllers with newer software):
Controller

CAN line A/PM CAN primary setting (7840)

Genset 1 - AGC-4 (older software)

Not adjustable

Genset 2 - AGC-4 (newer software)

Mains 17 - AGC-4 (newer software)

Mains 18 - AGC-4 (older software)

Not adjustable

BTB 33 - AGC-4 (newer software)

Table for CAN line B/PM CAN secondary


(The table shows which CAN ports should be set to PM CAN secondary on the controllers with newer software):
Controller

CAN line B/PM CAN secondary setting (7840)

Genset 1 - AGC-4 (older software)

Not adjustable

Genset 2 - AGC-4 (newer software)

Mains 17 - AGC-4 (newer software)

Mains 18 - AGC-4 (older software)

Not adjustable

BTB 33 - AGC-4 (newer software)

If one of the CAN lines should break, there are alarms related to this which can be helpful when troubleshooting. This is described in the chapter CANbus failure handling.

8.1.5 Remove a unit from the power management system


If one or more units have to be taken out of the power management system, the following steps can be performed.
The first step is to remove the auxiliary supply of the AGC. This means that a CANbus alarm occurs on the
other AGC units. These alarms appear on ID 1 in a 2 DG plant where ID 2 is powered down:
Alarm

Functioning unit (ID 1)

System alarm

CAN ID 2 P/S missing

Menu 7533

Missing all units

Menu 7535

Any DG missing

The mode changes according to the setting in CAN failure mode (7532).

DEIF A/S

Page 182 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

The alarms will be present as long as the failure is present. A reconfiguration of the power plant is required to
remove the alarms. The reconfiguration can be done in two ways: By means of quick setup or by means of
the utility software.
Please refer to the chapter Application design for instructions for using the utility software to
design an application configuration.
The application can also be reconfigured from the quick setup menu (9180). The quick setup should only be
used for small applications. It is also normally used for small applications for rental gensets. If the quick setup
is used, utility software is not required.
For more details, please refer to the chapter Quick setup.

8.1.6 Add a unit to the power management system


If the same 2 DG plants as mentioned earlier are used, and the controller with ID 2 is switched to a brand
new controller with default settings, both controllers will get two alarms: "Duplicate CAN ID" and "Appl. hazard".
The "Duplicate CAN ID" alarm indicates that there are at lease two units with the same internal communication ID (7530). These numbers cannot be similar, since the system cannot handle this correctly.
The "Appl. Hazard" alarm indicates that not all controllers in the system have matching "application configurations". The system will not be able to operate correctly, because there is a mismatch between the units in the
system. To clear this alarm, it is required to go to the application configuration in the utility software or to use
the quick setup to reconfigure the application in the controllers.
If, instead, the DG2 has been switched off and then switched on again, the alarms will disappear, but this is
only because the CAN IDs (7530) and the application configuration were correct before the unit was switched
off.

DEIF A/S

Page 183 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

8.1.7 CAN failure mode


The system behaviour can be set up in different ways to handle a CAN failure on the CAN controlling the
power management. In menu 7530, it is decided how the power management system will react in case of a
CAN failure. There are three selectable modes the controllers should change to in case of a CANbus failure:
1.

Manual:
If "MANUAL" is selected, all the AGC units will change mode to manual mode. In this way, the regulators will have no reaction, and it will not be possible to close any breakers (unless the breakers are
already within the limits for the sync. window or black busbar). Manual mode is not selectable in BTB
or mains units.
When the wire break on the CAN lines occurs, the regulators will stop immediately, and no further action will take place. Protections are still active, so if for example a short circuit or an overload occurs,
the AGC is still able to make a shutdown or a trip of a breaker.
Manual mode can also be described with an example:
Busbar

CANbus

AGC4

G
Diesel genera tor set 1

AGC 242/243

G
Diesel genera tor set 2

If the wire break occurs before the engine is started, the controller is not allowed to start the engines. If
more than two gensets are present in an application and manual is selected, none of the gensets will
be able to loadshare. Only the protections are active.
Be aware that when a CANbus failure is present, the risk of blackout is also present, since load sharing does not take place in manual mode.

DEIF A/S

Page 184 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

2.

Power management

Semi-auto:
If "SEMI-AUTO" is selected, the AGC units will change to semi-auto mode when a CANbus failure
alarm occurs.
In semi-auto mode, the regulators in the AGC units are still active. This means that the gensets that
are visible to each other are able to loadshare. This is explained by an example:
Busbar

CANbus

AGC4

Diesel genera tor set 1

AGC4

AGC 242/243

Diesel genera tor set 2

G
Diesel genera tor set 3

AGC 242/243

G
Diesel genera tor set 4

In the diagram above, the CANbus failure is present between genset 2 and genset 3. This means that
gensets 1 and 2 are visible to each other. Gensets 3 and 4 are also visible to each other. Gensets 1
and 2 are able to loadshare with each other, and gensets 3 and 4 are able to loadshare with each
other. But there is still a risk of blackout, since it is still possible to overload two of the gensets, while
the other two are not very loaded.
If a CANbus failure occurs when the gensets are stopped, they will not be blocked, and in this way it
will be possible to start them.
If a CANbus failure is present in this situation, it is possible to start two gensets and
close the breaker onto the busbar at the same time! (Not synchronised).

DEIF A/S

Page 185 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

3.

Power management

No mode change:
If "No mode change" is selected, all the AGC units will be kept in the mode the where in before the
CANbus failure occurred. In an application with several mains, BTBs and several gensets, if one genset is not visible anymore, the rest of the system can still behave almost like normal and in auto mode.
But if the CANbus failure occurs in a system like the one shown below, it might be a problem:

AGC 145/146

MB17

Loa d

TB 17

Busbar

CANbus

AGC4

G
Diesel genera tor set 1

AGC 242/243

G
Diesel genera tor set 2

The application above is made for automatic mains failure operation. In this application, the present
CANbus failure will be a problem, since the gensets will receive a start signal from the mains controller
when the mains fails. But since the CANbus has a failure between the mains controller and the gensets, the gensets will never know when the mains fails and will therefore never start. If this setting is
used, it is recommended to use the CANbus fail class settings (7530) in order for the system to handle
the situation correctly.

DEIF A/S

Page 186 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

8.1.8 CAN bus fail classes


The AGC units have different CAN bus alarms, which are triggered in different situations:

Missing all units:


Appears only when a controller cannot "see" any other units on the CAN bus line. The fail class selected
in parameter 7533 will be executed.

Fatal CAN error:


Appears when two or more units are not visible, but one or some units are still visible. The fail class selected in parameter 7534 will be executed.

Any DG missing:
Appears when only one genset controller is missing. The fail class selected in parameter 7535 will be
executed.

Any mains missing:


Appears when only one mains controller is missing. The fail class selected in parameter 7533 will be executed. The fail class selected here is also used when a BTB is missing.

8.1.9 CAN bus alarms


The following alarms can be displayed on an AGC unit in case of CAN bus communication failures:

CAN ID X P missing
The AGC unit has lost CAN bus communication to CAN ID on PM CAN primary.

CAN MAINS X P missing


The AGC unit has lost CAN bus communication to mains with ID X on PM CAN primary.

CAN BTB X P missing


The AGC unit has lost CAN bus communication to BTB with ID X on PM CAN primary.

CAN ID X S missing
The AGC unit has lost CAN bus communication to CAN ID on PM CAN secondary.

CAN MAINS X S missing


The AGC unit has lost CAN bus communication to mains with ID X on PM CAN secondary.

CAN BTB X S missing


The AGC unit has lost CAN bus communication to BTB with ID X on PM CAN secondary.

CAN setup CH: 784x


The unit can sense power management communication on a CAN port, but the correct protocol is not set.
This alarm is also monitoring the CAN setup between engine communication protocol (H5, H7, H13) and
CAN port.
For a general description of "Fail class", please refer to the description of fail classes in the
relevant chapter in the Designer's Reference Handbook.
Load sharing backup: It is possible to have a backup of the load sharing if the power management CAN bus should fail. This can be done by analogue load sharing.

DEIF A/S

Page 187 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

8.1.10 Quick setup


This function is made to provide an easy user interface for applications where it is vital for the end-user to be
able to change the application quickly and easily.
It is often applications for the rental market that need this flexibility, and therefore there are some limitations
as to which applications that can be handled through the quick setup menu.
The following applications can be handled through the quick setup menu.
Island Applications
Busbar
CANbus

AGC 200

AGC 200

AGC 200

Diesel generator set 1

AGC 200

Diesel generator set 2

Diesel generator set 3

G
Diesel generator set 4

Simple applications with connection to one mains


Area 1

MB 17
Load

TB 17

Busbar
CANbus

AGC 200

G
Diesel generator set 1

AGC 200

G
Diesel generator set 2

AGC 200

G
Diesel generator set 3

Limitations:
In most cases, the rental applications are very simple applications, and therefore there are some limitations
that have to be considered when using the quick setup menu:

DEIF A/S

Page 188 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

It will not be possible to have any AGC 200 bus tie units in the application.
This function is made to facilitate change of a plant configuration without AGC 200 BTB units. Entering the
quick setup menu 9180 via the DU-2 display makes it possible to add or remove a genset without the use of
utility software. It is only possible to do the same basic setup as through the application configuration in the
utility software.
The functions marked with clear text in the screenshots below can be accessed through the quick setup
menu.

DEIF A/S

Page 189 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

8.1.11 9180 Quick setup


9181 Mode
OFF:
When the mode menu is set to OFF, the existing application that is about to have this genset included will
not look for this new genset. This will give the operator time to connect all wiring and to do the basic setup of
the genset.
Setup Plant:
When the mode menu is set to Setup Plant, the new AGC 200 will receive the application configuration from
the other units in the plant. The new AGC 200 will then notify the rest of the application that a new ID is available on the line. If the ID of the new AGC 200 already exists, the new AGC 200 will based on the ID numbers in the application configuration have the highest ID + 1 assigned. This new ID will then be included in
the application configuration in all the other AGC 200 units. During this process, the existing application will
be able to continue running and will not be affected by the upgrade of the system.
The new AGC 200 will automatically go to block mode to ensure that it is in a safe mode. When the setup is
done, the end-user must decide in which running mode the added genset is to run.
If there are already 16 gensets on the CAN line and a new AGC tries to connect to the plant, an
alarm text, No IDs available, will appear.
Setup Stand-alone:
When the mode menu is set to Setup Stand-alone, the AGC 200 will change the application configuration,
so it will no longer be a part of the application. When the ID is removed from the application, the new application will be broadcasted to the other AGC 200 units. The existing gensets in the application will maintain their
ID, as a rearrangement could lead to unnecessary starting and stopping of the gensets.
If the genset that is to be removed is running, it will not be possible/allowed to continue the process until the
genset has stopped. If it is attempted to disconnect, an info text, Quick setup error, will appear.
If Setup Stand-alone is activated when the genset is running, an info text, Quick setup error, will appear.
If an AGC 244 BTB is detected in the application, an indicating alarm, Appl. not possible, will
appear.
Change of plant setup from standard to single DG unit: When disconnecting a standard AGC
200 unit in a system, it is important to change menu 9181, plant setup. After disconnecting, the
AGC 200 unit will become a single DG.
9190 Application broadcast
This function makes it possible to broadcast an application over the CAN line from one AGC 200 to all units
present in the application. It takes one operation to activate the broadcast function. It can be done in two
ways:
1. By sending the application.
2. By sending the application and activating it.
Menu 9191 Enable
OFF: When it is set to OFF, no broadcast will be made.
Broadcast: Broadcast of the selected application in menu 9192 will be sent to the units in the application.
Broadcast + Activate: Broadcast is activated and the application in menu 9192 will be broadcasted and activated in all units.

DEIF A/S

Page 190 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

Menu 9192 Application


Applications 1-4 can be drawn in the utility software.
The following pop-up windows in the utility software will guide you through the broadcast.

8.1.12 Command unit


The power management system is a multi-master system. In a multi-master system, the available generator
units automatically perform the power management control. This means that the system never depends on
only one master unit.
If for instance one unit ID is disabled, and this was the command unit, then the next available unit will take
over the command functions.
The above also applies to the AGC 245/246 mains units in that case the command unit is called Mains
Command Unit (MCU).
The command unit cannot be selected by the operator. It is automatically selected when a power management setting is accessed.

8.1.13 Load-dependent starting and stopping


The purpose of this function is to ensure that sufficient power is always available on the busbar. This means
that the gensets will automatically be started and stopped in order to let only the sufficient number of gensets
run. This optimises the fuel economy and the maintenance intervals.
The load-dependent start/stop function is active when the plant is in AUTO mode. The starting and stopping
of the gensets is automatically carried out according to the adjusted setpoints and priority selection.
The load-dependent start/stop function can be selected as:
Rated power setpoint (P) [kW]
Apparent power setpoint (S) [kVA]
Actual or load percentage value [%]

DEIF A/S

Page 191 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

The load-dependent starting and stopping can be selected to base on either produced power calculation (%)
or available power calculation (P or S).
The easiest way is to use produced power calculation; however, this method is not suited for systems with
three or more generators as regards fuel savings and saving running hours.
Terminology
The table shows the abbreviations used.
Short

Description

Comment

PAVAILABLE

Available power

PTOTAL - PPRODUCED

PTOTAL

Total power

PNOMINAL of running sets with GBs closed

PPRODUCED

Produced power

PNOMINAL

Nominal power

PNOMINAL-STOP

Nominal power of the genset to stop

Priority dependent

Deactivate load-dependent stop:


The load-dependent stop can be deactivated through M-Logic, should this be preferred. This is necessary
e.g. to allow operators to start the factory load after a blackout before the normal load-dependent operation
can be started.
In the example below, the function is activated with terminal 77. Now the operator can switch the load-dependent stop ON or OFF with a switch connected to terminal 78.

Produced power method:


This method is in effect if % power is selected in menu 8880 as basis for the start/stop calculation.
If the load % of a generator exceeds the Start next setpoint, the start sequence of the lowest priority generator in stand-by will be initiated.
If the load % of a generator drops below the Stop next setpoint, the stop sequence of the running generator
with the highest priority number will be initiated.

DEIF A/S

Page 192 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

If the load of the plant decreases so much that the generator with the highest priority number can be stopped
and an available power of at least the stop setpoint in % is available, then the stop sequence of this generator
will be initiated.
kW

500
90

% load

Power produced
% power

Load dep. start

400
300
200
100

10

Load dep. stop

0
-100
-200

Time

1 Load increase
2 Load start delay runs out; PMS start command
3 Stand by genset running and connecting to the busbar

Available power method:


This method is in effect if P [kW] or S [kVA] is selected as basis for the start/stop calculation.
Independent of the selection (P [kW] or S [kVA]), the functionality is basically identical; therefore the example
of the functionality below will be given for the load-dependent start function with selected rated power (P) value.
The apparent power setpoint is typically selected, if the connected load has an inductive character and the
power factor is below 0.7.

DEIF A/S

Page 193 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Description:
This drawing illustrates the terms used.

Nominal power:
The nominal power is the rated power of the genset that can be read on the type plate of the generator.
Total power:
The total power is the summation of the rated nominal power of each individual genset. In the example
above, the plant consists of three DGs:
DG 1 =

1500kW

DG 2 =

1000kW

DG 3 =

1000kW

That is a total of

3500 kW

Produced power:
The produced power is defined as the existing load on the busbar. In the example above, the produced power
is indicated as the hatched area, and the total of the three gensets = 2450 kW.
Available power:
The available power is the difference between the maximum possible power produced by the gensets and the
actual produced power.
In the example above, the plant consists of three gensets, in total 3500 kW. The load consumes 2450 kW in
total. Since the total load PTOTAL is 3500 kW, and the produced load PPRODUCED is 2450 kW, then the
available power PAVAILABLE is 1050 kW, meaning that the gensets can handle this load if it should be added to the busbar.

DEIF A/S

Page 194 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

Principle available power method:


One genset is running and is supplying the load. The load increases which means that the available power/
apparent power decreases. At a certain time, the load has increased so much that only a little amount of power/apparent power is available, and the next priority genset will be started in order to increase the amount of
available power/apparent power.
When the load drops, the available power/apparent power will increase. When the available power/apparent
power has increased above the stop level plus the nominal power of the last priority genset, then the last priority genset will be stopped. Please note that the nominal power of the genset to be stopped is added to the
adjusted stop level. The reason is that otherwise the available power/apparent power would immediately drop
below the start level again.
Example:If the adjusted stop level is 200 kW (PSTOP = 200 kW), and the genset with the last priority is 1000
kW, it is necessary that the available power reaches 1200 kW, because the available power will be reduced
with 1000 kW immediately after the last priority genset is stopped.
Principle percentage method:
One genset is running and is supplying the load. The load increases which means that the % load increases.
At a certain time, the load has increased so much that the load % start will start up the next priority genset in
order to take some of the load.
When the load drops, the produced power will decrease. When the produced power has decreased below the
stop level plus the nominal power of the last priority genset, then the last priority genset will be stopped.
Please note that the nominal power of the genset to be stopped is added to the adjusted stop level. The reason is that otherwise the produced power would immediately drop below the start level again.
Example:If the adjusted stop level is 10% (100 kW produced power), and the genset with the last priority is
1000 kW, it is necessary that the produced power reaches 1100 kW, because the produced power will be
reduced with 1000 kW immediately after the last priority genset is stopped.
Adjusting load-dependent start:
In the example below, the available power is 200 kW. When the load increases, the available power drops
below the start limit. The stand-by genset will start when the start timer runs out, and after the synchronising
the available power increases (in this example to 500 kW).

DEIF A/S

Page 195 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

P-Avail. on busbar

500

Measured P-Avail.
Predicted P-Avail.

400
300
200
Load start limit

100
0

Time

-100
-200

1 Load increase
2 Load start delay runs out; PMS start command
3 Stand by genset running and connecting to the busbar

Adjusting load-dependent stop:


In the example below, the available power is 500 kW. When the load decreases, the available power increases to 750 kW. The AGC 200 now calculates what happens if the last priority genset is stopped. In the example below, the last priority genset is 400 kW which means that it can be stopped, because the available power
will still be above the stop level.
Now the difference between the stop level and the available power is 50 kW. This means that only if the genset, which now has the last priority, is 50 kW, it can be stopped!

700
600
500
400
300
200

Load stop limit

100
0
1

1 Load decreases
2 Load stop delay runs out; PM stop command
3 Last priority genset stopped

DEIF A/S

Page 196 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

If the order of priority is changed, the following must be observed: If the priority does not seem
to change as expected, it is because the load-dependent stop function is not able to stop the
lowest priority after having started the new first priority. That would cause two DGs to be running at low load instead of one DG.
Power window:
The difference between the programmed load-dependent start and stop limits forms the power hysteresis between the start and stop. This is shown in the diagram below:
Available power
at the busbar

Load-depending stop

PDG2

PDG3

PDG2

Load stop
limit

PDG1

PDG3

Load-depending start

Power
window
Load start
limit
1. DG
Start

2. DG
Start

3. DG
Start

3. DG
Stop

2. DG
Stop

Two sets of parameters for load-dependent starting and stopping


There are two sets of parameters for load-dependent starting and stopping. The available parameters are:
Set 1: 8001 to 8015
Set 2: 8301 to 8314
The reason for having two sets of parameters is that in that way the genset can act differently on different
load curves. If, for example, the load increases fast, it is possible to configure a short timer (s) and a low P
(kW) set point, so the genset gets online faster, and the result is that the genset is not overloaded. In another
situation the load will increase slower, and then it is possible to use the other set of set points with a longer
timer (s) and a higher P (kW).
The two sets of set points are always active. When the available power has reached the setpoint the timer
starts, and when the timer runs out the genset starts. See the diagrams below for examples of how the configuration can be done. Be aware that the examples show available power on the BB, and that is why the
curve goes down when the load increases.

DEIF A/S

Page 197 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

Load dependent Start


Example 1

Available power
At the busbar
P (kW)

P1= 75kW (8001)


T1= 8sec (8004)
P2= 50kW (8301)
T2= 1sec (8304)

Available
power curve
T1 start

P1=75kW

T2 start
Start of next
generator

P2= 50kW

Next generator
Online on the BB

Time (s)

T2
T1
The above example 1 shows that timer 1 will start at 75 kW and timer 2 will start at 50 kW, and because timer
2 runs out before timer 1, it is timer 2 that starts the genset.

DEIF A/S

Page 198 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Available power
At the busbar
P (kW)

Load dependent Start


Example 2

P1= 75kW (8001)


T1= 8sec (8004)
P2= 50kW (8301)
T2= 1sec (8304)

Available
power curve
T1 start

Start of next
generator

Next generator
Online on BB

P1=75kW

P2= 50kW

Time (s)

T1

The above example 2 shows that timer 1 will start at 75kW, and when timer 1 runs out the genset will start.
Timer 2 will not be started, because the load does not go under 50 kW (P2).
The diagrams above show load-dependent start; the principle for load-dependent stop is the
same.
Be aware that it is only set 1 (parameters 8001 to 8015) that can be used for the "fuel optimisation" function.

8.1.14 Load management


The function is used to activate a relay when a specific amount of power is available. The purpose of this
function is to be able to connect load groups when the gensets of the emergency power plant are running.
In each of the gensets, five levels can be adjusted (menus 8220-8260):
Available power 1
Available power 2

DEIF A/S

Page 199 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

Available power 3
Available power 4
Available power 5
These setpoints can activate a relay when the specific amount of available power is reached. The relay output can be used to connect load groups when sufficient power is available. The relays will activate when the
available power is higher than the setpoint, but be aware that when the load groups are being connected, the
available power will decrease and the relay(s) deactivate again if the available power is below the setpoint.
So it is necessary to make an external holding circuit.
The number of available relays is limited.
The function is not depending on the running modes. The relays will activate in all modes including block. To
avoid activation, e.g. when the genset is stopped, the inhibit function should be used.
It is possible to adjust different levels of available power in all gensets. This gives the possibility to use several load groups if this is necessary.

DEIF A/S

Page 200 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

Example: In the example below, generator #1 is started, followed by generator #2. The simplified diagram
shows the two gensets and two load groups that are being connected by the available power relays R1 and
R2 on the first AGC 200.

Trip load group 1

Load
Group 1

Trip load group 2

K1

R1

K2

R2

K1

R1

K2

R2

Multi-line 2

G
Diesel generator set 1

Load
Group 2

Multi-line 2

G
Diesel generator set 2

Functionality description: (refer to the diagram below)


The generator #1 is started, and the timer t1 starts running when the GB1 closes. When the t1 has expired,
the selected relay activates (R1) and in the example, a 200 kW load group is connected. Now the available
power falls to 300 kW. After some time, the generator #2 is started and its generator breaker is synchronised.
When the GB2 closes, the timer t2 runs. When the timer t2 expires, the selected relay activates (R2) and the
second load group of 200 kW is connected. Now the available power falls to 600 kW.

DEIF A/S

Page 201 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

PAVAIL
kW

1000

t2

800
t1

600
400

R1

GB2 ON

GB1 ON

200

R2

To connect the load groups, individual relays can be selected on each AGC 200 or on one of the AGC 200
units only

8.1.15 Load sharing


When the power management communication is running, the load sharing between the gensets is done by
using the CANbus communication between the AGC 200 units.
If the power management CANbus line is disconnected or faulty, the AGC 200 units do not automatically
switch over to analogue load sharing or CAN share. This has to be set up in M-Logic with the following commands:
M-Logic output command

Description

Use alternative LS instead of PM

Now the load sharing continues using CAN share. This means that the power
management will be lost, but the gensets already running will stay stable.

Enable analogue LS

Now the load sharing continues based on the IOM 230 module (analogue load
sharing). This means that the power management will be lost, but the gensets
already running will stay stable.

"Use alternative LS instead of PM" and "Enable


analogue LS"

With both enabled, the load sharing will switch to analogue LS if CAN share
fails. This means that if power management fails, and both of the mentioned
M-Logic commands are/become active, the analogue load sharing will be prioritised first.

About analogue load sharing, please refer to the application notes IOM 200 analogue interface
for AGC 200, document no. 4189340614, for details.

DEIF A/S

Page 202 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

Delay, step 5

Delay, step 4

Delay, step 3

Delay, step 2

Power [kWh]

Delay, step 1

8.1.16 Island ramp-up with load steps

CAN load share setpoint

One step before the


load share setpoint is
reached the ramp up
function is switched off

Power ramp [%/s]

Time [sec]
Standard load
sharing

Ramp up, read


from load share
line

GB closed

Delay, step 5

Delay, step 4

Delay, step 3

Delay, step 2

Power [kWh]

Delay, step 1

8.1.17 Fixed power ramp-up with load steps

Stop signal

Power Set point

Power ramp
[%/s]

DEIF A/S

Ramp down

Time [sec]
Ramp up, read
From load share
line

GB closed

Page 203 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

When menu 2614 is enabled, the power setpoint continues to rise in ramp-up steps, determined by menu
2615, towards the load sharing setpoint. The delay time between each ramp-up step will be determined by
menu 2613. The ramp-up will continue until the load sharing setpoint is reached and then switch the regulator
to standard load sharing mode. If the delay point is set to 20% and the number of load steps is set to three,
the genset will ramp to 20%, wait the configured delay time, ramp to 40%, wait, ramp to 60%, wait and then
ramp to the system setpoint. If the setpoint is at 50%, the ramp will stop at 50%.

8.1.18 Freeze power ramp


A way to define the ramp-up steps is to use the freeze power ramp command in M-Logic.
Freeze power ramp active:
1. The power ramp will stop at any point of the ramp, and this setpoint will be kept as long as the function is
active.
2. If the function is activated while ramping from one delay point to the other, the ramp will be fixed until the
function is deactivated again.
3. If the function is activated while the delay timer is timing out, the timer will be stopped and will not continue until the function is deactivated again.

8.1.19 ATS applications


Two possibilities are available: The mains unit can either be installed or not installed.
AGC 200 mains installed:
In an AMF application, the AGC 200 mains will normally operate the mains breaker and thereby make sure
that the supply is coming from the mains if this is healthy.
This function allows the AGC 200 to be used in an application where an automatic transfer switch is installed.
This is known as an ATS.
In the applications shown as one-line diagrams in the chapter Functional description it can be seen that the
ATS will take care of the switching between the generator supply and the mains supply.

If ATS is selected, the AGC 200 has no control over the ATS (mains breaker).

Description:
Normally, the AGC 200 detects a mains failure based on the voltage and frequency measurement on the
mains. However, when ATS is selected in menu 7085 it is necessary to use a digital input together with the
position feedbacks from the ATS. Thus, the mains failure is not detected by the AGC 200 measurements, but
by the following two requirements:
1. Alternative start input ON
2. ATS (MB) feedback OFF
To make the AGC 200 detect a mains failure, the alternative start input has to be ON and the MB OFF feedback has to be active.

The input used as Alternative start function is configured in the PC utility software (USW).

DEIF A/S

Page 204 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

The mains unit will not try to operate the ATS (mains breaker) at all. But it is still necessary that position feedbacks are wired up.
It is possible to have a tie breaker installed. This is useful if more gensets need to be started before supplying
the load, because the tie breaker will not close until the required number of gensets is available.
ATS island mode:
If this application is needed, the gensets can be started by activating the auto start/stop input. The gensets
will be started and stopped according to the power demand. That is, they will operate in load-dependent start/
stop mode.

Be aware that since no tie breaker is installed, it is important that the first genset to close on
the busbar can carry the load. If the load is too high, the genset will be overloaded.
This application can be combined with the multi-start function.

8.1.20 Fail class


The fail classes are still valid when the power management is active. In addition to these fail classes, the
safety stop can be used in the AGC 200 units with power management.
This means that when a trip + stop alarm occurs, the faulty genset will stay on the busbar until the next priority genset is started and synchronised to the bus. When the incoming genset has taken the load, the faulty
genset will ramp down the power, followed by trip of the breaker, cooling down of the engine and finally stop.
If the faulty genset has the last priority, or no stand-by gensets are available, then it will stay on the busbar
and will not trip.
If no genset can start in a safety stop situation, then the faulty genset will not be stopped.
Therefore it is important that the safety stop is backed up, e.g. by a trip and stop alarm or a
shutdown alarm.

8.1.21 Local/remote/timer operation


The plant can be adjusted to local, remote or timer operation (menu 8021). This selection is done in the command unit, i.e. one of the generator units.
The setting defines how the plant is started while it is in AUTO mode.
The settings can be changed in M-Logic and via display or PC utility software.
Display

Utility SW(parameter setup)

M-Logic

Local

Remote start

Timer start

DEIF A/S

Page 205 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

The purpose of the selection is to decide whether the plant can be started from the display (local operator),
from remote (e.g. PLC) or by an internal timer. Remote means that the control can be carried out by activating the digital input or through Modbus communication.
Local selection:
All operation is carried out on the display. In island operation, any generator unit display can be used, and in
load takeover, mains power export and fixed power, the mains unit display must be used. The plant mode
must be AUTO.
Remote selection:
The plant is started using the digital input auto start/stop when remote is selected.
Island mode:
In island mode, the auto start/stop input on any of the AGC 200 units can be used to start the plant. However, DEIF recommends to wire up the auto start/stop input to all of the AGC 200 units to be sure that the
automatic operation is able to continue even though one of the DGs is taken out for service (power supply
disconnected to the AGC 200).
In island mode, any running mode (MAN, AUTO, SEMI, BLOCK) can be selected on the generator units, and
the remote start signal is still working for the remaining AGC 200 which is still in AUTO mode.
Parallel to mains mode
In load takeover, mains power export and fixed power mode, the auto start/stop input on the mains unit
must be used to start the plant.
Plant operation:
The table shows how the plant is started:
Plant mode\ Selection

Local

Remote

Island mode

Display on generator units

Auto start/stop on gen. units

Fixed power mode

Display on mains unit

Auto start/stop on mains unit

Mains power export

Display on mains unit

Auto start/stop on mains unit

Load takeover

Display on mains unit

Auto start/stop on mains unit

In peak shaving and AMF, the automatic operation starts automatically depending on the imported power (peak shaving) or mains failures (AMF).
Timer selection:
The operation of the plant is controlled by up to eight internal command timers which are programmed using
the PC utility software (USW). The function can be used in load takeover, mains power export and fixed power, and the mains unit has to be in auto.

DEIF A/S

Page 206 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Principle
Start

Local

Timer mode
No

Remote

Yes

Yes

No
Plant running

Yes

Yes

Timer ON

No
No

No
Stop plant

Timer ON
Yes
Start plant

Yes
Local mode

Remote mode
No

Plant running
Yes
No

No

Yes

Press start
button

Plant running
No

Yes

Press stop
button

Start plant

Yes

Auto
start/stop
ON

No

No

Auto
start/stop
ON

Yes

Yes

Stop plant

Start plant

Stop plant

8.1.22 Multi-starting gensets


The multi-start function can be used to determine the number of gensets to start. This means that when the
start sequence is initiated through push-button, digital input or automatic start, then the adjusted numbers of
gensets will start.This function is typically used for example together with applications where a certain number
of gensets is required to supply the load.
Example: In an AMF application with a tie breaker, the tie breaker must not close before the maximum power
is available (power capacity set point).

The multi-start function is adjusted in channel 8922-8926.


Multi-start configuration:
The multi-start function can be adjusted to operate with two different settings. These settings consist of set
points for how many gensets to start and the minimum number of running gensets.
It is possible to switch between the settings using M-Logic or in the channel 8924.

DEIF A/S

Page 207 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Set point 1

Set point 2

Multi-start (numbers to start)

8922

8925

Min. no. running

8923

8926

Default setting:
Start condition

Set point 1

Set point 2

Default setting of DGs to start

Emergency operation

Mains failure

Start all DGs

Normal operation

No mains failure

Auto calculate

The default setting of the selection between set point 1 and set point 2 is made, so the set point 1 is adjusted
to Auto calculation and is used in all modes except AMF. Set point 2 will automatically be selected in case a
mains failure occurs (this is adjusted in M-Logic). Set point 2 is adjusted to 16 gensets, which means that all
available gensets will start when the mains failure occurs.

The default setting can be changed, if convenient.


Numbers to start:
The numbers to start (channel 8922/8925) can be selected depending on the number of DGs available. The
load-dependent start and stop function will be active, as soon as the generator breakers are closed or, if a tie
breaker is installed, as soon as the tie breaker is closed. It is possible to adjust the number of gensets, or an
auto calculation can be selected.
If it is needed to delay the load-dependent start and stop function, it can be done through the
M-Logic function.
Auto calculation
When auto calculation is selected, the sufficient number of gensets will be started as soon as the start command is given. This is not depending on the plant mode.
Example:
In a four DG plant, each generator is rated with 1000 kW. The set point for load-dependent start (channel
8001) is adjusted to 100 kW. If a start command is given in fixed power mode and the set point is 2000 kW,
then three gensets will be started immediately and the fourth genset will remain stopped. Three gensets will
be started because two gensets are required to supply the load (2*1000 = 2000 kW), and the load-dependent
start function requests the third genset.

DEIF A/S

Page 208 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Minimum numbers running:


The multi-starting function can be combined with the setting of a minimum number of running gensets (channel 8923/8926). This means that the load-dependent stop function is disregarded when only the specific number of gensets is running. This is also the situation, even though the load would justify a load-dependent stop.
"Numbers to start" (channel 8922/8925) and "Minimum numbers running" (channel 8923/8926)
are available for all modes.

8.1.23 Priority selection


It is possible to use one of three types of priority selection.
Manual
The manual selection gives a possibility to adjust the order of priority between the adjusted numbers of available DGs. This means that each genset always has a specific priority setting.
The adjustment is made in the menus 8080 (P1-P5), 8090 (P6-P11) and 8100 (P12-P16). In this example, the
order of priority is DG3, DG1, DG2, DG4.
Priority

Genset

Menu 8081

P1

Menu 8082

P2

Menu 8083

P3

Menu 8084

P4

DG1

DG2

DG3

DG4

X
X
X
X

These settings are only adjusted in the generator units. After the adjustment, the order of priority must be transmitted manually to the other gensets using the transmit function in menu
8086.

Running hours:
The purpose of the priority selection based on running hours is to let all the gensets have the same or nearly
the same amount of running hours.
Every time the adjusted period in menu 8111 is reached, a new order of priority is determined and the gensets with first priorities will be started (if not already running), and the gensets with the last priorities will stop.
There are two possibilities of operating the priority routine based on the running hours: Absolute or relative.
The selection between the absolute and relative routine defines whether the offset adjustment of the running
hours is taken into consideration in the priority calculation. The offset adjustment is used for example when
the AGC 200 is installed on an old genset which already has many running hours, or if an AGC 200 is replaced.
Absolute running hours:
All gensets participate in the priority routine based on the principle shown in the table below. This means that
the gensets with the lowest number of running hours will be running. This can be a disadvantage, for instance
if the application consists of old gensets together with new gensets. In that situation, the new gensets will be
the first priorities until they have reached the same number of running hours as the old gensets. To avoid this,
the priority routine called relative running hours can be used instead.
The actual number of running hours is adjusted in each AGC 200 in menus 6101 and 6102, typically at the
commissioning. The purpose of the menu is to have the correct number of running hours displayed.

DEIF A/S

Page 209 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Relative running hours:


When relative is selected, all gensets will participate in the priority routine independently of the number of running hours adjusted in menus 6101 and 6102. This means that all gensets in AUTO mode participate in the
priority routine. The relative selection gives a possibility of resetting the priority routine.
When the reset is activated in menu 8113, the relative running hour counters in the AGC 200 units will be
reset to 0 hours, and at the next priority selection, the calculation is based on the reset values.
Principle for priority routine:
The principle for the priority routine is described in the following table where the running hours (menu 8111)
are adjusted to 24 hours. In this example, only one genset is required by the load.
DG1(int. ID
3)

DG2(int. ID
2)

DG3(int. ID
4)

DG4(int. ID
1)

Comment

Mon day

1051 h

1031 h

1031 h

1079 h

DG2 will start due to the


lowest internal ID number

Tuesday

24

1051 h

1055 h

1031 h

1079 h

DG 3 will be started, and


DG2 will be stopped

Wednesday

48

1051 h

1055 h

1055 h

1079 h

DG1 will be started, and


DG3 will be stopped

Thursday

72

1075 h

1055 h

1055 h

1079 h

DG2 will be started due to


the lowest internal ID number, and DG1 will be stopped

Friday

96

1075 h

1079 h

1055 h

1079 h

DG3 will be started, and DG


2 will be stopped

Saturday

120

1075 h

1079 h

1079 h

1079 h

DG1 will be started, and


DG3 will be stopped

Sunday

144

1099 h

1079 h

1079 h

1079 h

DG4 will be started due to


the lowest internal ID number and so on

The time adjusted in menu 8111 is the time between each priority calculation.
Fuel optimisation:
The purpose of the fuel optimisation routine is to always let the gensets run in the best combination at any
given load, based on their actual nominal powers.
The settings are adjusted in the command unit.

The multi-start function cannot be used together with the fuel optimising routine.

Description:
The function is set up in the following menus:

DEIF A/S

Page 210 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Menu
number

Menu text

Description

Comment

8171

Set point

Load with best fuel


economy (% of
PNOM)

The units will optimise around this genset load

8172

Swap set
point

Initiate optimising

The improvement in nominal power must be better


than this set point to initiate fuel optimising

8173

Delay

Time delay

Optimal combination must be present during this period before optimising is initiated

8174

Hour

Running hours

Maximum allowed difference in running hours

8175

Enable

Activate running
hours

Activates the dependency of the running hours

The function is best described with an example. An example with three DGs is shown below.
DG1 = 1000 kW
DG2 = 1000 kW
DG3 = 500 kW
Settings used in the fuel optimising function in this example:
8011 Load-dependent stop = 220 kW
8171 Set point = 100 %
8172 Swap set point = 200 kW
Situation 1:
The two 1000 kW gensets must operate. The load is too big for one 1000 kW and one 500 kW genset.
Situation 2:
Since the load has decreased to 1400 kW, it would be enough with one 1000 kW and one 500 kW genset.
The improvement is 500 kW which is better than 200 kW (menu 8172). The problem is that only 100 kW
would be available. The load-dependent stop requires 220 kW available, so no swapping can take place.
Situation 3:
Now the load has decreased to 1300 kW. It would be enough with one 1000 kW and one 500 kW genset. The
improvement is 500 kW which is better than 200 kW (menu 8172). The problem is that only 200 kW would be
available. The load-dependent stop requires 220 kW available, so no swapping can take place.
Situation 4:
Now the load has decreased to 1200 kW. It would be enough with one 1000 kW and one 500 kW genset. The
improvement is 500 kW which is better than 200 kW (menu 8172). This means that 300 kW would be available, so the load-dependent stop does not interfere with the fuel optimising.
Fuel optimising is initiated!
Situation 5:
Now DG3 has been started and is running with 400 kW. This is the best combination at this time, and no
swapping takes place with this load.

DEIF A/S

Page 211 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

The set point (menu 8171) in percent is typically set to 80 to 85 % for optimum fuel economy.

Running hours:
It is possible to combine the fuel optimising with the running hours. This is enabled in menu 8175. If this setting is OFF, the fuel optimising will be active but the running hours will not be included in the calculation.
If the function running hours is enabled, the principle is the following: If one genset reaches the adjusted
amount of running hours, then it will be given quarantine. This means that it will just rest until it has the lowest
number of running hours. The only exception to this is if there is no alternative combination. Then it will be
used, but it will still be in quarantine.

DEIF A/S

Page 212 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

8.1.24 Conditional connection of heavy consumers


Each diesel generator unit is able to handle two heavy consumers (HC). When a heavy consumer is requested, the function for conditional connection of heavy consumers reserves the programmed HC requested value (parameter 8201/8211) on the busbar and blocks for engagement of the heavy consumer until sufficient
predicted available power is present at the busbar.
Available power on busbar
kVA

HC request
value

700 kw

kW

625

500

500

400

375

300

250

200

125

100

-125

-100

-250

-200

Consumed power
Available power

Time

DG2 start
delay

HC ackn
delay

DG2 stop
delay

HC running

HC request value: 375 kVA


HC nominal load: 150 kW
DG nominal power: 500 kW
Cos phi: 0.8
Load-dep. start value 90%
Load-dep. stop value 70%

1 Request HC
2 Connect DG2
3 Acknowledge HC
4 Disable request HC
5 Disconnect DG2

When the available power is above the requested HC power, the heavy consumer is subsequently blocked
until the programmed HC acknowledge delay runs out (fixed delay of 4 sec.).
The DELAY ACK. HC may be necessary in order to allow the recently started generator set to take load and
thus actually increase the available power at the busbar before engagement of the HC.
The heavy consumers (HCs) are connected according to their priority. This means that if two or more heavy
consumers request start acknowledgement at the same time, the HC with the highest priority is handled first,
and subsequently HCs with lower priority, etc.
HC 1.1 (1st HC in DG unit with CAN ID no. 1) is designated the highest priority. This means that HC 1.1 is
handled before HC 1.2, and HC 2.1 is handled before HC 2.2 if they are requested for start at the same time.
If there are any preferential HCs, they must be connected to the hardware interface for the 1st HC in order to
ensure first priority handling.
The power management system carries out the following systematic sequence when a heavy consumer is
requested for start
a) The programmed HC n REQ. VALUE is reserved at the busbar (parameter 8201/8211).
b) A PMS start command is transmitted to the next stand-by generator set if the predicted available power is
below the programmed LOAD START LIMIT.

DEIF A/S

Page 213 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

c) When sufficient available power is present at the busbar, the timer DELAY ACK. HC n starts running
(fixed delay time of 4 sec.).
d) The start acknowledge signal is transmitted to the HC in question when the timer DELAY ACK. HC n runs
out and sufficient available power is still measured at the busbar.
e) The nominal HC power value (parameter 8202/8212) is used for load-dependent start/stop calculation after
the acknowledge signal is given.
Power feedback from the heavy consumer
The AGC 200 is able to handle two types of power feedback:
Binary feedback
Analogue feedback
The two types of power feedback signals are handled the same way by the conditional connection of heavy
consumers function.
Changing the power feedback type is done by a parameter (8203/8213) in each generator unit.
Activating the corresponding start request binary input activates the HC engagement sequence. The AGC
200 system transmits a start acknowledge signal when sufficient predicted available power is present at the
busbar.
HC with binary power feedback signal:
Start request HC 1
375 kVA

Nom. power HC 1

188 kVA

0 kVA
300 kW
Power reservation
at the busbar

150 kW

P-avail. OK
"Delay ACK. HC1"

Start acknowledge HC1

HC 1 fixed load
Time

Engagement sequence for HCs with fixed load


The power reservation by means of the feedback HCx fixed load input is enabled as long as the start request signal is active. An OFF status (indicates that the HC is not operating) of the power feedback signal
results in a 100% power reservation at the busbar.
An ON status (indicates that the HC is operating) at the power feedback signal results in a 0% power reservation at the busbar. HC with analogue power feedback signal:

DEIF A/S

Page 214 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Start request HC 1

Nom. power HC 1

0 kVA
Request value 300 kW
Power reservation
at the busbar

Nom.
power HC 1 100%
75%
50%
25%

P-avail.OK

Start acknowledge HC1

HC 1 fixed load
4..20 mA

100%
75%
50%
25%

Time

The analogue power feedback for the heavy consumer is intended for a power transducer with a 4-20 mA
output corresponding to 0-100% load. If the heavy consumer is of 400 kW, the power transducer has to be
calibrated to 0-400 kW = 4-20 mA, and the setting has to be set at 400 kW

8.1.25 Ground relay


The purpose of this function is to always let the star point of only one genset be connected to ground during
island mode operation. The reason for this is to avoid circulating currents between the generators. The function is adjusted in menu 8120.
If the gensets nominal power (Pnom) are equal, the AGC which has the first priority will activate its ground
relay when Hz/V is inside the acceptable range (menu 2111 + 2112). Should this genset stop when other
gensets are connected, it will open its ground relay when the generator breaker opens. The ground relay of
the generator which now has the next priority will close its ground relay instead. In case only one genset is
connected to the busbar and the breaker is tripped, it will keep the ground relay closed as long as the voltage/
frequency is ok.
If any gensets with higher Pnom. (menu 60xx) are going to connect to the busbar, the ground relay of the
running genset with first priority will deactivate, and the incoming genset will instead close its grounding relay.
Ground relay with breaker position:
It is possible to use position feedbacks from the ground relay, they can be selected in the input list:

DEIF A/S

Page 215 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

Ground relay failure


Three alarms are related to the position of the ground breaker/relay. The handling of the alarm depends on
the chosen fail class, e.g. tripping the generator breaker.
Name

Description

Parameter number

Gnd Open fail

Used for ground relay open failure with related fail class.

8131

Gnd Close fail

Used for ground relay close failure with related fail class

8132

Gnd Pos fail

Used for ground relay position failure with related fail class

8133

The relay for this function is selected in each AGC unit.


The ground relay function will NOT be supported in a "Single DG" application, even if the unit
has power management.

8.1.26 Stop of non-connected gensets


If peak shaving is selected and the imported power increases above the start setpoint, the genset(s) will start.
If the load now drops below the start setpoint, it will remain disconnected from the busbar but will not stop,
because the imported power is higher than the stop setpoint.
The function stop of non-connected DGs (menu 8140) will make sure that the gensets stop after the adjusted time.
In other modes, the generator will also be stopped if it is in automatic without the GB closed.

8.1.27 Secured mode


Secured mode adds an extra generator to the power management system. This means that one genset more
than calculated in load-dependent start will be running.
It is only possible to activate secured mode if the genset is in auto mode.
Secured mode can be activated/deactivated by means of digital inputs or via M-Logic.
The extra generator running in secured mode will be selected, so it is possible to replace the
largest running generator if this should fail.

DEIF A/S

Page 216 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

8.1.28 Base load


One genset unit in a power management system can be selected as running with base load (2952). This can
be done from the display unit, via M-Logic or via a binary input. If the unit is selected to run with base load,
the status message FIXED POWER will be indicated. The fixed power value can be adjusted with parameter 2951.

If a generator runs in base load and the total load decreases to a point below the base load setpoint, the system will lower the fixed power setpoint. This is to prevent frequency control problems, as the generator running in base load does not participate in the frequency control.
When the generator breaker is closed, the generator power will be increased to the fixed power setpoint.
If AVR control is selected, the setpoint will be the adjusted power factor.

The unit selected for base load operation will automatically be set in SEMI-AUTO. Only one
generator per independent busbar can run with base load.
The busbar has to be active with one or more DG units running, before the unit with the lowest
ID can activate base load.
Only one AGC 200 unit at a time can run in base load. The unit with the lowest ID will be allowed to run in base load.

8.1.29 Asymmetric load sharing (LS)


When asymmetric LS is enabled in menu 8282, the normal G5 load sharing is deactivated in all AGC 200
units in the system. The AGC 200 units will then load share according to the asymmetric LS setpoint in menu
8281.

DEIF A/S

Page 217 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Example: Four DGs able to produce 2800 kW each as nominal power. Asymmetric LS setpoint = 90%. Load
on the busbar is 3030 kW.
The generator with priority 01 will start up first, taking 90% of the load = 2727 kW. The generator with priority
02 will take the rest of the load = 303 kW.

kW

Total load on busbar = 3030 kW


Loadshare
90 %
setpoint P01

2727

Remaining
10 %
load P02

303
DG 1

DG 2

DG 3

DG 4

If the asymmetric LS setpoint in menu 8281 kW value is higher than the nominal power of the
generators, the whole system will switch back to symmetric.

8.1.30 Tie breaker configuration


The AGC 246 can be used with a tie breaker, i.e. a breaker connected between the gensets and the load bus.
Tie breaker selection
In menu 8191, the tie breaker can be selected to be ON (present) or OFF (not present).
Tie breaker control
It can be selected whether the tie breaker should be open or closed when the generators are stopped. This
depends on the application and the auxiliaries. If auxiliary load is connected to the generator bus, the tie
breaker must be closed, but if no load is connected to the generator bus, then the tie breaker is often preferred to be open when the generators are stopped.
The tie breaker will open or close depending on the setting in the menu 8191 (Tie breaker enable).
The tie breaker only opens or closes depending on the selection in menu 8191, and it is not
depending on the selected mode whether it should open or close.
Tie breaker open point
If the gensets are running parallel to mains and the mains breaker trips, e.g. due to a mains failure, it can be
necessary to trip the tie breaker as well.
This depends on the total nominal power of the running gensets. If the gensets cannot supply the amount of
load which is adjusted in the tie breaker open point menu 8192, then the tie breaker will open. It will close
again when the power capacity setpoint menu 8193 is reached.

DEIF A/S

Page 218 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

This delay time can be used to trip non essential load groups.
Example: In the example illustrated below it is shown that the tie breaker will trip if DG1 or DG2 is connected
to the load, because they are smaller than 510 kW. If DG1 and DG2 are running together, the tie breaker will
also trip, because the total nominal power is still below 510 kW. If, however, DG3 is running alone or together
with one of the two smaller DGs, then the tie breaker will not trip, because the total nominal power will be
higher than 510 kW.
Trip No trip
DG 3 = 600 kW
DG 2 = 250 kW
DG 1 = 250 kW

Tie breaker open point = 510 kW

The powers mentioned above are nominal powers of the gensets in the application.
It is possible to deload the tie breaker semi-auto mode with the M-Logic command "Act TB deload".
Power capacity:
The power capacity setting in menu 8193 is used in AMF applications to determine how much power must be
available, before the tie breaker can close. When the gensets are started, the generator breakers will close
and when sufficient power is available, the tie breaker will be closed.
Power capacity overrule: In case some of the generators fail to start and the power capacity setpoint is not
reached, the tie breaker will never be closed. Because of this, it is possible to overrule the power capacity
setpoint after a period of time set in menu 8194. The function power capacity overrule is enabled in menu
8195.

DEIF A/S

Page 219 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

8.1.31 Island application with TB


Area 1

Load

TB 17

Busbar
CANbus

AGC 200

G
Diesel generator set 1

AGC 200

G
Diesel generator set 2

AGC 200

G
Diesel generator set 3

A tie breaker in the mains unit can be operated in an island application. It is controlled in the same way as in
the AMF situation described above. The power capacity setpoint menu 8193 is used to ensure that the generators produce enough power to take the load. This is done to protect the generators from going into overload.

8.1.32 Configurable CAN IDs


CAN IDs can be configured as desired, as a mix of DG, mains and BTB units:
16 gensets IDs 1-16
Mains ID 17
8 bus tie breakers IDs 33-40
This makes a total of 24 CAN IDs.

DEIF A/S

Page 220 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

8.1.33 CAN flags


16 CAN flags can be accessed in M-Logic. They can be used in the same way as digital inputs. CAN flags
can be set active when a CAN command is sent from one unit to another. The benefit is that no wire is needed, as the CAN flags are activated via the G5 CANbus.

DEIF A/S

Page 221 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

Example:
CAN cmd 01 will be active when DG 5 is running. All units in the power management system will receive CAN input 01 active and then be able to act on this information.
Only use of constant signals from digital inputs or AOP buttons can activate the CAN inputs.
AOP buttons are pulse inputs, so a latch function must be made to make similar functionality
as constant signals.

8.1.34 Common PF control


A common PF value can be set in menu 7052, and menu 7053 can be set to either Inductive or Capacitive. To activate the common PF control, menu 7054 must be enabled. These setpoints can only be handled
from the AGC 200 mains unit and then sent through the power management CANbus to all the DG units in
the system. The DG units will then adjust their individual PF control according to the received setpoint

Inductive/capacitive setpoints can be set up from M-Logic.

DEIF A/S

Page 222 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

8.1.35 Parameter lists, common settings


Power management relates to the parameters 2250, 2260, 2270, 2761, 2950, 6071, 6400, 7011-7014,
7041-7044, 7051-7054, 7061-7084, 7531-7536, 7871-7873, 8000-8120, 8170-8175, 8181-8195, 8201-8213,
8220-8225, 8230-8272, 8280-8282, 8880-8882, 9160, 9170, 9180-9186 and 9190-9192.
For further information, please see the separate Parameter List:
AGC 200 document number 4189340605.

8.2 Multiple mains


The AGC 200 can be used in an application with multiple mains incomers. Each application can handle:
0 to 16 mains in the same application
0 to 16 gensets in the same application
0 to eight bus tie breakers
The CAN IDs will be distributed in the following way: Gensets 1 to 16, Mains 17 to 32 and BTBs 33 to 40.
This is an example of the multiple mains application:

DEIF A/S

Page 223 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Mains 1

Power management

Mains 2

Mains 3
CANbus

Mains
breaker 1

Mains
breaker 2

AGC 245

Consumers

Mains
breaker 3

AGC 245

Consumers

AGC 246

Consumers

Tie
breaker 3

Bus tie
breaker 1

Bus tie
breaker 3

Bus tie
breaker 2
CANbus

AGC 244

CANbus

AGC 244

AGC 242

AGC 244

G
Diesel generator set 1

DEIF A/S

Page 224 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

8.2.1 Definitions
A multiple mains application consists of feeders and generators plus a number of GBs, TBs, BTBs and MBs.

Sections
The application consists of static and dynamic sections if one or more BTBs are installed. The definition of a
section is given in the table below.

DEIF A/S

Page 225 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

Section

Definition

Static section

Part of the total application which is separated by one or two open BTBs. There will be no
closed BTBs within this section.
A static section can also be a dynamic section, but not vice versa.

Dynamic section

Part of the total application which is separated by one or two open BTBs. There may be
one or more closed BTBs within this section.

If no BTBs are installed, the application consists of a static section only.

Only use remote start signal in island application with BTB units.
The diagram below shows the different section types - a static section to the left and a dynamic section to the
right. If BTB 34 opens, the dynamic section will be divided into two static sections, because there are no further BTBs to open. If BTBs 33 and 34 are closed, the application will consist of one dynamic section.

Area 1

Area 2

MB 17

MB 18
Load

Load

TB 17

TB 18

BTB 33

BTB 34

Busbar

GB 1

GB 2

G
Diesel generator set 1

DEIF A/S

G
Diesel generator set 2

Busbar

GB 3

G
Diesel generator set 3

Page 226 of 324

Power management

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

8.2.2 Plant mode handling


Basically, six menus are available for setting up the functionality of the application.
No.

Setting

Min. setting

Max. setting

Factory setting

8181

MB failure start

Enable

OFF

ON

OFF

8182

Parallel

Enable

OFF

ON

OFF

8183

No break transfer

Enable

OFF

ON

OFF

8184

Auto switch

Enable

OFF

8185

Run type

Run one/all mains

Run all mains

Run one mains

Run one mains

8186

Run type

ID to run

17

32

17

Static

Dynamic

All

OFF

MB failure start:
This setting determines whether a start of the DGs should be executed if an MB close failure occurs.
If "MB failure start" is activated, the mode shift functionality will automatically be enabled.
In peak shaving, fixed power, mains power export and load takeover, the function is only active
when menu 7081 "Mode shift" is set to ON.
MB parallel:
This setting determines whether the mains connections (MBs) should be able to run in parallel or not.
The setting of "MB parallel" affects the function of the "Auto switch" setting.
No break transfer:
This setting determines whether switching between the mains connections (MBs) should be executed as a
black coupling or a synchronised coupling.
If the TBs in a section are adjusted to normally closed and "MB parallel" is switched OFF, then only one of the
TBs can be closed at the time.
The system will try to keep the ID selected in menu 8186 ("My ID to Run") to keep its TB closed. If, however,
the selected ID does not have a TB configured as a normally closed breaker, or if it fails to close it, it will be
the mains unit holding the lowest ID without TB failures present that will close.
If "My ID to Run" is changed during operation, then the MB parallel setting will decide whether a black or a
synchronised changeover will take place.
If "MB parallel" is activated, the "No break transfer" will automatically be enabled.
Auto switch:
This setting determines whether a mains unit detecting a mains failure will try to get the connected load supplied by another mains or by the available DGs.

DEIF A/S

Page 227 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Power management

Description
OFF

The auto switch functionality is switched OFF.

Static section

The backup power is recovered within its own static section.

Dynamic section

The backup power is recovered within its own dynamic section.


The application will never try to synchronise/close a BTB to get help in an AMF situation.

All sections

The backup power is recovered within all available sections.

Sections are divided by bus tie breakers. If no BTBs are installed, then the settings static/dynamic/all have the same auto switch function.
If dynamic is selected, then please be aware that one mains unit will be requested to carry all
load from the dynamic section without any help from the DGs.
Therefore, the remaining mains feeders must be able to carry the load from the entire section.
Run type:
This setting determines how the system in a dynamic section reacts in all the plant modes except island and
AMF.
Description
Run one
mains

Only one mains breaker is allowed to be closed at the


time.

Comment
"My ID to Run" (menu 8186) determines which mains feeder
is allowed to operate parallel to the mains.
If other TBs are closed, they will be tripped in order to only
have the TB of "My ID to Run" closed.
If no TB is available in the section, the MB will be tripped
(causing a blackout).

Run all
mains

All mains breakers are allowed to be closed at the


time.

This setting can be handled from M-Logic.

DEIF A/S

Page 228 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

9. Additional functions
9.1 Additional functions
9.1.1 Start functions
The unit will start the genset when the start command is given. The start sequence is deactivated when the
remove starter event occurs or when the running feedback is present.
The reason for having two possibilities of deactivating the start relay is to be able to delay the alarms with run
status
Please refer to chapter 4 for detailed information about start sequence.
If it is not possible to activate the run status alarms at low revolutions, the remove starter function must be
used.
An example of a critical alarm is the oil pressure alarm. Normally, it is configured according to the shutdown
fail class. But if the starter motor has to disengage at 400 RPM, and the oil pressure does not reach a level
above the shutdown setpoint before 600 RPM, then, obviously, the genset would shut down if the specific
alarm was activated at the preset 400 RPM. In that case, the running feedback must be activated at a higher
number of revolutions than 600 RPM
RPM

RPM

1000
600

Running

Oil pressure

Remove starter

400

Digital feedbacks
If an external running relay is installed, the digital control inputs for running detection or remove starter can be
used.
Running feedback

DEIF A/S

Page 229 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

When the digital running feedback is active, the start relay is deactivated and the starter motor will be disengaged.
RPM

RPMNOM

RPM

Run. feedback

t
Firing speed

The diagram illustrates how the digital running feedback (terminal 93) is activated, when the engine has
reached its firing speed.
Remove starter
When the digital remove starter input is present, the start relay is deactivated and the starter motor will be
disengaged.
RPM

RPMNOM

RPM

Run. feedback

Remove starter

t
Firing speed

Running

The diagram illustrates how the remove starter input is activated, when the engine has reached its firing
speed. At the running speed, the digital running feedback is activated.
The remove starter input must be configured from a number of available digital inputs.
The running feedback is detected by either the digital input (see diagram above), frequency
measurement (frequency level is adjustable in parameter 6165), RPM measured by magnetic
pickup, EIC (option H5) or by multi-inputs 46, 47 or 48 (only for oil pressure).
Analogue tacho feedback
When a magnetic pick-up (MPU) is being used, the specific level of revolutions for deactivation of the start
relay can be adjusted.

DEIF A/S

Page 230 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Running feedback
The diagram below shows how the running feedback is detected at the firing speed level. The factory setting
is 1000 RPM (6173 Running detect.).
RPM

RPMNOM

RPM

Run. feedback,
menu 4301

t
Firing speed

Please notice that the factory setting of 1000 RPM is higher than the RPM level of starter motors of typical design. Adjust this value to a lower value to avoid damage of the starter motor.
Remove starter input
The drawing below shows how the setpoint of the remove starter is detected at the firing speed level. The
factory setting is 400 RPM (6174 Remove starter).
RPM

RPMNOM
RPM
Run. feedback,
menu 4301

Remove starter,
menu 6174

t
Firing speed

Running

The number of teeth on the flywheel must be adjusted in menu 6170 when the MPU input is
used
Oil pressure
The multi-inputs on terminals 46, 47 and 48 can be used for the detection of running feedback. The terminal
in question must be configured as a RMI input for oil pressure measurement.
When the oil pressure increases above the adjusted value (6175 Pressure level), the running feedback is detected and the start sequence is ended.

DEIF A/S

Page 231 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Running feedback
RPM / Oil pressure

RPMNOM

RPM

Run detection
Oil pressure
menu 6175

t
Firing speed

Remove starter input


The drawing below shows how the setpoint of the remove starter input is detected at the firing speed level.
The factory setting is 400 RPM (6174 Remove starter).
RPM / Oil pressure

RPMNOM
RPM
Run detection
Oil pressure
menu 6175
Remove starter,
menu 6174

t
Firing speed

Running

The remove starter function can use the MPU or a digital input.

9.1.2 Breaker types


There are three possible selections for the setting of breaker type for both mains breaker and generator
breaker.
Continuous NE and Continuous ND
This type of signal is most often used combined with a contactor. When using this type of signal, the AGC
200 will only use the close breaker relays. The relay will be closed for closing of the contactor and will be
opened for opening of the contactor. The open relay can be used for other purposes. Continuous NE is a normally energised signal, and Continuous ND is a normally de-energised signal.
Pulse
This type of signal is most often used combined with circuit breaker. With the setting pulse, the AGC 200 will
use the close command and the open command relay. The close breaker relay will close for a short time for
closing of the circuit breaker. The open breaker relay will close for a short time for opening of the breaker.

DEIF A/S

Page 232 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

External/ATS no control
This type of signal is used to indicate the position of the breaker, but the breaker is not controlled by the AGC.
Compact
This type of signal will most often be used combined with a compact breaker, a direct controlled motor driven
breaker. With the setting compact, the AGC 200 will use the close command and the open command relay.
The close breaker relay will close for a short time for the compact breaker to close. The breaker off relay will
close for the compact breaker to open and hold it closed long enough for the motor in the breaker to recharge
the breaker. If the compact breaker is tripped externally, it is recharged automatically before next closing. The
time setting for this function is 2160 (GB open fail.) for generator breaker and 2200 (MB open fail.) for mains
breaker.

9.1.3 Breaker spring load time


To avoid breaker close failures in situations where breaker ON command is given before the breaker spring
has been loaded, the spring load time can be adjusted for GB and MB.

The function applies to pulse and compact types of breaker control.


The following describes a situation where you risk getting a close failure:
1. The genset is in auto mode, the auto start/stop input is active, the genset is running and the GB is closed.
2. The auto start/stop input is deactivated, the stop sequence is executed and the GB is opened.
3. If the auto start/stop input is activated again before the stop sequence is finished, the GB will give a GB
close failure as the GB needs time to load the spring before it is ready to close.
Different breaker types are used and therefore there are two available solutions:
1. Timer controlled - A load time setpoint for the GB and MB control for breakers with no feedback indicating
that the spring is loaded. After the breaker has been opened, it will not be allowed to close again before
the delay has expired. The setpoints are found in menus 6230 and 7080.
2. Digital input - -Two configurable inputs are to be used for feedbacks from the breakers: One for GB spring
loaded and one for MB spring loaded. After the breaker has been opened, it will not be allowed to close
again before the configured inputs are active. The inputs are configured in the ML-2 utility software. When
the timers are counting, the remaining time is shown in the display. If the two solutions are used together,
both requirements are to be met before closing of the breaker is allowed. .
Breaker LED indication
To alert the user that the breaker close sequence has been initiated but is waiting for permission to give the
close command, the LED indication for the breaker will be flashing yellow in this case.
Principle
The diagram shows an example where a single AGC 200 in island mode is controlled by the auto start/stop
input.
This is what happens: When the auto start/stop input deactivates, the GB opens. The auto start/stop is reactivated immediately after the GB has opened, e.g. by the operator through a switch in the switchboard. However, the AGC 200 waits a while before it issues the close signal again, because the spring load time must expire (or the digital input must be activated not shown in this example). Then the AGC 200 issues the close
signal

DEIF A/S

Page 233 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

GB closed

GB open
Auto Start/stop ON

Auto Start/stop OFF


t [sec]
Spring load time

9.1.4 Alarm inhibit


In order to select when the alarms are to be active, a configurable inhibit setting for every alarm has been
made. The inhibit functionality is only available via the PC utility software. For every alarm, there is a dropdown window where it is possible to select which signals that have to be present in order to inhibit the alarm.

DEIF A/S

Page 234 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Selections for alarm inhibit:


Function
Inhibit 1

Description
M-Logic outputs: Conditions are programmed in M-Logic

Inhibit 2
Inhibit 3
GB ON

The generator breaker is closed

GB OFF

The generator breaker is open

Run status

Running detected and the timer in menu 6160 expired

Not run status

Running not detected or the timer in menu 6160 not expired

Generator voltage > 30%

Generator voltage is above 30% of nominal

Generator voltage < 30%

Generator voltage is below 30% of nominal

MB ON

The mains breaker is closed

MB OFF

The mains breaker is open

Parallel

Both GB and MB are closed

Not parallel

Either GB or MB is closed, but not both

The timer in 6160 is not used if binary running feedback is used.


Inhibit of the alarm is active as long as one of the selected inhibit functions is active.

In this example, inhibit is set to Not run status and GB ON. Here, the alarm will be active when the generator
has started. When the generator has been synchronised to the busbar, the alarm will be disabled again.
The inhibit LED on the unit and on the display will activate when one of the inhibit functions is
active.

DEIF A/S

Page 235 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Function inputs such as running feedback, remote start or access lock are never inhibited. Only alarm inputs can be inhibited.
The tie breaker unit has no running detection that can be configured, so the only inhibit functions are the binary input and the TB position.
Run status (6160)
Alarms can be adjusted to activate only when the running feedback is active and a specific time delay has
expired.

Select the correct relay number both in output A and output B and enable the function. Change the relay function to limit in the I/O menu. Then the relay will activate, but no alarm will appear.

DEIF A/S

Page 236 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

If the relay function is not changed to limit, an alarm will appear at every running situation.
The diagram below illustrates that after activation of the running feedback, a run status delay will expire.
When the delay expires, alarms with Run status will be activated

tRUN
Run. feedback

t
Alarms active

The timer is ignored if binary running feedback is used.

9.1.5 Access lock


The purpose of access lock is to deny the operator the possibility of configuring the unit parameters and
changing the running modes.
The input to be used for the access lock function is defined in the ML-2 PC utility software (USW).
Access lock will typically be activated from a key switch installed behind the door of the switchboard cabinet.
It is possible to enter the setup menu and read all the parameters and timers, but it is not possible to change
any of them.

DEIF A/S

Page 237 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Button

Additional functions

Button status

Comment

Active

It is possible to read all alarms, but it is not possible to acknowledge any of


them

Not active

The horn cannot be silenced

START

Not active

STOP

Not active

GB ON/OFF

Not active

MB ON/OFF

Not active
Active

Reading of all values is possible

Active

The log can be read

Active

System setup can be entered, but no changes can be made

Active

The tools can be read, but no commands can be sent

Active

Active
Active

It is possible to enter all the parameters, but it is not possible to change any
of them

Active
BACK

Active
Active

AUTO
SEMI
MAN
OFF
TEST

Not active

If the access lock is activated, the button is not active

After three minutes, the display returns to the view menu system. The setup menu system can
only be entered again if the access lock is deactivated.
The stop push-button is not active in any modes when the access lock is activated. For safety
reasons, it is recommended to install an emergency stop switch.

DEIF A/S

Page 238 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

The following digital input functions are affected when access lock is activated:
Input name

Input status

Remote start

Not active

Remote stop

Not active

Semi-auto

Not active

Test

Not active

Auto

Not active

Manual

Not active

Block

Not active

Remote GB ON

Not active

Remote GB OFF

Not active

Remote MB ON

Not active

Remote MB OFF

Not active

Comment

AOP buttons are not locked when access lock is activated.

9.1.6 Overlap (short time parallel)


The purpose of the overlap function is to be able to define a maximum paralleling time between the generator
and the mains supply.
The function is typically used if there are local requirements to maximum allowed paralleling time.
The overlap function is only available in the automatic mains failure and load takeover genset
modes.

MB
t

GB

The diagram shows that when the generator breaker is synchronised, the mains breaker will be opened automatically after a time delay (t). Later the mains breaker is synchronised, and the generator breaker is opened
after the time delay (t).
The time delay is measured in seconds and can be adjusted from 0.10 to 99.90 seconds.
The same time delay is used for both generator and mains breaker synchronisation.

DEIF A/S

Page 239 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

The time delay typed in the setpoint is a maximum time. This means that if 0.10 seconds are
used, the two breakers will never be closed at the same time for a longer delay than the setpoint.

The short time parallel function is set up in menu 2760 Overlap.

9.1.7 Digital mains breaker control


The unit will normally execute the automatic mains failure sequence based on the settings adjusted in the
system setup. Besides these settings, it is possible to configure a digital input that can be used to control the
mains return sequence. This input is the mains OK input. The purpose of this function is to let an external
device or an operator control the mains return sequence. The external device can e.g. be a PLC.
The flowchart below shows that if the input is configured, it needs to be deactivated in order to initiate the
mains return sequence. The load will continue on generator supply if the input is still activated.
The mains OK delay is not used at all when the Mains OK input is configured.

Mains OK

No

MB input
configured

Mains OK
delay

Expired

Yes

MB control
input

No

Yes

Yes

ON
No

MB and GB
operation

Sequence

9.1.8 Command timers (time-dependent start/stop)


The purpose of the time-dependent start/stop function is to be able to start and stop the genset automatically
at specific times each weekday or certain weekdays. If auto mode is activated, this function is available in
island operation, load takeover, mains power export and fixed power operation. Up to eight command timers
can be used for either start or stop. All command timers can be configurated in menu 6960- 6990. Each command can be set for the following time periods

DEIF A/S

Page 240 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Individual days (MO, TU, WE, TH, FR, SA, SU)


MO, TU, WE, TH
MO, TU, WE, TH, FR
MO, TU, WE, TH, FR, SA, SU
SA, SU
The command timers are to be used in M-Logic as events to set the command (start/stop).
The digital input Auto start/stop cannot be used when this function is enabled.
The time-dependent start and stop commands are pulses that are not sent until the moment the adjusted time
is reached.
When using a batch file from SW 3.X.X and writing it to SW 4.X.X, then command timer settings
will not be updated.

9.1.9 Start/stop next generator


The load-dependent start/stop functionality uses one relay for start next generator and one relay for stop
next generator. It is also possible to use only one of the functions if it is not desired to use both the start
and the stop function.
The function load-dependent start and stop does not give the possibilities of a power management system,
such as priority selection and available power calculations. This means that the switchboard manufacturer
must take care of starting and stopping the next genset(s) and their priority.
As an example, the relays can be used as inputs for the power management system.
Start next generator (high load) (menu 6520)
The diagram below shows that the delay for the start relay starts when the load exceeds the adjusted start
limit. The relay will deactivate again when the load decreases below the start limit and the off delay has expired.

Power

R START activates

R START deactivates

START LIMIT

Time
Delay

Off delay

The load-dependent start relay reacts based on the power measurement of the AGC 200 together with the
breaker closed feedback.

DEIF A/S

Page 241 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Stop next generator (low load) (menu 6530)


The diagram shows that the stop relay activates after a delay. The timer starts when the load drops below the
adjusted stop level, and when the delay has expired, the relay activates.
The relay deactivates when the load exceeds the stop level after the off delay has expired. The off delay is
adjustable.
R STOP deactivates

Power
R STOP activates

STOP LIMIT

Time
Delay

Off delay

The load-dependent start relay reacts based on the power measurement of the AGC 200 together with the
breaker closed feedback.
Configuration
The settings are configured through the display or through the PC utility software.
PC utility software configuration

DEIF A/S

Page 242 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Configuration of Start next gen":

Output A and output B must be adjusted to the same relay to avoid alarms when the setpoint is
reached.
When a relay has been selected for this function, it cannot be used for other relay functions.
Start/stop scenario
This diagram shows a (simplified) scenario where three DGs are started and stopped depending on the loaddependent start/stop relays.
The scenario shows that genset 2 starts when genset 1 reaches 80%. The next genset to start is DG3, and
the three sets load share at 53%.
When the load of all three gensets drops to the stop limit, which is 20%, then the load-dependent stop relay
activates and a genset (genset 3 in this example) can be stopped. The load continues to drop, and at 20%
load the next genset to stop is genset 2.

DEIF A/S

Page 243 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

3 DG Scenario
90
80
70

Power [%]

60
Gen 1

50

Gen 2
40

Gen 3

30
20
10
0
1

10

11

12

13

14

15

Time

The above is a simplified scenario.

9.1.10 Derate genset


The purpose of the derate function is to be able to reduce the maximum output power of the genset if specific
conditions require this. An example of such a condition is the ambient temperature. If the ambient temperature increases to a level where the cooling water coolers decrease in cooling capacity, it will be necessary to
reduce the power of the genset. If the genset is not derated, alarms and shutdown events are very likely to
occur.
The derate function is typically used when cooling problems are expected.
Input selection
The derate function can be configured to one of the following inputs:
Input
Multi-input 46
Multi-input 47
Multi-input 48

Comment
0-40V DC
4-20 mA
Pt100/1000
RMI
Digital

EIC
M-Logic
Select the needed input in 6260 Power derate

DEIF A/S

Page 244 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Refer to the type label for information about engine interface selection.
Derate parameters
The parameters that define the derate characteristics are the following:
Start derate point (6260 Power derate)
This is the setting where the derating must start. The setting can be in mA (max. 20 mA) or in centigrades C
(max. 200C).
Slope (6260 Power derate)
Adjust the derating speed. The adjustment is in percent per unit, i.e. if the 4-20 mA input is used, then the
derating will be in %/mA, and if the Pt100/Pt1000/RMI input is used, then the derating will be in %/C.
Be aware that the 4-20 mA input can be configured with different minimum and maximum settings. In this case, the settings start derate point and slope use these new settings.
Derate limit (6260 Power derate)
This is the lowest derate level
P

PNOM

PLIMIT

mA
0

10

16

20

Start
derate

Derate characteristic
It can be selected whether the characteristic of the derating should be proportional or inverse proportional.
The drawing above shows the inverse characteristic.
The proportional characteristic is illustrated below.

DEIF A/S

Page 245 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

PNOM

PLIMIT

mA
0

10
Start
increase

16

20

The genset is derated when the control value is lower than the setpoint (in the example above, the control
value is an mA signal).
The derate characteristic is selected in setting 6261 Power derate.
Enable OFF: Inverse characteristic
Enable ON: Proportional characteristic

9.1.11 Idle running


The purpose of the idle run function is to change the start and stop sequences to allow the genset to operate
under low temperature conditions.
It is possible to use the idle run function with or without timers. Two timers are available. One timer is used in
the start sequence, and one timer is used in the stop sequence.
The main purpose of the function is to prevent the genset from stopping. The timers are available to make the
function flexible.
The speed governor must be prepared for the idle run function if this function is to be used.
The function is typically used in installations where the genset is exposed to low temperatures which could
generate starting problems or damage the genset.
Description
The function is enabled and configured in 6290 Idle running. It has to be noted that the governor itself must
handle the idle speed based on a digital signal from the unit (see the principle diagram below).
When the function is enabled, two digital inputs are used for control purposes:

DEIF A/S

Page 246 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

No.

Additional functions

Input

Description

Low speed input

This input is used to change between idle speed and nominal speed. This input
does not prevent the genset from stopping it is only a selection between idle
and nominal speed.

Temperature control input

When this input is activated, the genset will start. It will not be able to stop as
long as this input is activated.

The input must be configured through the PC software at commissioning.


One extra relay output must be available on the unit. Please notice that this is option-dependent.
Turbo chargers not originally prepared for operation in the low speed area can be damaged if
the genset is running in idle run for too long.

High/low
speed
selection

Start/stop
genset

Low speed
input

AGC 200

relay

Idle run input

GOVERNOR

Temperature
control input

Actuator

Temperature control and high/low speed selections are set in the Inputs settings. Relay is
chosen in setting 6295 Idle active.
Examples
Idle speed during starting and stopping In this example, both the start and the stop timers are activated.
The start and stop sequences are changed in order to let the genset stay at the idle level before speeding up.
It also decreases the speed to the idle level for a specified delay time before stopping.

DEIF A/S

Page 247 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

RPM

1500

tSTART

tSTOP

300

t
Start

Stop

Idle speed, no stopping


In this example, both timers are deactivated.
If the genset is to be prevented from stopping, then the digital input temp. control must be left ON at all
times. In that case, the characteristic looks like this:
RPM

1500

300

t
Start

Stop

The oil pressure alarm (RMI oil) will be enabled during idle run if set to ON.
Configuration of digital input
The digital input is configured via the PC software.

DEIF A/S

Page 248 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Inhibit
The alarms that are deactivated by the inhibit function are inhibited in the usual manner, except for the oil
pressure alarms RMI oil 102, 105 and 108, which are active during idle run as well.
Running signal
The running feedback must be activated when the genset is running in idle mode.
The "run detect" RPM in channel 6173 has to be lower than the idle RPM of the prime mover.

Idle speed flowcharts


The flowcharts illustrate the starting and stopping of the genset by use of the inputs temp. control and low
speed.

DEIF A/S

Page 249 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Start
Start

Yes

Auto
start/stop
ON

No

Temp control ON

No

No starting

Yes
Start the
Genset

Start the
Genset

Low speed ON

No

Yes

Genset running
at idle speed
No
Idle timer
expired

Yes

Idle timer on

No

Yes

Genset running
at f Nom

End

DEIF A/S

Page 250 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Stop
Start

Temp control
OFF

No

Yes
Auto
start/stop
OFF

No

Genset is
running

Yes
Genset stop
sequence

Low speed on

No

Yes

Genset running
at idle speed

Idle timer on

No

Yes
Yes

Idle timer
expired
No

Genset stop
sequence

End

DEIF A/S

Page 251 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

9.1.12 Engine heater


This function is used to control the temperature of the engine. A sensor measuring the cooling water temperature is used to activate an external heating system to keep the engine at a minimum temperature.
The setpoints adjusted in menu 6320 are:
Setpoint: This setpoint +/- the hysteresis is the start and stop points for the engine heater.
Output A: The relay output for the engine heater.
Input type: Multi-input to be used for temperature measurement.
Hysteresis: This decides how big a deviation from the setpoint is needed to activate/deactivate the engine
heater.
Enable: Enables the engine heater function.
Principle diagram:

43C

37C

Engine heater
relay
Start attempt
DG running

The engine heater function is only active when the engine is stopped.
Engine heater alarm
If the temperature keeps dropping after the start setpoint has been exceeded, an alarm will be raised if configured in menu 6330.

9.1.13 Master clock


The purpose of the master clock is to control the frequency of the genset in order to obtain the correct number of periods.
This function can only be used if island operation is selected.
In a 50 Hz system, one period lasts 20 ms. If this changes, e.g. due to the dead band setting of the frequency
controller, a difference will exist between the actual number of periods and the theoretical number of periods.
Equipment that works based on the zero crossings will be affected by the surplus or missing zero crossings.
The most common example of such equipment is alarm clocks.

DEIF A/S

Page 252 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

The units internal clock is a timekeeper which is included in the battery backed memory circuit. The timekeeper function works based on an oscillating crystal instead of zero crossings of the AC measurements. Due
to the accuracy of the timekeeper, it is recommended to synchronise the clock on a regular basis, e.g. once
every month.
Setting

Description

Comment

6401 Start

Start time.

The compensation period starts at


the adjusted time.

6402 Stop

Stop time.

The compensation period stops at


the adjusted time.

6403 Difference

The setpoint in seconds that initiates the


compen-sation.

6404 Compensation

Frequency difference when the compensation is ini-tiated.

6405 Enable

Enables the function

+/- value.

If the power management option is selected (option G5), then the adjustment is made in the
command unit.
The compensation frequency must be adjusted to a value higher than the dead band setting.
Compensation time
The time for the compensation can easily be calculated at a given adjustment of 6403 and 6404 (example):

6403 = 30 seconds
6404 = 0.1 Hz

tTOTAL = tSET /(1-fNOM/fDIFF)


tTOTAL = 30S /(1-50 Hz/50.1 Hz)
tTOTAL = 15030S ~4.1 hours

9.1.14 Battery test


This function gives the possibility of testing the condition of the battery. The battery test can be initiated with a
digital input and is available when the genset is in semi-auto and auto mode.
If a mains failure occurs during the battery test sequence, the test will automatically be interrupted and the
automatic mains failure start-up sequence will be activated. Please notice that when the cranking stops, the
extended stop timer will start and run out before engine start is initiated.
During the test, the battery voltage will decrease and an alarm will occur if it drops to the setpoint.

DEIF A/S

Page 253 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

UBATTERY
tBAT TEST

tBAT TEST

Alarm
Cancel test

t
Test 1

Test 2

The drawing shows that test #1 is carried out without a large voltage drop of the battery voltage, whereas test
#2 reaches the alarm setpoint.
As there is no reason to wear the battery down even more, the test stops when the battery test alarm occurs.
The test is typically used at periodical intervals, e.g. once every week. The engine must be at standstill when
the test is started. Otherwise, the test command will be ignored.
The stop relay will act depending on the coil type:
Stop coil: The stop relay activates during the test.
Run coil: The stop relay stays deactivated during the test.
The drawing below shows that when the test is started, the start relay activates and makes the engine turn.

Start relay

Stop coil
or
Run coil

Start test

Input configuration
If this function is to be used, it is necessary to configure a digital input that initiates the function. This is done
in the dialogue box below.

DEIF A/S

Page 254 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

If AUTO mode is selected, the mains failure sequence will be initiated if a mains failure occurs
during the battery test.

Auto configuration
If the automatic battery test is used, the function has to be enabled in menu 6420. When the function is enabled, the battery test will be carried out with a specified interval, e.g. once a week. Completed battery tests
will be logged in a separate battery test log

The factory setting in menu 6424 is 52 weeks. This means that the automatic battery test will be
executed once a year.

9.1.15 Ventilation
This function can be used to control the cooling of the engine. The purpose is to use a multi- input to measure
the cooling water temperature and that way activate an external ventilation system to keep the engine below
a maximum temperature. The functionality is shown in the diagram below.
Setpoints available (6460 Max. ventilation):
Setpoint: The limit for activation of the relay set in OA.
Output A (OA): The relay activated when the setpoint is exceeded.
Hysteresis: The number of degrees the temperature has to be above the setpoint to activate and below the
setpoint to deactivate the relay set in OA.
Enable: Enable/disable the ventilation function.

The type of input to use for the temperature measurement is selected in menu 6323 Engine
heater.

Example: The setpoint is 90oC, the hysteresis is 5oC

DEIF A/S

Page 255 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

95C

85C

Relay

Max. ventilation alarm


Two alarms can be set up in menu 6470 and menu 6480 to activate if the temperature keeps rising after the
start setpoint has been reached.

9.1.16 Summer/winter time


This function is used to make the AGC 200 unit adjust the clock in the unit automatically according to summer
and winter time. The function is enabled in menu 6490.

The function only supports the Danish rules.

9.1.17 Switchboard error


The switchboard error function is handled in two different menus: 6500 Block swbd error and 6510 Stop
swbd error. The functions are activated by using one configurable input (switchboard error) which is configured with the PC utility software.

The functionality of the switchboard error input is active as soon as the input is configured.
The enable in menus 6500 and 6510 only refers to the alarm function.

Block swbd error (menu 6500)


When activated, this function will block the start sequence of the genset in case the genset is not running.
Setpoints available:
Delay: When the input is active, the alarm will be activated when this delay has expired.
Parallel:
OFF: Only AMF start sequence is blocked when the input is active.
ON: All start sequences, regardless of running mode, are blocked when the input is active.
Output A: Relay to activate when the delay has expired.
Output B: Relay to activate when the delay has expired.
Enable: Enable/disable the alarm function.

DEIF A/S

Page 256 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Fail class: The fail class of the alarm.


Stop swbd error (menu 6510)
When activated, this function will stop the genset if the genset is running in Auto mode.
Setpoints available:
Delay: When the input is active and the delay has expired, the genset will trip the breaker, cool down and
stop. The function is active regardless of the Enable setting.
Output A: Relay to activate when the delay has expired.
Output B: Relay to activate when the delay has expired.
Enable: Enable/disable the alarm function.
Fail class: The fail class of the alarm.

9.1.18 Not in Auto


This function can be used for indication or to raise an alarm in case the system is not in Auto. The function is
set up in menu 6540.

9.1.19 Fail class


All activated alarms must be configured with a fail class. The fail classes define the category of the alarms
and the subsequent alarm action.
Eight different fail classes can be used. The tables below illustrate the action of each fail class when the engine is running or stopped.
Engine running
Fail class \ Action

Alarm
horn relay

Alarm
display

Deload

Trip of
gen.
breaker

1 Block

2 Warning

3 Trip GB

4 Trip + stop

5 Shutdown

6 Trip MB

7 Safety stop

8 Trip MB/GB

Trip of
mains
breaker

Coolingdown
genset

Stop
genset

X
X

X
(X)

X
(X)

The table illustrates the action of the fail classes. If, for instance, an alarm has been configured with
the Shutdown fail class, the following actions occur:
The alarm horn relay will activate.
The alarm will be displayed in the alarm info screen.
The generator breaker will open instantly.
The genset is stopped instantly.

DEIF A/S

Page 257 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

The genset cannot be started from the unit (see next table).
The fail class "Safety stop" will only deload the genset before opening the breaker if option G4
(power management) is used.
The fail class "Trip MB/GB" will only trip the generator breaker if there is no mains breaker
present.
Fail class \ Action

1 Block

Block engine start

Block MB sequence

Block GB sequence

2 Warning
3 Trip GB

4 Trip + stop

5 Shutdown

6 Trip MB

7 Safety stop

8 Trip MB/GB

(X)

(X)

In addition to the actions defined by the fail classes, it is possible to activate one or two relay
outputs if additional relays are available in the unit.
The fail class "Trip MB/GB" will only block engine start and GB sequence if there is no mains
breaker present.
Fail class configuration
The fail class can be selected for each alarm function either via the display or the PC software.
To change the fail class via the PC software, the alarm function to be configured must be selected. Select the
desired fail class in the fail class roll-down panel.

DEIF A/S

Page 258 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

9.1.20 4th current transformer input


Not available in AGC 212/213/222.
The 4th current transformer input (terminals 59-60) can be used for three different purposes:
Mains power measurement by placing a CT in the mains L1 connection. This is selected in menu 7005
(Mains power meas.). Select internal.
Neutral line overcurrent protection. This is selected by activating the alarm in setting 1720).
Generator earth current (ground fault) measured in the generator star point ground connection. The function includes a 3rd harmonics filtering of the signal. This is selected by activating the alarm in setting
1730.
For all three functions, the setting of the CT is made in setting 6045 (primary) and 6046 (secondary).
If the input is not used for mains power, but the measurement is needed anyway, select "multiinput 46 (transducer)" instead. In this case, a separate transducer is needed to measure the
mains power.
Note that only one of the three functions can be used. Combinations are not possible.

9.1.21 Neutral line and ground fault inverse over-current


These are configurable inverse alarms, based on predefined or user-configurable curve shapes. Settings are
found in parameter 1720 (G In> Inverse) and 1730 (G Ie> Inverse).

DEIF A/S

Page 259 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Formula and settings used


The inverse time over-current is based on IEC 60255 part 151.
The function used is dependent time characteristic, and the formula used is:

k
t(G) = TMS
C

G 1

where
t(G) is the theoretical operating time constant value of G in seconds
k, c, are the constants characterising the selected curve
G is the measured value of the characteristic quantity
GS is the setting value
TMS is the time multiplier setting
The constants k and c have a unit of seconds, has no dimension.
There is no intentional delay on reset. The function will reset when G < 2 x GS.

DEIF A/S

Page 260 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Curve shapes
Time characteristic

t(G)

Effective range

GS

GD

2 x GS

GT

In the AGC 200, the value 2 x GS is called Limit.


There is a choice between seven different curve shapes, of which six are pre-defined and one is user-definable:
IEC Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEEE Moderately Inverse
IEEE Very Inverse
IEEE Extremely Inverse
Custom
Common settings for all types:
Setting

Parameter no.

Factory setting value

Equals

Limit

1722/1732

30/10%

2 x GS

TMS

1723/1733

1.0

Time multiplier setting

DEIF A/S

Page 261 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

The following constants apply to the predefined curves:


Curve type

IEC Inverse

0.14

0.02

IEC Very Inverse

13.5

IEC Extremely Inverse

80

IEEE Moderately Inverse

0.515

0.1140

0.02

IEEE Very Inverse

19.61

0.491

IEEE Extremely Inverse

28.2

0.1217

For the custom curve, these constants can be defined by the user:
Setting

Parameter no.

Factory setting value

Equals

1724/1734

0.140 s

1725/1735

0.000 s

(a)

1726/1736

0.020

For the actual setting ranges, please see the parameter list.

DEIF A/S

Page 262 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Standard curves
Time
Sec 100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20

IEC Inverse

10
9
8
7
6

IEEE Moderately Inverse

5
4
3
2

1
.9
.8
.7
.6

IEEE Very Inverse

.5
.4

IEC Very Inverse

.3

IEEE Extremely Inverse

.2

IEC Extremely Inverse

.1
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1

5 6 7 8 9 10

20

30

Multiples of LIM

The curves are shown for TMS = 1.

9.1.22 Trip of non-essential load (NEL)


Not available in AGC 212/213.
The two terms trip of non-essential load and load shedding describe the same functionality.
The trip of non-essential load (NEL) groups (load shedding) is carried out in order to protect the busbar
against an imminent blackout situation due to either a high load/current or overload on a generator set or a
low busbar frequency.
The unit is able to trip three NEL groups due to:
the measured load of the generator set (high load and overload)
the measured current of the generator set

DEIF A/S

Page 263 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

the measured frequency at the busbar


The load groups are tripped as three individual load groups. This means that the trip of load group no. 1 has
no direct influence on the trip of load group no. 2. Only the measurement of either the busbar frequency or
the load/current on the generator set is able to trip the load groups.
Trip of the NEL groups due to the load of a running generator set will reduce the load on the busbar and thus
reduce the load percentage on the running generator set. This may prevent a possible blackout at the busbar
caused by an overload on the running generator set. The current trip will be selected in case of inductive
loads and unstable power factor (PF <0.7) where the current is increased.
Trip of the NEL groups due to a low busbar frequency will reduce the real power load at the busbar and thus
reduce the load percentage on the generator set. This may prevent a possible blackout at the busbar.
For output setup, please refer to the description of outputs.

9.1.23 Service timers


The unit is able to monitor the maintenance intervals. Two service timers are available to cover different intervals. The service timers are set up in menu 6110 and 6120.
The function is based on running hours. When the adjusted time expires, the unit will display an alarm.
The running hours is counting when the running feedback is present.
Setpoints available in menus 6110 and 6120:
Enable: Enable/disable the alarm function.
Running hours: The number of running hours to activate the alarm. The service timer alarm will be activated
as soon as the running hours have been reached.
Day: The number of days to activate the alarm if the running hours are not reached before this number of
days, the alarm will still be activated. The service timer alarm will be activated at 8:00 AM on the day the
alarm expires.
Fail class: The fail class of the alarm.
Output A: Relay to be activated when the alarm is activated.
Reset: Enabling this will reset the service timer to zero. This must be done when the alarm is activated.

9.1.24 Wire fail detection


If it is necessary to supervise the sensors/wires connected to the multi-inputs, then it is possible to enable the
wire break function for each input. If the measured value on the input is outside the normal dynamic area of
the input, it will be detected as if the wire has made a short circuit or a break. An alarm with a configurable fail
class will be activated.

DEIF A/S

Page 264 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Input

Additional functions

Wire failure area

Normal range

Wire failure area

4-20 mA

< 3 mA

4-20 mA

> 21 mA

RMI Oil, type 1

< 10.0 ohm

> 184.0 ohm

RMI Oil, type 2

< 10.0 ohm

> 184.0 ohm

RMI Temp, type 1

< 22.4 ohm

> 291.5 ohm

RMI Temp, type 2

< 18.3 ohm

> 480.7 ohm

RMI Temp, type 3

< 7.4 ohm

> 69.3 ohm

RMI Fuel, type 1

< 1.6 ohm

> 78.8 ohm

RMI Fuel, type 2

< 3.0 ohm

> 180.0 ohm

RMI configurable

< lowest resistance

> highest resistance

Pt100

< 82.3 ohm

> 194.1 ohm

Level switch

Only active if the switch is open

Principle
The illustration below shows that when the wire of the input breaks, the measured value will drop to zero.
Then the alarm will occur.
Input signal
(mA, C,b, %)

Upper failure
limit

Wire failure

Lower failure
limit
Wire failure
t
Wire break

MPU wire break (menu 4550)


The MPU wire break function is only active when the genset is not running. In this case, an alarm will be
raised if the wire connection between the AGC 200 and MPU breaks.
Stop coil wire break (menu 6270)
The alarm will occur when the stop coil is not activated (generator is running) and the input is de-energised.

9.1.25 Digital inputs


The unit has a number of binary inputs, some of which are configurable and some are not.
Available digital inputs not configurable

Available digital inputs configurable

12

DEIF A/S

Page 265 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Input function

Additional functions

Auto

Semi

Test

Man.

Block

Configurable

Input type

Shutdown override

Configurable

Constant

Access lock

Configurable

Constant

Running feedback

Configurable

Constant

Remote start

Configurable

Pulse

Remote stop

Configurable

Pulse

Semi-auto

Test

Auto

Manual

10

Block

11

Remote GB ON

12

Configurable

Pulse

Configurable

Pulse

Configurable

Pulse

Configurable

Pulse

Configurable

Constant

Configurable

Pulse

Remote GB OFF

Configurable

Pulse

13

Remote MB ON

Configurable

Pulse

14

Remote MB OFF

Configurable

Pulse

15

Remote alarm acknowledge

Configurable

Constant

16

Auto start/stop

Configurable

Constant

17

Remove starter

Configurable

Constant

18

Reset analogue GOV/AVR outputs

Configurable

Pulse

19

Manual GOV up

Configurable

Constant

20

Manual GOV down

Configurable

Constant

21

Manual AVR up

Configurable

Constant

22

Manual AVR down

Configurable

Constant

23

GB position ON

Configurable*

Constant

24

GB position OFF

Configurable*

Constant

25

MB position ON

Configurable**

Constant

26

MB position OFF

Configurable**

Constant

27

Emergency stop

Not configurable

Constant

28

Low speed

Configurable

Constant

29

Temperature control

Configurable

Constant

30

Battery test

Configurable

Pulse

31

Mains OK

Configurable

Constant

32

MB close inhibit

Configurable

Constant

33

Enable mode shift

Configurable

Constant

34

Enable GB black close

Configurable

Constant

35

Enable sep. sync.

Configurable

Constant

36

Start enable

Configurable

Constant

DEIF A/S

X
X

Page 266 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Input function

Auto

Semi

Test

Man.

Block

Configurable

Input type

37

Alternative start

Configurable

Constant

38

Switchboard error

Configurable

Constant

39

Total test

Configurable

Constant

40

GB spring loaded

Configurable

Constant

41

MB spring loaded

Configurable

Constant

42

1st priority mains

Configurable

Constant

43

Ext. MB pos. OFF

Configurable

Constant

44

Heavy consumer 1 request

Configurable

Constant

45

Heavy consumer 2 request

Configurable

Constant

46

Deload

Configurable

Constant

47

GB OFF and BLOCK

Configurable

Pulse

48

HC 1 fixed load feedback

Configurable

Constant

49

HC 2 fixed load feedback

Configurable

Constant

50

Secured mode ON

Configurable

Pulse

51

Secured mode OFF

Configurable

Pulse

52

Base load

Configurable

Constant

53

D+

Not configurable

Constant

Columns marked with * indicate that it is only AGC 222 which has configurable GB pos. feedbacks; see further explanation below, in rows 23 and 24.
Columns marked with ** indicate that configurable MB feedback applies only to variants without MB.
Functional description
1. Shutdown overrideThis input deactivates all protections except the overspeed protection and the emergency stop input. The number of start attempts is seven by default, but it can be configured in menu 6201
Shutdown override. Also a special cool down timer is used in the stop sequence after an activation of this
input.
2. Access lock Activating the access lock input deactivates the control display push-buttons. It will only be
possible to view measurements, alarms and the log.
3. Running feedback The input is used as a running indication of the engine. When the input is activated,
the start relay is deactivated.
4. Remote start This input initiates the start sequence of the genset when semi-auto or manual mode is selected.
5. Remote stop This input initiates the stop sequence of the genset when semi-auto or manual mode is selected. The genset will stop without cooling down.
6. Semi-auto Changes the present running mode to semi-auto.
7. Test Changes the present running mode to test.
8. Auto Changes the present running mode to auto.
9. Manual Changes the present running mode to manual.
10. Block Changes the present running mode to block.

DEIF A/S

Page 267 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

18.

When block mode is selected, the running mode cannot be changed by activating the
digital inputs.
Remote GB ON The generator breaker ON sequence will be initiated and the breaker will synchronise if
the mains breaker is closed, or close without synchronising if the mains breaker is opened.
Remote GB OFF The generator breaker OFF sequence will be initiated. If the mains breaker is opened,
then the generator breaker will open instantly. If the mains breaker is closed, the generator load will be
deloaded to the breaker open limit followed by a breaker opening.
Remote MB ON The mains breaker ON sequence will be initiated and the breaker will synchronise if the
generator breaker is closed, or close without synchronising if the generator breaker is opened.
Remote MB OFF The mains breaker OFF sequence will be initiated and the breaker will open instantly.
Remote alarm acknowledge Acknowledges all present alarms, and the alarm LED on the display stops
flashing.
Auto start/stop The genset will start when this input is activated. The genset will be stopped if the input is
deactivated. The input can be used when the unit is in island operation, fixed power, load takeover or
mains power export, and the auto running mode is selected.
Remove starter The start sequence is deactivated. This means the start relay deactivates, and the starter
motor will disengage.
Reset analogue GOV/AVR outputs The analogue +/-20 mA controller outputs will be reset to 0 mA.

19.
20.
21.
22.

All analogue controller outputs are reset. That is the governor output and the AVR output.If an offset has been adjusted in the control setup, then the reset position will be the
specific adjustment.
Manual GOV up If manual mode is selected, then the governor output will be increased.
Manual GOV down If manual mode is selected, then the governor output will be decreased.
Manual AVR up If manual mode is selected, then the AVR output will be increased.
Manual AVR down If manual mode is selected, then the AVR output will be decreased.

11.
12.

13.
14.
15.
16.

17.

The manual governor and AVR increase and decrease inputs can only be used in manual mode.
23. Generator breaker closed feedback (GB position ON)The input function is used as an indication of the
generator breaker position. The unit requires this feedback when the breaker is closed or a position failure alarm occurs.
In AGC 222 it is possible to configure GB pos. ON to "not used", so the input can be
used for other purposes. It is done by selecting"not used" in the I/O list in the USW after which this input is free for other purposes. Be aware that when GB pos. ON is selected in the I/O list, it can ONLY be configured to input 89.
24. Generator breaker open feedback (GB position OFF) The input function is used as an indication of the
generator breaker position. The unit requires this feedback when the breaker is opened or a position failure alarm occurs.
In AGC 222 it is possible to configure GB pos. OFF to "not used", so the input can be
used for other purposes. It is done by selecting "not used" in the I/O list in the USW after which this input is free for other purposes. Be aware that when GB pos. OFF is selected in the I/O list, it can ONLY be configured to input 90.
25. Mains breaker closed feedback (MB position ON) The input function is used as an indication of the mains
breaker position. The unit requires this feedback when the breaker is closed or a position failure alarm
occurs.
26. Mains breaker open feedback (MB position OFF) The input function is used as an indication of the mains
breaker position. The unit requires this feedback when the breaker is opened or a position failure alarm
occurs.

DEIF A/S

Page 268 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

27. Emergency stop The input shuts down the engine immediately. At the same time, it opens the generator
breaker.
The shutdown fail class must be selected.
28. Low speed Disables the regulators and keeps the genset running at a low RPM.
The governor must be prepared for this function.
29. Temperature control This input is part of the idle mode function. When the input is high, then the genset
starts. It starts at high or low speed, depending on the activation of the low speed input. When the input is
deactivated, then the genset goes to idle mode (low speed = ON) or it stops (low speed = OFF).
30. Battery test Activates the starter without starting the genset. If the battery is weak, the test will cause the
battery voltage to drop more than acceptable, and an alarm will occur.

31.
32.
33.

34.
35.

Battery test is not supported by all engines using J1939/CANbus communication. Volvo
engines with ECM2.2 supports a fuel disable request through the CAN communication.
Mains OK Disables the mains OK delay timer. The synchronisation of the mains breaker will only happen when the input is activated.
MB close inhibit When this input is activated, the mains breaker cannot close.
Enable mode shift The input activates the mode shift function, and the AGC 200 will perform the AMF
sequence in case of a mains failure. When the input is configured, the setting in menu 7081 (mode shift
ON/OFF) is disregarded.
Enable GB black close When the input is activated, the AGC 200 is allowed to close the generator on a
black busbar, providing that the frequency and voltage are inside the limits set up in menu 2110.
Enable separate sync. Activating this input will split the breaker close and breaker synchronisation functions into two different relays. The breaker close function will remain on the relays dedicated for breaker
control. The synchronisation function will be moved to a configurable relay dependent on the options configuration. Please refer to the description.
This function is option-dependent. Option M12 or M14.x is required.

36. Start enable The input must be activated to be able to start the engine.
When the genset is started, the input can be removed.
37. Alternative startThis input is used to simulate an AMF failure and this way run a full AMF sequence without a mains failure actually being present.
38. Switchboard error The input will stop or block the genset, depending on running status.
39. Total test This input will be logged in the event log to indicate that a planned mains failure has been
made.
40. GB spring loaded The AGC 200 will not send a close signal before this feedback is present.
41. MB spring loaded The AGC 200 will not send a close signal before this feedback is present.
42. 1st priority mains This input is used in G5 applications with two mains connections to select which mains
connection has the 1st priority.
43. Ext. MB pos. OFF This input is used in G5 applications with two mains connections to tell the AGC 200
mains units that the mains breaker not controlled by them has been tripped.
44. Heavy consumer 1 request This input is used in G5 applications with two generators or more to request
heavy consumer 1 to start.
45. Heavy consumer 2 request This input is used in G5 applications with two generators or more to request
heavy consumer 2 to start.

DEIF A/S

Page 269 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

46. Deload A running genset will start to ramp down the power.
47. GB OFF and BLOCK The generator breaker will open, the genset will activate the stop sequence and
when the genset is stopped, it will be blocked for start.
48. HC 1 fixed load feedback HC 1 is running and consuming 100% power.
49. HC 2 fixed load feedback HC 2 is running and consuming 100% power.
50. Secured mode ON Secured mode adds an extra generator to the system, i.e. one generator too many will
be running when comparing with the actual power requirement.
51. Secured mode OFF Ends secured running mode.
52. Base load The generator set will run base load (fixed power) and not participate in frequency control.
Should the plant power requirement drop, the base load will be lowered so the other generator(s) on line
produces at least 10% power.
53. D+ is running feedback from the charger generator.
The input functions are set up with the PC utility software, please refer to Help in this.

9.1.26 Multi-inputs
The AGC 200 unit has three multi-inputs which can be configured to be used as the following input types:
1. 4-20 mA
2. Pt100
3. RMI oil
4. RMI water
5. RMI fuel
6. Digital
The function of the multi-inputs can only be configured in the PC utility software.
Two alarm levels are available for each input. The menu numbers of the alarm settings for each multi-input
are controlled by the configured input type as seen in the following table.
Input type

Multi-input 46

Multi-input 47

Multi-input 48

4-20 mA

4120/4130

4250/4260

4380/4390

0-40V DC

4140/4150

4270/4280

4400/4410

Pt100

4160/4170

4290/4300

4420/4430

RMI oil

4180/4190

4310/4320

4440/4450

RMI water

4200/4210

4330/4340

4460/4470

RMI fuel

4220/4230

4350/4360

4480/4490

Digital

3400

3410

3420

Only one alarm level is available for the digital input type.
In the event that the number of alarms is not sufficient, it is possible to use delta (differential
measurement) alarms as configurable alarms.

DEIF A/S

Page 270 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

4-20 mA
If one of the multi-inputs has been configured as 4-20 mA, the unit and range of the measured value corresponding to 4-20 mA can be changed in the PC utility software in order to get the correct reading in the display.
Pt100
This input type can be used for heat sensor, e.g. cooling water temperature. The unit of the measured value
can be changed from Celsius to Fahrenheit in the PC utility software in order to get the desired reading in the
display.
Offset parameters are used for compensation of wire resistance in a 2-wire setup.
Pt100 offset can be configered in the following parameters:
Multi-input 46: 4167
Multi-input 47: 4297
Multi-input 48: 4427
RMI inputs
The unit can contain up to three RMI inputs. The inputs have different functions as the hardware design allows for several RMI types.
These various types of RMI inputs are available for all multi-inputs:
RMI oil: Oil pressure
RMI water: Cooling water temperature
RMI fuel: Fuel level sensor
For each type of RMI input it is possible to select between different characteristics including a configurable.

DEIF A/S

Page 271 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

RMI Oil
This RMI input is used to measure the lubricating oil pressure
RMI sensor type
Pressure

Type 1

Type 2

Type configurable

Bar

psi

10.0

10.0

0.5

27.2

1.0

15

44.9

1.5

22

62.9

2.0

29

81.0

2.5

36

99.2

3.0

44

117.1

3.5

51

134.7

4.0

58

151.9

4.5

65

168.3

5.0

73

184.0

6.0

87

124.3

7.0

102

140.4

8.0

116

155.7

9.0

131

170.2

10.0

145

184.0

31.3
51.5
71.0
89.6
107.3

The configurable type is configurable with eight points in the range 0-2500 . The resistance as
well as the pressure can be adjusted.
If the RMI input is used as a level switch, then please be aware that no voltage must be connected to the input. If any voltage is applied to the RMI input, it will be damaged. Please refer to the
Application Notes for further wiring information.

DEIF A/S

Page 272 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

RMI water
This RMI input is used to measure the cooling water temperature.
Temperature

RMI sensor type

Type 1-

Type 2-

Type 3-

40

104

291.5

480.7

69.3

50

122

197.3

323.6

60

140

134.0

222.5

70

158

97.1

157.1

80

176

70.1

113.2

90

194

51.2

83.2

100

212

38.5

62.4

110

230

29.1

47.6

120

248

22.4

36.8

130

266

28.9

140

284

22.8

150

302

18.2

Type 4-

36.0
19.8
11.7
7.4

The configurable type is configurable with eight points in the range 0-2500 . The temperature
as well as the resistance can be adjusted.
If the RMi input is used as a level switch, then please be aware that no voltage must be connected to the input. If any voltage is applied to the RMI input, it will be damaged. Please refer to the
Application Notes for further wiring information.
RMI fuel
This RMI input is used for the fuel level sensor.
Value

RMI sensor type


Type 1

Type 2

Resistance

Resistance

0%

78.8

100%

1.6

180

If the RMI input is used as a level switch, then please be aware that no voltage must be connected to the input. If any voltage is applied to the RMI input, it will be damaged. Please refer to the
Application Notes for further wiring information.

DEIF A/S

Page 273 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Value

Additional functions

RMI sensor type


Type configurable

Resistance

0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
The configurable type is configurable with eight points in the range 0-2500 . The value as well
as the resistance can be adjusted.
Illustration of configurable inputs
Resistance
()
Setpoint 8

Setpoint 7

Setpoint 6

Setpoint 5
Setpoint 4
Setpoint 3
Setpoint 2
Setpoint 1
1

Value
(bar, C or %)

Setpoints

DEIF A/S

Page 274 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Configuration
The eight curve settings for the configurable RMI inputs cannot be changed in the display, only in the PC
utility software. The alarm settings can be changed both in the display and in the PC utility software. In the
PC utility software, the configurable inputs are adjusted in this dialogue box:

Adjust the resistance of the RMI sensor at the specific measuring value. In the example above, the adjustment is 10 at 0.0 bar.
Digital
If the multi-inputs are configured to Digital, they become available as a configurable input.

9.1.27 Input function selection


Digital input alarms can be configured with a possibility to select when the alarms are to be activated. The
possible selections of the input function are normally open or normally closed.
The drawing below illustrates a digital input used as an alarm input.
1. Digital input alarm configured to NC, normally closed.This will initiate an alarm when the signal on the digital input disappears.
2. Digital input alarm configured to NO, normally open. This will initiate an alarm when the signal on the digital input appears.
The relay output function can be selected to be ND (Normally De-energised, NE (Normally Energised), Limit, or Horn.

DEIF A/S

Page 275 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

+12/24V DC

Alarm
input
AGC 200
Dig in
Relay out
Com

9.1.28 Outputs
The unit has a number of output functions which can be configured to any available relay.
S.N.

Output function

Auto

Semi

Test

Man.

Block

Configurable

Output type

HC 1 ack.

Configurable

Pulse

HC 2 ack.

Configurable

Pulse

Trip NEL 1

Configurable

Pulse

Trip NEL 2

Configurable

Pulse

Trip NEL 3

Configurable

Pulse

Functional description
1. HC 1 ack.
This output is used in G5 applications with two or more generators to acknowledge the heavy consumer
requested.
2. HC 2 ack.
This output is used in G5 applications with two or more generators to acknowledge the heavy consumer
requested.
3. Trip NEL 1
This output is used to trip load groups.
4. Trip NEL 2
This output is used to trip load groups
5. Trip NEL 3
This output is used to trip load groups.
Please refer to the description of NEL.

9.1.29 Manual governor and AVR control


This function can be activated by activating the digital inputs or AOP buttons for governor or AVR control in
manual/semi-auto mode. The function has to be configured through M-Logic. The intention of this function is
to give the commissioning engineer a helpful tool for adjustment of the regulation.

DEIF A/S

Page 276 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

When using digital inputs or an AOP button to increase/decrease the GOV/AVR signal, the length of the pulse
can be adjusted in parameter 2783 and 2784.
Manual GOV and AVR control only works in manual and semi-auto mode, it will not be active in test and auto
mode. The regulator that is manually regulated is not active as long as a manual step signal is active. When
the manual step signal has expired, the normal regulator will be active again.
Example: A genset is running with the GB open. An AOP is configured with manual up and down and a signal length of 5 s. When the AOP button is pushed for manual GOV up, the RPM for the genset will increase
for five seconds. The AGC's governor regulator is deactivated for five seconds. When the five seconds have
expired, the normal regulator in the AGC will regulate the genset down to nominal set point again.
Regarding AOP setup, please refer to Help in the PC utility software.

9.1.30 External governor and AVR control


It is possible to control the governor and the AVR externally. A multi-input can be configured to receive a signal with the desired set point. The external control is enabled through M-Logic. The internal set point is discarded when the external control is enabled. The governor can be controlled using the modes "External frequency control" and "External power control". The AVR can be controlled using the modes "External voltage
control", "External reactive power control" and "External power factor control". The signal used to control the
modes can be: 4 to 20 mA or variable resistance (potentiometer). The utility software must be used to configure these inputs, it cannot be done using the display. A few examples of configuring the different options are
shown below.
How to set up "External power control" using a 4 to 20 mA signal on input 46
Type of signal

Pop-up box

The type of signal applied to the input 46 should be selected in channel 10980. When using 4 to 20 mA signal, additional configuration of input 46 is unnecesary.

When you write the new configuration, accept


the "Dependable parameters" pop-up box.

Configuring M-Logic

DEIF A/S

Page 277 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

In M-Logic, external power control from input 46 is enabled as an output by using the command "Ext Power
(Gov): Input 46". Commands relevant for external governor/AVR control are found under the "Gov/AVR control" headline. Any relevant events can be used to activate the command. This example uses digital input 77.

How to set up "External voltage control" using a potentiometer (variable resistance)


Type of signal

Configurable RMI

The type of signal applied to the input 47 should be


selected in channel 10990. Choose one of the RMI
signals (oil pressure, water temperature or fuel level). When you write the new configuration, accept
the "Dependable parameters" pop-up box.

Use the tab "RMI 47" to configure the resistance values. Select "Configurable RMI" in channel 10630.
The resistance values are configured as explained
under the next screenshot.

Defining the active resistance area

DEIF A/S

Page 278 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Type the lowest resistance value in channel 10640 (curve step 1) and the highest resistance value in channel
10780 (curve step 8). When the low and the high resistances are specified, they will be represented by a linear function between low and high. Curve steps 2 to 7 are inactive.
Configuring M-Logic

In M-Logic, external voltage control from input 47 is enabled as an output by using the command "Ext Voltage
(AVR): Input 47". Commands relevant for external gov/AVR control are found under the "Gov/AVR control"
headline. Any relevant events can be used to activate the command. This example uses digital input 77.
When for example an RMI fuel level is selected, the external control value will be displayed as
fuel level!

DEIF A/S

Page 279 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

M-Logic outputs that activate external Gov/AVR control


M-Logic output: GOV/AVR control

Multi-input selection

Ext. frequency (Gov): Input (when mA is selected, a 4 to 20 mA signal is used for control
and the nominal frequency is located at 12 mA)

46/47/48

Ext. power (Gov): Input (when mA is selected, a 12 to 20 mA signal is used for control/0
to 100 %)

46/47/48

Ext. voltage (AVR): Input (when mA is selected, a 4 to 20 mA signal is used for control)

46/47/48

Ext. cos phi (AVR): Input (when mA is selected, a 12 to 20 mA signal is used for control)

46/47/48

Ext. var (AVR): Input (when mA is selected, a 4 to 20 mA signal is used for control)

46/47/48

When external control is enabled, the internal set point is discarded.


Alarms regarding external gov/AVR control
When one or more multi-inputs are configured for external gov/AVR control, it is possible to use the associated alarms listed in the table below.
Input no.

Input 46

Input 47

Input 48

Alarm channels

Channels 4120 to 4240

Channels 4350 to 4370

Channels 4460 to 4500

9.1.31 Language selection


The unit has the possibility to display different languages. It is delivered with one master language which is
English. This is the default language, and it cannot be changed. In addition to the master language, 11 different languages can be configured. This is done via the PC utility software.
The languages are selected in the system setup menu 6080. The language can be changed when connected
to the PC utility software. It is not possible to make language configuration from the display, but the already
configured languages can be selected.

After selecting a language, the unit aux. power must be cycled before the selection takes effect.

9.1.32 Tools menu


The purpose of the tools menu is to give information about the present operating condition of the genset. The
tools menu is entered using the

push-button.

Use the tools menu for easy troubleshooting in connection with commissioning.
Entry window
The entry window shows the possible selections in the service menu

DEIF A/S

Page 280 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

DG BLOCKED FOR START

Status binary input


Status relay output
Status analog input

Status timer
Jump menu
Display lines

If

is pressed, the highlighted entry will be chosen.The scrollbar indicates that more selections than those

shown are available. Scroll through the list using the

or

button.

Available selections
Status binary input:
Shows the status of the binary inputs.
Status relay output:
Shows the status of the relay outputs.
Status analogue input:
Shows analogue input values.
Status timers:
Shows actual alarm timer values.
Jump menu:
Shows parameters that can only be accessed by entering this display menu. Available parameters are:
9000 Software version
Information about the actual software (firmware) version present in the unit.
911x Password
9111 Customer password
9112 Service password
9113 Master password
9130 AC config.
Entering this parameter gives you:
9131 AC configuration
Selections:
3-phase L1L2L3 (factory setting)
2-phase L1L3
2-phase L1L2
1-phase L1
9140 Angle comp. BB/gen.
Here, a compensation angle for a step-up transformer between generator and generator breaker can be entered, in case the step-up transformer creates a phase angle shift between low and high voltage sides

DEIF A/S

Page 281 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

This setting has an impact on the synchronising phase angle control. Be very careful to verify
that the synchronising pulse is issued correctly before enabling automatic synchronising.

9160 Application
Selection between the four predefinable applications set in the Utility software application setting section.
9180 Quick setup
This menu makes it possible to set up a power management application without using the application configuration tool in the PC utility software. The following parameters can be adjusted:
9181 Mode (OFF/stand-alone/plant)
9182 CAN (CAN A/CAN B/CAN A + B)
9183 Mains breaker (none/pulse/continuous/compact)
9184 Generator breaker (none/pulse/continuous/compact)
9185 Mains (present/not present) 9186 DG (single DG/standard)
9190 Application broadcast
This menu makes it possible to broadcast an application between all AGC 200 units connected to the CAN A
or CAN B line. Selections are:
9191 Type (OFF/ON). Set to ON for broadcast
9192 Application (select application 1-4)
Display lines:
Shows the available texts of the display.
Ethernet setup:
Setup of the Ethernet (option N) IP address, gateway address and MAC address.

9.1.33 Event log


The logging of data is divided into groups:
Event log containing 150 loggings.
Alarm log containing 150 loggings.
Battery test log containing 52 loggings.
Engine interface alarm log
The logs can be viewed in the display or in the PC utility software. When the individual logs are full, each new
event will overwrite the oldest event following the first in first out principle.
To enter the log list:
1. Press
2. Select the needed list by using the
the

and

push-buttons (move the highlight of the list), and press

push-button.

9.1.34 Counters
Counters for various values are included, and some of these can be adjusted if necessary, for instance if the
unit is installed on an existing genset or a new circuit breaker has been installed.
The table shows the adjustable values and their function in menu 6100:

DEIF A/S

Page 282 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Description

FunctionComment

Comment

6101 Running time

Offset adjustment of the total running hours


counter.

Counting when the running feedback


is present.

6102 Running time

Offset adjustment of the total running thousand hours counter.

Counting when the running feedback


is present.

6103 GB operations

Offset adjustment of the number of generator breaker operations.

Counting at each GB close command.

6104 MB operations

Offset adjustment of the number of mains


breaker operations.

Counting at each MB close command.

6105 kWh reset

Resets the kWh counter.

Automatically resets to OFF after the


reset. The reset function cannot be
left active.

6106 Start attempts

Offset adjustment of the number of start attempts.

Counting at each start attempt.

9.1.35 M-Logic
M-Logic functionality is included in the unit and is not an option-dependent function, however, selecting additional options can increase the functionality.
M-Logic is used to execute different commands at predefined conditions. M-Logic is not a PLC but substitutes
one if only very simple commands are needed.
M-Logic is a simple tool based on logic events. One or more input conditions are defined, and at the activation of those inputs the defined output will occur. A great variety of inputs can be selected, such as digital
inputs, alarm conditions and running conditions. A variety of the outputs can also be selected, such as relay
outputs, change of genset modes and change of running modes.

The M-Logic is part of the PC utility software, and as such it can only be configured in the PC
utility software and not via the display.

The main purpose of M-Logic is to give the operator/designer more flexible possibilities of operating the generator control system.

Please refer to the Help function in the PC utility software for a full description of this configuration tool.
Please refer to the application note M-Logic for further functional details.

9.1.36 Configurable alarm LEDs


The four LEDs on the left side of the display can be controlled via M-Logic. For each LED there is a choice
between three colours (red, green and yellow) with or without blinking.

DEIF A/S

Page 283 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

For each LED there is a text box, where the indication of the function can be written. This must be done on a
piece of stiff paper or a plastic transparent, as the texts are to be slided into a slot at the top of the AGC 200
unit. The slide-in paper/transparent template looks like this:

100

56

26

The above template is scale 1:1 when printing on A4 paper size.

9.1.37 USW communication


It is possible to communicate with the unit via the PC utility software. The purpose is to be able to remote
monitor and control the genset application.

DEIF A/S

Page 284 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

It is possible to remote control the genset from the PC utility software if a TCP/IP router is
used. Take precautions that it is safe to remote operate the genset to avoid personal injury or
death.

Application settings
Please refer to the PC utility software help file.
Safety
If communication fails, the unit will operate according to the received data. If e.g. only half of the parameter
file has been downloaded when the communication is interrupted, the unit will use this actual data.

9.1.38 Differential measurement


With the differential measurement function, it is possible to compare two analogue inputs and trigger on the
difference between the two values.
If the differential function is for example air filter check, the timer will be activated if the setpoint between PA
(analogue A) and PB (analogue B) is exceeded. If the differential value drops below the setpoint value before
the timer runs out, then the timer will be stopped and reset.

Before filter
PB

Differential
limit

Differential
Alarm

P=PA-PB
PA

After filter

Timer
value

Six different differential measurements between two analogue input values can be configured.
Differential measurements between two sensors can be configured in menus 4600-4606 and 4670-4676. As
an example, the figure below shows the two parameters for input selection for differential measurement 1.

Inputs are selected from the input list as shown below, avaible inputs are:
Multi-inputs
EIC measurements
External inputs (option H8)
Analogue input (M15.X, only AGC-4)
Multi-input (M16.X, only AGC-4)

DEIF A/S

Page 285 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

The relevant alarm setpoint is chosen in parameters 4610-4660 and 4680-4730. Each alarm can be configured in two alarm levels for each differential measurement between analogue input A and input B. The figure
below shows the two parameters to configure alarm level 1 and 2, for differential measurement 1.

9.1.39 Configurable alarms


The alarms associated to the differential measurements are not locked as delta alarms. It is possible to use
these six inputs, with two alarms each, as configurable alarms. The alarms can be configured to: Multi-inputs,
external analogue inputs and some EIC values. When the same input is used for both "inpA" and "inpB" in the
channels 4601 to 4606 and 4672 to 4676, the differential measurement will be disabled, and this allows 12
configurable alarms over up to six different inputs.

DEIF A/S

Page 286 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

How to configure an alarm for "EIC Ambient temp." on "Delta ana1":


Choose identical inputs

Set "inpA" and "inpB" to the same desired value. This will disable the differential measurement, and the
alarms associated to the channel are now depending on the actual value.
Each input has two associated configurable alarms

Configure the associated alarms as desired. In this case the first alarm is set to give a warning when the ambient temperature has been below -20 degrees for more than 30 seconds. The second alarm is set to give a
warning when the ambient temperature has been above 50 degrees for more than 30 seconds.

DEIF A/S

Page 287 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

9.1.40 Oil renewal function


The purpose of the oil renewal function is to make it possible to exchange a small portion of the lubricating oil
of the engine with fresh or new oil. This means that the quality of the oil is kept at a satisfactory level without
significant deterioration of the oil quality in the entire period between oil changes.
The time interval between oil changes is assumed to be 1000 hours (default set point) of operation; this set
point can be changed in menu 6893. The renewal function will read the engine hours from the engine interface communication (EIC). The running hours counter in the AGC is only used if the EIC counter is not available.
The function in the AGC is to activate a relay under defined conditions. Then the relay must be used for the
oil renewal system (not part of the DEIF scope of supply), where lubricating oil is removed and added to the
engine. Any freely configurable relay is available for this feature. In parameter 6891, a set point is available,
which can be set between 1 and 9999 hours to define when the relay should close, and it is possible to select
which relay is to be used. Furthermore, this parameter can be inversed, meaning that the relay will close from
0 hours until the set point is reached.

If menu 6893 is set to 1000 hours, the AGC will reset the hours just for the oil renewal function when the
running hours counter has reached 1000 hours. If for example menu 6891 has been set to 750 hours and
inverse is not enabled, the relay will close at 750 hours and remain closed until 1000 hours is reached, and
then the hours counter starts from 0 hours again.
Below it is shown for menu 6893.

DEIF A/S

Page 288 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

9.1.41 Double starter


In some emergency installations, the prime mover is equipped with an extra start motor. Dependent on the
configuration, the "Double starter" function can toggle between the two starters or try several attempts with
the standard starter before switching to the "Double starter".
The "Double starter" function is set up in channel 6191-6192, and a relay for cranking with the alternative
starter is chosen in the configuration of inputs/outputs.

DEIF A/S

Page 289 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Remember to write the settings when changing the I/O configuration.

Channel

Menu text

Explanation

6191

Standard attempts

Accepted total number of start attempts before a "start failure" alarm is activated

6192

Double attempts

The number of start attempts before redirecting the start signal

The "Double starter" function is enabled by choosing a value higher than zero in channel 6192. This value
determines the amount of attempts on each starter before switching to the next. The "standard starter" has
first priority. When the maximum allowed number of attempts, defined in channel 6191, is reached, the start
attempts stop and the alarm "Start failure" appears.
- A value of 1 in channel 6192 results in a toggle function with 1 attempt on each starter between toggling.
- A value of 2 in channel 6192 results in a toggle function with 2 attempts on each starter between toggling.

DEIF A/S

Page 290 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Examples:
6191 Std attempts

6192 Dbl attempts

1st attempt

2nd attempt

3rd attempt

4th attempt

5th attempt

Standard

Double

Standard

Alarm

Standard

Double

Standard

Double

Standard

Standard

Standard

Double

Double

Standard

Standard

Standard

Standard

Standard

Alarm

9.2 Mains-dependent droop functions


9.2.1 Frequency-dependent droop
This droop function is a mains aid function. It can be used when the genset is running parallel to the mains in
the following modes: "Fixed power", "Mains power export" and "Peak shaving". In case the frequency drops
or rises due to instability of the mains, the curve for frequency-dependent droop is made to compensate the
power set point. The power set point will be reduced with greater mains frequency and increased when the
mains frequency is lower than specified.
Example:
This example and diagram is based on the parameters from the table below. With a nominal frequency of 50
Hz and an actual frequency of 51.5 Hz, there is a deviation of 1.5 Hz which is equal to a 3 % deviation from
the nominal setting. The genset will then droop to 400 kW according to the below diagram.
P [KW]

MAX

DBH
HYSH
SLPL
Fixed Power Setpoint

SLPH
HYSL
DBL
MIN

(Fnom-fact)*100/fact [%]
10%

9%

8%

7%

6%

5%

4%

3%

2%

1%

0%

1%

2%

3%

4%

5%

6%

7%

8%

9%

10%

The curve can be designed inside MIN/MAX [kW] area.

DEIF A/S

Page 291 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Menu

Settings

Name

Description

7051

450

kW

7121

DBL[%]

Deadband low in percentages of nominal frequency.

7122

DBH[%]

Deadband high in percentages of nominal frequency.

7123

HYSL[%]

Hysteresis low in percentages of nominal frequency. If HYSL is set


above DBL, the hysteresis low is disabled.

7124

HYSH[%]

Hysteresis high in percentages of nominal frequency. If HYSH is set


above DBH, the hysteresis high is disabled.

7131

150

MIN[kW]

Minimum output of droop handling.

7132

900

MAX[kW]

Maximum output of droop handling.

7133

50

SLPL[kW/%]

Slope low. The setting determines the increase/decrease of power reference per percentage the actual frequency drops below nominal frequency.

7134

-50

SLPH[kW/%]

Slope high. The setting determines the increase/decrease of power reference per percentage the actual frequency rises above nominal frequency.

7143

ON

Enable

Fixed power set point.

Enable droop curve function.

This droop function is performed based on the actual value for the power set point in the moment the droop is
activated. If the function for an example is activated during ramping and the actual power value at this moment is 200 kW, the droop is performed based on 200 kW as the "Fixed Power Setpoint" stated in the diagram.
The slopes (7133/7134) are used, as long as the mains frequency has a direction away from nominal settings. When the mains is starting to recover and the frequency is heading towards the nominal settings, the
power set point is waiting to be restored until the frequency is within the hysteresis limits. If the hysteresis is
disabled, the power set point will simply be restored using the slope.
When drooping, the slopes will be scaled based on size of the actual power at the droop start, compared to
the specified nominal power. For example, if a DG of nominal 1000 kW is producing 500 kW when droop is
activated, then only 50 % of the slope values will be used. To achieve a nominal droop of 40 % per Hz, a
1000 kW (50 Hz) DG should be configured with slopes of 200 kW/%. If DG then only is producing 500 kW
when droop is activated, the actual slope will be experienced as 100 kW/%.
If "Auto ramp selection" is enabled (channel 2624), the secondary pair of ramps will be used during frequency-dependent power droop. In order to prevent a new situation with faulty mains, it may be advantageous to
use slower ramps in or after a situation with an unstable mains. The secondary ramps will automatically be
disabled again when the frequency-dependent power droop is no longer active, and the specified power set
point is reached. If "Auto ramp selection" is disabled, it is only possible to activate the secondary ramps using
M-Logic. Parameters used for the secondary ramps are stated in the table below.
Menu

Default

2616

0.1[%/s]

Ramp up speed 2

Slope of ramp 2 when ramping up

2623

0.1[%/s]

Ramp down speed 2

Slope of ramp 2 when ramping down (not used for deload)

2624

ON

Auto ramp selection

Activate or disable automatic selection of secondary ramps

DEIF A/S

Name

Description

Page 292 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

9.2.2 Voltage support


The voltage support function is also referred to as "Voltage-dependent PF/Q control (y2(x2) droop)". The
function changes the cos phi or the kvar set point of the generators if the mains voltage changes beyond certain values in order to suport the mains voltage. The idea is that if the mains voltage drops, the generators
increase their excitation and support the mains voltage. If the mains voltage increases, the excitation of the
DGs decreases in order to produce a smaller amount of var.
This function is used when the generators are paralleling to the mains and running one of following modes:
"Fixed power", "Mains power export" or "Peak shaving". It cannot be used in island mode applications.
Functional description
The diagram below shows the principle. The dotted line illustrates the x-axis (voltage deviation), and the vertical line (PF) is the y-axis. The cos phi set point is 0.90 in this example, but the voltage support works around
any set point that is adjusted.
From SW version 4.52.x: The output in the exact moment the droop is launched will be frozen
and used as set point for the droop actions as long as the droop is active. (Illustrated as "Power factor set point" in the diagram below).

COS PHI

0.6 C

DBL
MAX
SH
Power Factor Set point
0.9 I
SL

MIN
DBH
0.6 l

(Unom-Uact)*100/Uact [%]
10%

9%

8%

7%

6%

5%

4%

3%

2%

1%

0%

1%

2%

3%

4%

5%

6%

7%

8%

9%

10%

The diagram illustrates the following areas:

DEIF A/S

Page 293 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Zone

Additional functions

Voltage

Minimum cos phi

Cos phi

Menu

90 to 96 %

Min. limit

7171

96 to 98 %

Sloping

7175

Deadband

98 to 102 %

0.90

7151-7152

Increasing slope

102 to 104 %

Sloping

7176

104 to 110 %

Max. limit

7173

Limit
Decreasing slope
Low

High
Maximum cos phi
Limit

Parameters
The above diagram is configured with the following parameter settings:
Menu

Settings

7052

0.9

Power factor

Power factor set point 0.6-1.

7053

Inductive

Power factor

Inductive/capacitive.

7151

2.00

DBL [%]

Deadband low in percentage of nominal X2.

7152

2.00

DBH [%]

Deadband high in percentage of nominal X2.

7153

1.00

HYSL [%]

Hysteresis low in percentage of nominal X2. If HYSL is set above DBL,


the hysteresis low is disabled. (Not shown in the diagram).

7154

1.00

HYSH [%]

Hysteresis high in percentage of nominal X2. If HYSH is set above DBH,


the hysteresis high is disabled. (Not shown in the diagram).

7171

0.8

MI

Minimum output of droop handling. This setting is related to the setting


in 7172.

7172

Inductive

I/C

Minimum output of droop handling.

7173

1.00

MA

Maximum output of droop handling. This setting is related to the setting


in 7174.

7174

Inductive

I/C

Maximum output of droop handling.

7175

-0.05

SL [PF/%]

Slope low. The setting determines the increase/decrease of PF reference per percent the actual X2 drops below nominal X2.

7176

0.05

SH [PF/%]

Slope high. The setting determines the increase/decrease of PF reference per percent the actual X2 rises above nominal X2.

7181

PF(X2)

Y2(X2)

Output type for curve 2. Selections currently available: "Reactive power"


and "PF".

7182

X2

Input type for curve 2. Selections currently available: "Power" and "Voltage".

7183

ON

ENA

Enabling/disabling of curve 2.

DEIF A/S

Name

Description

Page 294 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Hysteresis
In addition to the mentioned settings, a hysteresis can also be used. The function of the hysteresis is that the
cos phi set point stays at the drooped value if the voltage returns towards nominal, until the adjusted hysteresis is reached.
If for example the voltage drops, the cos phi set point follows the slope to for example 0.82. If the voltage now
recovers, the cos phi set point stays at the mentioned 0.82 (in our example) until the voltage reaches 99 %,
and then it moves back to our set point of 0.90. (1 % is the set point of the hysteresis).
If the hysteresis is adjusted to a higher value than the deadband, it is not in effect. Therefore, if the hysteresis
is not used, please adjust it higher than the DB.
Slope
Two settings for the slope are available, namely the "Slope Low" (SL) and the "Slope High" (SH). The name
of the settings refer to the voltage being lower or higher than the nominal voltage (100 %). The slope is adjusted with a sign (positive or negative). The positive sign is the leading (capacitive) range, and the negative sign
is the lagging (inductive) range.
In order to explain when to adjust positive or negative sign, the following coordinate system is used.

When the requirement of the voltage support is known, it can be decided whether the slope is positive or negative. This is best illustrated with an example:
If the voltage drops compared to the nominal voltage, the generator is requested to increase the excitation
and thereby the produced kvars (in order to support the grid). If the set point (SP) is 1.00 and a deadband
setting is 1 %, the cos phi set point will decrease from 1.00 to 0.90 (SL setting is -0.05). See the calculation
and diagram below.
SPNEW 388 V AC = 1.00 - (((396-388)/400)*100) 0.05 = 0.90 (simplified)

DEIF A/S

Page 295 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Capacitive range
Even though the function is normally used to support a low mains voltage, it is possible to adjust it so it decreases the excitation if the voltage increases (leading power factor).
To avoid pole slip and damage of the generators, make sure that the capability curve of the
generators is respected and that the generators are not running under-excited or without excitation.

9.2.3 Example of voltage-dependent power factor


Voltage-dependent power factor control is a function that gives a dynamic power factor control in a parallel to
mains system based on the mains voltage. The purpose is to support the mains voltage locally behind a
transformer by minimising the reactive current flow to the mains.
These settings are only relevant if: Menu 7182 is set to "U", and menu 7183 is set to "ON".

DEIF A/S

Page 296 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Menu

Settings

Additional functions

Name

Description

7052

0.9

Power factor

Fixed power factor set point 0.6-1.

7053

Inductive

Power factor

Fixed power factor inductive/capacitive selection.

7151

2.00

DBL[%]

Deadband low in percentages of nominal voltage.

7152

2.00

DBH[%]

Deadband high in percentages of nominal voltage.

7153

1.00

HYSL[%]

Hysteresis low in percentages of nominal voltage. If HYSL is set to 0 or


above the value of 7151(DBL), the hysteresis low is disabled.

7154

1.00

HYSH[%]

Hysteresis high in percentages of nominal voltage. If HYSH is set to 0


or above the value of 7152(DBH), the hysteresis high is disabled.

7171

0.7

MI

Minimum output of droop handling (voltage decreasing). This setting is


related to the setting in 7172.

7172

Inductive

I/C

Minimum output of droop handling (inductive/capacitive selection).

7173

0.9

MA

Maximum output of droop handling (voltage increasing). This setting is


related to the setting in 7174.

7174

Capacitive

I/C

Maximum output of droop handling (inductive/capacitive selection).

7175

-0.1

SL[PF/%]

Slope low. The setting determines the increase/decrease of PF reference per percentage the actual voltage drops below nominal.

7176

0.05

SH[PF/%]

Slope high. The setting determines the increase/decrease of PF reference per percentage the actual voltage rises above nominal.

7181

PF(X2)

Y2(X2)

Output type for curve 2. Selections currently available: "Reactive power" and "PF".

If reactive power control is selected in setting 7181, the programming is similar to that of frequency droop (y1(x1)). Please refer to the Designer's Reference Handbook explanation of frequency droop.
With a nominal voltage of 400 V and an actual voltage of 412 V, there is a deviation of 12 V which is equal to
a 3 % deviation from the nominal setting. The genset will then droop to a power factor of 0.95 inductive according to the above settings.
Voltage-dependent PF droop curve
PF

0.6 Cap

MAX 7173/7174
DBL HYSL
(7151) (7153)

DBH
(7152)

SH (7176)
Setting 7052/7053 value
(fixed PF setpoint)

HYSH
(7154)

SL (7175)

MIN (7171/7172)
0.6 lnd

-10%

DEIF A/S

-9%

-8%

-7%

-6%

-5%

-4%

-3%

-2%

-1%

0%

1%

2%

3%

4%

5%

6%

7%

8%

9%

10%

(Actual U - nominal U) * 100


Nominal U

Page 297 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

The settings of MA and MI can be reversed, meaning that the reactive power will move in the
inductive direction with increasing voltage.
The system measures and reacts based on the mains voltage measurement. The function will make a dynamic voltage-dependent PF that is used to support the mains voltage. The ramp has a configurable deadband (DBL/DBH) that can be used with reference to the nominal voltage of the mains to deactivate the ramp
functionality.
This is to have a normal operation band where a normal voltage fluctuation does not create disturbance on
the mains. If the deadband is set to 0, the deadband is removed and the ramp will be active at any time.
When the mains measurement is outside the deadband, the voltage deviation is taken into consideration and
a new power factor value is calculated. The power factor regulator of the generator will then adjust the power
factor and thereby change the var import/export of the plant.
The calculation is based on the fixed power factor set point value.
From SW version 4.52.x: The output in the exact moment the droop is launched will be frozen
and used as set point for the droop actions as long as the droop is active. (Illustrated as "fixed
PF setpoint" in the diagram above).
The system is able to run the generator with a capacitive and an inductive power factor lowering or raising the
mains voltage.
The system is made with only one active regulator on the generator and a variable curve defining the set
point to the regulator. This ensures that there are no hunting problems with two to three regulators in cascade.
The ramp slope is set in % per unit [%/u] where the unit is in V AC, meaning that the nominal setting for slope
low, 10 %/u means 10 % increase of power factor per volt AC deviation.

9.2.4 Example of power-dependent power factor control


Power-dependent power factor control is a function that gives a dynamic power factor control in a parallel to
mains system based on the generator-produced power. The purpose is to support the mains voltage locally
behind a transformer by minimising the reactive current flow in the grid.
These settings are only relevant if: Menu 7182 is set to "P", and menu 7183 is set to "ON".

DEIF A/S

Page 298 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Menu

Settings

Name

Additional functions

Description

7052

1.0

Power factor

Fixed power factor set point 0.6-1.

7053

Inductive

Power factor

Fixed power factor inductive/capacitive selection.

7151

0.00

DBL[%]

Deadband low in percentages of nominal power. In this example set to


0 to disable the deadband.

7152

50.00

DBH[%]

Deadband high in percentages of nominal power. In this example the


deadband is set high as the droop is not expected to be used.

7153

1.00 %

HYSL[%]

Hysteresis high in percentages of nominal power. If HYSL is set above


the value of 7152(DBH), the hysteresis high is disabled.

7154

51.00

HYSH[%]

Hysteresis high in percentages of nominal power. If HYSL is set above


the value of 7152(DBH), the hysteresis high is disabled. In this example the hysteresis is disabled.

7171

1.0

MI

Minimum output of droop handling (voltage decreasing). This setting is


related to the setting in 7172. If the power increases above 100 %, the
PF is kept at 1.0.

7172

Inductive

I/C

Minimum output of droop handling (inductive/capacitive selection).

7173

0.95

MA

Maximum output of droop handling (voltage increasing). This setting is


related to the setting in 7174.

7174

Capacitive

I/C

Maximum output of droop handling (inductive/capacitive selection).

7175

0.001

SL[PF/%]

Slope low. The setting determines the increase/decrease of PF reference per percentage the actual voltage drops below nominal.

7176

0.000

SH[PF/%]

Slope high. The setting determines the increase/decrease of PF reference per percentage the actual voltage rises above nominal. In this example, the PF is kept at the nominal PF when the power is increasing
above 100 %.

7181

PF(X2)

Y2(X2)

Output type for curve 2. Selections currently available "Reactive power" and "PF".

If reactive power control is selected in setting 7181, the programming is similar to that of frequency droop (y1(x1)). Please refer to the Designer's Reference Handbook explanation of frequency droop.

DEIF A/S

Page 299 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

PF droop curve
PF

0.95 Cap

MAX (P) 7173/7174

0.98 Cap

SL (7175)

DBL (7151)
MIN (7171/
7172)

Setting 7052/7053 value


(fixed PF setpoint)

0.98 Ind

0.95 Ind

0%

10%

20%

30%

40%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100% 110% 120% 130% 140% 150% 160% 170% 180% 190% 200%

Produced P * 100
Nominal P

The system measures and reacts based on the generator power measurement. The function will make a dynamic power-dependent PF that is used to support the mains voltage/compensate the voltage impact of the
power produced. The ramp has a configurable deadband (DBH) that can be used with reference to the nominal power of the generator to deactivate the ramp functionality.
This is to have a normal operation band where a normal power variation does not create disturbance on the
mains. If the deadband is set to 0, the deadband is removed and the ramp will be active at any time.
When the power measurement is outside the deadband, the power production is taken into consideration and
a new power factor value is calculated. The power factor regulator of the generator will then adjust the power
factor and thereby change the var import/export of the plant.
The calculation is based on the fixed power factor set point value.
From SW version 4.52.x: The output in the exact moment the droop is launched will be frozen
and used as set point for the droop actions as long as the droop is active. (Illustrated as "fixed
PF setpoint" in the diagram above).
The system is able to run the generator with a capacitive and an inductive power factor to compensate for
mains voltage.
The system is made with only one active regulator on the generator and a variable curve defining the set
point to the regulator. This ensures that there are no hunting problems with two to three regulators in cascade.

9.3 Fuel pump logic


The fuel pump logic is used to start and stop the fuel supply pump to maintain the fuel level in the service
tank at pre-defined levels. The start and stop limits are detected from one of the three multi-inputs.
Set points available in menu 6550:

DEIF A/S

Page 300 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Parameter

Name

Function

6551

Fuel pump log.


start

Fuel transfer pump starting point in percentage.

6552

Fuel pump log.


stop

Fuel transfer pump stopping point in percentage.

6553

Fuel fill check

Delay timer before fuel fill check alarm is activated.

6554

Output A

The output relay to be used for control of the fuel pump. The selected relay
activates below the start limit and deactivates above the stop level.

6555

Type

The multi-input or external analogue input to be used for the fuel level sensor.
Choose multi-input if 4 to 20 mA is used.
Choose "auto detection" if an RMI is used.

6556

Fail class

The fail class of the fuel fill alarm.

6557

Fuel fill check


slope

This parameter defines the slope for the fuel fill check alarm.

The fuel pump relay can be activated via M-Logic.


The output relay should be configured as a limit relay. Otherwise, an alarm will be raised whenever the output is activated.
The drawing below shows how the fuel pump is activated when the level reaches 20 % and stopped again
when the level has reached 80 %.

Fuel level

Fuel service tank level

80%

20%
Time

Fuel pump start level

Fuel pump stop level

9.3.1 Fuel fill check


The fuel pump logic includes a fuel fill check function.

DEIF A/S

Page 301 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

When the fuel pump is running, the fuel level must increase by at least the percentage value in menu 6557
fuel fill slope within the fuel fill check timer set in menu 6553. If the fuel level does not increase as the
slope defines within the adjusted delay time, then the fuel pump relay deactivates and a fuel fill alarm occurs. The fuel fill alarm can be enabled/disabled in menu 6553.

level, 2%

level, 2%

tFill check

The level of increase of 2 % that is shown above is just an example and can be changed in parameter 6557 (fuel fill slope).

9.4 Fan logic


The AGC is able to control four different fans. This could e.g. be air supply fans for supplying air to a genset
in a closed enclosure, or radiator fans for switching on and off cooling fans for air coolers.
There are two features in the fan control of the AGC.
1. Priority rearranging depending on running hours of the fans
2. Temperature-dependent start and stop
A priority routine ensures that the running hours of the available fans are evened out and the priority shifts
between them.
The functionality behind the temperature-dependent start/stop is that the AGC measures a temperature, e.g.
cooling water temperature, and based on this temperature it switches on and off relays that must be used for
engaging the fan(s) itself.
The fan control function is active as long as running feedback is detected.

9.4.1 Fan parameters


Each fan has a group of parameters that defines their scheme of operation. It is recommended to use the PC
utility SW for the setup, because then it is possible to see all parameters. The setup of the fan control is done
in the menus 6561-6620 and by using M-Logic in the PC utility SW.

DEIF A/S

Page 302 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Parameters:

M-Logic:

9.4.2 Input for fan control


The fan control requires a temperature input in order to start and stop the fans based on a temperature measurement.
Fan temperature input is set up in parameter 6561, and this input can be selected between these inputs:
Three multi-inputs in slot #7 are available
EIC measurement (engine interface communication)
External analogue input 1-8 (H8.X)
Analogue inputs (M15.X)
Multi-inputs (M16.X)
The multi-inputs can be configured to e.g. a Pt100 sensor that measures an engine- or ambient temperature.
If EIC is selected, this is defined as the highest measured temperature of either cooling water or oil temperatures.

DEIF A/S

Page 303 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Based on the measurement of the selected input, the fan(s) is (are) started and stopped.

9.4.3 Fan start/stop


The start and stop settings of the fan(s) are set up in parameters 6563 to 6574. With the settings in the table
below, the illustrative curve can be observed.
A hysteresis (abbreviation: hyst.) ensures that there is a range between the start and stop.

The following start/stop curve will be generated if a bow setting is used:

9.4.4 Fan output


At parameter 6581 to 6584, the output relays for fans A to D are selected. The purpose of these relays is to
issue a signal to the fan starter cabinet. The relay must be energised for the fan to run.

DEIF A/S

Page 304 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

9.4.5 Fan start delay


If two or more fans are requested to be started at the same time, it is possible to add a start delay between
each fan start. The reason for this is to limit the peak start current, so all fans will not contribute with a start
current at the same time. This delay is adjusted in the menu 6586.

9.4.6 Fan running feedback


To make sure that the fan is running, it is possible to assign a digital input as a running feedback. The running
feedback has to be programmed through M-Logic, below is an example of how to programme it.

The "Fan A/B/C/D running command" output tells the AGC that the fan is running. The output is found under
Output and Command as shown in the screenshot above.

DEIF A/S

Page 305 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

9.4.7 Fan failure


It is possible to activate an alarm if the fan does not start. The fan failure alarm appears if the running feedback from the fan does not appear. In parameters 6590 to 6620, the fan failure alarms are set up for fans A to
D.

9.4.8 Fan priority (running hours)


The priority of the fans A to D rotates automatically from 1st to 4th priority. This is done automatically, because the running hours of the fans are detected and are used for the rearranging.
M-Logic setup:
If the fan unit is raising a signal that is led to a digital input on the AGC when it is running, then the following
M-Logic must be programmed:

DEIF A/S

Page 306 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

When it is not possible to get a running feedback from the fan unit, the internal relay of the AGC must be
used to indicate that the fan is running. If e.g. R57 is the relay for FAN A, the following M-Logic must be programmed:

The running hour can be reset by entering parameter 6585 and then selecting the desired fan hours to be
reset.

Only reset is possible. It is not possible to add an offset to the run hour counter.

DEIF A/S

Page 307 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

9.4.9 Fan priority update


In parameter 6562, the priority update rate (hours between priority rearrange) is selected:

If the fan priority update is set to 0 hours, the order of priority will be fixed at: Fan A, fan B, fan C and fan D.

9.5 CAN share


9.5.1 Description of function
The function CAN share, or digital load sharing as it is also referred to, gives the opportunity to load share via
the CANbus. It can be used in applications with two or more generators where power management features
are not needed and mains are not present. With CAN share, it is possible to load share between up to 128
generators with simple installation and setup.
The drawing below shows the basic principle of communication between the controllers.
Busbar
CANbus

GB

AGC 200

GB

AGC 200

Diesel generator 1

Diesel generator 2

GB

AGC 200

G
Diesel generator 3

CAN share is only available in the AGC 200 variants: 222, 23x, 24x

DEIF A/S

Page 308 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

9.5.2 How to set up


When configuring the controller for CAN share, it is important to notice that, as shown below, it has to be a
Single DG drawing. The reason for this is that the controllers in a CAN share system do not need to have an
internal ID assigned as in a power management system. When connecting to the CANbus line, the CAN
share system automatically assigns the unit an available ID. This is handled by the internal CANbus communication, and the user will not be able to choose an ID for the unit. When disconnecting a unit from the CANbus line, the system automatically detects this and removes the specific ID from the load sharing system.
For CANbus wiring details, please refer to the "AGC 200 installation instructions 4189340610".
The table below shows the steps to set up the controller for CAN share, the setup must be done in each controller.
For details about how to use the utility software, please refer to the help function (F1) in the utility software.

DEIF A/S

Page 309 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Description

Image

Reference

1.

Select which CAN port to use for


CAN share and select Canshare in
the drop down menu.

Parameter numbers for CAN


ports:
CAN A: 7841
CAN B: 7842
CAN C: 7843

2.

Create a new plant configuration


and select the plant type to be Single DG

Utility software application configuration or quick setup

3.

Make an application drawing with a


single generator.

Utility software application configuration or quick setup

4.

After configuring this in each controller, the system is ready for CAN share and more generators can
be addded to the CAN share line without having to assign CAN IDs.

9.5.3 CAN share failure


If a failure occours on the CAN share line, it is possible to display an alarm using the parameters for CAN
share failure in menu 7860. The alarm includes a timer (7861), fail class (7865) and the option to activate
relays (7863,7864) in case of a failure. Furthermore it is possible to chose if the controller should change
mode (7866) in case of a failure on the CAN share line.
CAN share when power management is down
It is possible to use CAN share for backup in a power management application with the M-Logic command
"Use alternative LS instead of PMS". Please see the topic "Load sharing" in the "Power management" chapter located in this document.

DEIF A/S

Page 310 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Please refer to the "AGC 200 parameter list 4189340605" for further details about parameters.

9.6 Droop mode


9.6.1 Principle and setup
Droop mode can be used when a new genset is installed together with existing gensets which operate in
droop mode in order to make equal load sharing with the existing gensets. This regulation mode can be used
where it is required/allowed that the generator frequency drops with increasing load.
The droop mode parameters can be adjusted between 0-10% droop. If the value is different from 0%, the
droop percentage will be applied on top of the regulation output of the governor (f) or AVR (U).
Droop regulation parameters
Parameter number

Name

Description

2514

f droop

Droop setting for frequency regulator with analogue output

2573

f droop relay

Droop setting for frequency regulator with relay regulation

2644

U droop

Droop setting for voltage regulator with analogue output

2693

U droop relay

Droop setting for voltage regulator with relay regulation

When using droop mode, the frequency PID (f) and voltage PID (U) is active
Activating droop regulation
The following M-Logic commands are used to activate droop regulation. This gives more options to activate
the regulation i.e. a digital input, AOP button or an event.
M-Logic output

M-Logic command

Description

GOV/AVR control

Act. frequency droop regulation

Activates the use of frequency droop parameters


mentioned above

GOV/AVR control

Act. voltage droop regulation

Activates the use of voltage droop parameters mentioned above

Application configuration
When operating in droop mode, the AGC has to be configured with a Single DG application drawing. This is
done through the utility software or with quick setup.
Please see the utility software help function (F1) for details about application configuration.

DEIF A/S

Page 311 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

9.6.2 Voltage droop example


The diagram below shows an example for one generator where the voltage droop setting is 4% and 10% in
proportion to the reactive power, Q (kVAr). As it is shown in the example, the voltage drops as the load increases. The principle is the same with generators in parallel where the generators will use the droop to
share the load and allow the voltage/frequency to drop accordingly.

U [V]

400
4% droop

380

10% droop

360
0

50%

100%

% Q [kVAr]

9.6.3 High droop setting


To illustrate the influence of a high droop setting, the diagram below shows how a frequency variation gives a
change in the load, the principle is the same with voltage regulation. The load change is marked as P.
Freq (Hz)

fNOM

P(kW)
P

This can be used if the generator must operate base-loaded.

9.6.4 Low droop setting


To illustrate the influence of a low droop setting, the diagram below shows how a frequency variation gives a
change in the load, the principle is the same with voltage droop regulation. The load change is marked as P.

DEIF A/S

Page 312 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

In this diagram, the load change (P) is larger than before. This means that the generator will vary more in
loading than with the higher droop setting.
Freq (Hz)

fNOM

P(kW)
P

This can be used if the generator must operate as a peak load machine.

9.6.5 Compensation for isochronous governors


When the genset is equipped with a governor only providing isochronous operation, the droop setting can be
used to compensate for the missing droop setting possibility on the governor.

9.7 Step-up transformer


9.7.1 Step-up transformer
In certain cases, the use of a generator with step-up transformer (called a block) is required. This may be to
adapt to the closest grid voltage or to step up the voltage to minimise the losses in cables and also to bring
down the cable size. The applications where a step-up transformer is needed, is supported by the ML-2. The
functions available in this application are:
1. Synchronising with or without phase angle compensation
2. Voltage measurement displayed
3. Generator protections
4. Busbar protections
A diagram of a block is shown below
Generator/transformer block:

DEIF A/S

Page 313 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Typically the synchronising breaker is on the high voltage (HV) side, and there is no breaker (or only a manually operated one) on the low voltage (LV) side. In some applications, the breaker could also be placed on
the LV side. But this does not influence on the setting in the ML-2, as long as the breaker and the step-up
transformer is both placed between the measuring points for the ML-2. The measuring points are shown as
black dots in the figures above and below.

The phase angle compensation would not be an issue if there was no phase angle shift across the step-up
transformer, but in many cases there is. The phase angle shift is in Europe described using the vector group
description. Instead of vector group, this could also be called clock notation or phase shift.
When voltage measurement transformers are used, these have to be included in the total
phase angle compensation.
When a ML-2 is used for synchronising, the device uses the ratio of the nominal voltages for the generator
and the busbar, to calculate a setpoint for the AVR and the voltage synchronising window (dUMAX).
Example:
A 10000 V/400 V step-up transformer is installed after a generator with the nominal voltage of 400 V. The
nominal voltage of the busbar is 10000 V. Now, the voltage of the busbar is 10500 V. The generator is running 400 V before synchronising starts, but when attempting to synchronise, the AVR setpoint will be
changed to:
UBUS-MEASURED * UGEN-NOM/UBUS-NOM = 10500 * 400/10000 = 420 V

9.7.2 Vector group for step-up transformer


Vector group definition
The vector group is defined by 2 letters and a number:
The first letter is an upper case D or Y defining if the HV side windings are in Delta or Wye configuration.
The second letter is a lower case d, y or z defining if the LV side windings are in delta, wye or zigzag configuration.
The number is the vector group number, defining the phase angle shift between HV and LV side of the stepup transformer. The number is an expression of the LV side lag compared to the HV side voltage. The number is an expression of the lag angle divided by 30 degrees.
Example:
Dy11 = HV side: Delta, LV side: Wye, vector group 11: Phase shift = 11x (30) = -330 degrees.
Typical vector groups

DEIF A/S

Page 314 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Vector group

Clock notation

Phase shift

LV lag degrees
compared to HV

-30

30

-60

60

-120

120

-150

150

-180/180

180

150

210

120

240

10

10

60

300

11

11

30

330

Vector group 0
The phase shift is 0 degrees.
Yy0 example:

HV side

LV (generator) side

1L1

2L1

1L3

1L2

2L3

2L2

1L1 to 2L1 phase angle is 0 degrees


Phase compensation setting:
Parameter
9141

DEIF A/S

Function
BB (mains)/generator angle compensation

Setting
0 degrees

Page 315 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Connections:
LV

2L1
Generator

HV

GB

Busbar

2L2

1L1

1L2

2L3

1L3

AGC 3/ AGC 4/ PPU/


GPU/ PPM/ GPC

79

81

83

85

87

89

AGC 200

61

63

65

68

70

72

The connection that is shown in the diagram should always be used when an ML-2 is used for
a genset.
Vector group 1
The phase shift is -30 degrees.
Dy1 example:

HV side

LV (generator) side
2L1

1L1

2L3

1L3

1L2

2L2

1L1 to 2L1 phase angle is -30 degrees.


Phase compensation setting:
Parameter
9141

DEIF A/S

Function
BB (mains)/generator angle compensation

Setting
30 degrees

Page 316 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Connections:
LV

2L1
Generator

HV

GB

Busbar

2L2

1L1

1L2

2L3

1L3

AGC 3/ AGC 4/ PPU/


GPU/ PPM/ GPC

79

81

83

85

87

89

AGC 200

61

63

65

68

70

72

The connection that is shown in the diagram should always be used when a ML-2 is used for a
genset.
Vector group 11
The phase angle shift is 11 x (-30) = -330/+30 degrees.
Dy11 example:

HV side

LV (generator) side
2L1

1L1

2L2

1L3

1L2

2L3

1L1 to 2L1 phase angle is -333/+30 degrees.


Phase compensation setting:
Parameter
9141

DEIF A/S

Function
BB (mains)/generator angle compensation

Setting
-30 degrees

Page 317 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Connections:
LV

2L1
Generator

GB

HV

Busbar

2L2

1L1

1L2

2L3

1L3

AGC 3/ AGC 4/ PPU/


GPU/ PPM/ GPC

79

81

83

85

87

89

AGC 200

61

63

65

68

70

72

The connection that is shown in the diagram should always be used when an ML-2 is used for a genset.
Vector group 6
The phase angle shift is 6 x 30 = 180 degrees.
Yy6 example:

HV side

LV (generator) side

1L1

1L3

2L2

1L2

2L3

2L1

1L1 to 2L1 phase angle is -180/+180 degrees.


Phase compensation setting:
Parameter
9141

DEIF A/S

Function
BB (mains)/generator angle compensation

Setting
180 degrees

Page 318 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

Connections:
LV

2L1
Generator

HV

GB

Busbar

1L1

2L2

1L2

2L3

1L3

AGC 3/ AGC 4/ PPU/


GPU/ PPM/ GPC

79

81

83

85

87

89

AGC 200

61

63

65

68

70

72

The connection that is shown in the diagram should always be used when an ML-2 is used for
a genset.
Please select 179 degrees in parameter 9141 when vector group 6 is used.
Comparison table between different terminologies
Vector group

Clock notation

Phase shift

LV lag degrees
compared to HV

LV side lagging

LV side leading

-30

30

30

-60

60

60

-120

120

120

-150

150

150

-180/180

180

180

150

210

150

120

240

120

10

10

60

300

60

11

11

30

330

30

180

In the following, the name vector group will be used.

DEIF A/S

Page 319 of 324

Additional functions

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Table to read parameter 9141 compared to a step-up transformer


Vector group

Step-up transformer types

Parameter 9141

Yy0, Dd0, Dz0

Yd1, Dy1, Yz1

30

Dd2, Dz2

60

Dd4, Dz4

120

Yd5, Dy5, Yz5

150

Yy6, Dd6, Dz6

180

Yd7, Dy7, Yz7

-150

Dd8, Dz8

-120

10

Dd10, Dz10

-60

11

Yd11, Dy11, Yz11

-30

Note that DEIF does not take responsibility that the compensation is correct. Before closing
the breaker, DEIF recommends that customers always measure the synchronisation themselves.
Note that if voltage measurement is connected incorrectly, the setting in parameter 9141 will be
wrong!
Note that the setting shown in the table above does not include any phase angle twist made by
measurement transformers!
The settings shown in the table above are not correct if a step-down transformer is used.
These settings are shown later.

9.8 Demand of peak currents


9.8.1 I max. demand
The second readout is called I maximum demand, and shortened in the unit, I max. demand. The readout
displays the newest maximum peak current value. When a new maximum peak current is detected, the value
is saved in the display. The value can be reset in menu 6843. If the value is reset, it will be logged in the
event log.
The two reset functions will also be available as commands through M-Logic.

Display readout is updated with an interval of 6 seconds.

9.8.2 I thermal demand


This measurement is used to simulate a bimetallic system, known from the Maximum Demand ammeter,
which is specifically suited for indication of thermal loads in conjunction with cables, transformers, etc.

DEIF A/S

Page 320 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Additional functions

It is possible to have two different readouts shown in the display. The first readout is called I thermal demand.
This readout shows the average maximum peak current over an adjustable time interval.

Be aware that the calculated average is NOT the same as the average current over time. The I
thermal demand value is an average of the MAXIMUM PEAK current in the adjustable time interval.

The measured peak currents are sampled once every second, and every 6 seconds an average peak value is
calculated. If the peak value is higher than the previous maximum peak value, it is used to calculate a new
average. The thermal demand period will provide an exponential thermal characteristic.
The time interval in which the average maximum peak current is calculated can be adjusted in parameter
6840. The value can also be reset. If the value is reset, it will be logged in the event log and the readout in the
display is reset to 0.

9.9 Power and cos phi offsets


9.9.1 Power offsets
This function is for making a power offset from Pnom, 3 offsets are available. It is possible to enable offsets in
M-Logic, where offsets can be used as an event or an output where offsets can be activated or deactivated.
The offset can be set in menu 7220-7225. The enabled power offsets will be added/subtracted from the fixed
power setpoint in menu 7051, which refers to Pnom.
The adjusted fixed power setpoint will be limited to be inside the values in menu 7023 "Minimum load", and maximum value is Pnom.

9.9.2 Cos phi offsets


This function is for making a power offset from Pnom, 3 offsets are available. It is possible to enable offsets
via M-Logic, where offsets can be used as an event or an output where offsets can be activted or deactivated.
The cos phi offsets can be set in menu 7241-7245. The enabled cos phi offsets will be added/subtracted from
the fixed cos phi setpoint in menu 7052.
The adjusted fixed cos phi setpoint will be limited to be inside the values in menu 7171 "Cos
phi (x2)", and maximum value is in menu 7173 "Cos phi (x2)".

DEIF A/S

Page 321 of 324

Procedure for parameter setup

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

10. Procedure for parameter setup


10.1 Procedure for parameter setup
10.1.1 Procedure for parameter setup
This chapter deals with the procedure to be followed when the parameters of the unit are set up from the
initial point of finding the individual parameter description in this handbook to the actual setup. By use of various illustrations, the following will guide the user through the whole procedure for parameter setup step by
step.

10.1.2 Finding the selected parameter


The first step in the parameter setup is to find the correct parameter descriptions.
You can find all parameters in the document AGC 200 Parameter List.

10.1.3 Parameter descriptions


Each parameter description is structured according to the same principles. Under the parameter title heading,
the detailed parameter descriptions are illustrated and presented. First, a table indicating the parameter facts
related to the individual parameter title is presented:
1000 G-P> 1
No.

Setting

Min. setting

Max. setting

Factory setting

1001

Setpoint

-50.0%

0.0%

-5.0%

1002

Timer

0.1 s

100.0 s

10.0 s

1003

Relay output A

Not used

R3 (relay 3)

Not used

1004

Relay output B

Not used

R3 (relay 3)

Not used

1005

Enable

OFF

ON

ON

1006

Fail class

Due to the character of the parameters, small differences may exist between the individual tables.
The first column indicates the menu number in the display.
The second column indicates the changeable setting in the display.
The third and fourth columns indicate the minimum/maximum setpoint available for this setting.
The fifth column indicates the default setpoint of the unit from the factory. When it is necessary, additional
information will be supplied after the table in order to make the individual parameter descriptions as informative as possible.

10.1.4 Setup
At this point of the process, you will have located the specific parameter description that you were looking for.
Now, follow the menu structure presented earlier in this handbook in order to set up the individual parameters. (In this overall example, we have chosen to change the setpoint of the parameter 1000 G -P>).

DEIF A/S

Page 322 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Procedure for parameter setup

Step 1: Enter the parameter menu by pressing the


Step 2: Use the
tection. Press

Step 3: Use the

button.

and

push-buttons to locate the selected parameter group, in this case 1000 Pro-

and

push-buttons to locate the selected parameter. Press

Step 4: Enter password to change the setpoint


Step 5: Use the

Step 6: Press

DEIF A/S

and

push-buttons to increase/decrease the setpoint setting.

; the new setpoint setting has now been saved.

Page 323 of 324

AGC 200 DRH 4189340609 UK

Parameter list

11. Parameter list


11.1 Parameter list
11.1.1 Parameter list
Please see the separate document AGC 200 Parameter List, document no. 4189340605.

DEIF A/S

Page 324 of 324

You might also like